Contents

PREFACE

SECTION1 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CODE

SECTION2 DEFINITIONS

SECTION3 GENERAL REQUREMENTS

SECTION4 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

STANDARDS

SECTION5 PUBLIC HEALTH AND SAFETY

SECTION6 PRECAUTIONS DURING BUILDING

CONSTRUCTION

SECTION7 WATER SUPPLY SERVICES

SECTION8 SEWAGE AND WASTE

DISPOSAL

SECTION9 PLUMBING

SECTION10 SOLID WASTE DISPOSAL

SECTION11 ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL

INSTALLATIONS

SECTION12 LOADS

SECTION13 EXCAVATION AND FOUNDATIONS

SECTION14 TIMBER CONSTRUCTION

SECTION15 CONCRETE BLOCK MASONRY

SECTION16 PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE

SECTION17 STRUCTURAL STEEL

SECTION18 SMALL BUILDINGS

APPENDICES

A BRITISH STANDARDS AND CODES APPLICABLE

B U.S. AGENCIES AND STANDARDS

C SHEET METAL GAUGES

D HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

E WEIGHTS OF BUILDING MATERIAL

F ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES FOR HANDICAPPED PERSONS

G GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR FIRE RESISTIVE CONSTRUCTION

H REQUIREMENTS OF GROUP OCCUPANCIES

I CLASSIFICATION BY TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION

 INTRODUCTION

This Second Edition follows a review of building practices in the OECS and discussions with the
building and planning professionals. The constructors of small buildings in the OECS generally
follow custom and tradition in the design and construction practices. The Building Guidelines make
use of the building traditions that lead to "safe” construction and introduced construction methods
required for the proper use of contemporary materials.

These Building Guidelines are to be used for the design and construction of simple buildings suck
as private dwellings and small retail shops of less than 3,000 square feet in gross area. Designers
and constructors of buildings outside the scope of the Guidelines must consult the Building Code
for the relevant design and construction requirements.

The impact of Hurricane Andrew and Hurricane Hugo on small buildings showed the importance
of careful construction of the building frame, and of the installation of firm holding down
mechanisms for the roof and especially for light timber buildings many of which are overturned by
high winds. This edition therefore includes more diagrams and sketches of roof and floor
construction and illustrates the alternative holding down methods acceptable.

In some countries of the OECS many houses are constructed with concrete roofs. While properly
constructed concrete roofs should not fail under hurricane winds, yet these roofs are vulnerable to
earthquake forces, and very vulnerable to bad construction. The Guidelines show the appropriate
methods for constructing concrete roofs.

The main differences between the effects of wind and earthquakes on buildings are to be found in
the revised Building Code, but the effects on small buildings within the scope of the Guidelines are
generally dependent on the siring on the building and the care with which the construction is
carried out for ease of reference, a Table is included in the Appendix giving the main differences
between wind and earthquakes.

The construction of steel framed buildings for small houses is being examined by some
Governments, as this system offers speed of construction and savings in cost over mere traditional
construction methods. However the system must be designed to resist the hurricane force winds
and to be resistant to corrosion. This Edition includes guidance to Developers on the requirements
for design and construction of small steel framed buildings.

Some sketches have been taken from the Hurricane-Resistant Construction Manual prepared by the
UNCHS/UNDP in 1991, so as to reinforce the message of the Guidelines that "safe" construction is
possible at acceptable costs, if care is taken to implement the recommendations given.

July 1994

Note: The Planning Authority of the Commonwealth of Dominica restricts the use of the
Guidelines to buildings of less than 2,500 square feet of gross floor area, and of not more than 2
stories.

November 1996
 PREFACE

The chain of islands which comprise the Organization of Eastern Caribbean States is historically
subject to the frequent invasions of destructive hurricanes, and in some islands the additional
hazard of earthquakes. Volcanic eruptions are also hazards in at least two of the islands of the
group. Unfortunately also many houses, generally owned or occupied by the poor, are sited in
gullies or in flood plains and are especially vulnerable to floods caused by high rainfall resulting
from the frequent tropical depressions and hurricanes.

The Governments of the OECS have recognized that the damage caused by these extreme natural
events affect the poor to a significant extent, and have placed emphasis on the development of
building standards which would prevent or mitigate the damage so caused. The Governments are
also revising existing planning and building regulations so as to more responsive to the current
needs, and to ensure as far as it possible to do so that all buildings are constructed in a "safe"
manner and resistant to the natural hazards.

The OECS Secretariat has therefore, with the assistance of the United Nations Development
Program and through the UNCHS/UNDP Project for Program Support to the Human Settlements
Sector in the OECS (CAR/89/006), developed standard building codes and guidelines which speak
directly to the specific requirement of each OECS country. The codes and guidelines are based on
the Caribbean Uniform Building Code (CUBiC) and other regional codes such as the
Bahamas Building Code, the Jamaica National Building Code and the Turks and Caicos Islands
Building Code, A list of codes and standards quoted is appended. The codes and guidelines so
developed should become part of each country's regulatory mechanisms for ensuring adequate
building standards.

It is recognized that the large amount of informal housing present in most countries will be outside
of the regulatory stream, and that other mechanisms must be devised to improve such housing. It is
recognized also that the imposition of building code and guidelines may appear to lead to higher
costs of buildings especially for those persons who cannot afford the costs required to construct or
upgrade a house to the minimum acceptable standard. It is recommended that each country
encourage house owners and occupiers to improve their housing to the minimum standards of
safety and structural integrity and that technical advice be offered to such persons who may be
applying for permission to construct a new home or to renovate an existing one. The cost of
upgrading a house to the minimum acceptable standard will in most cases be very small when
compared to the costs of complete rebuilding which may be necessary in the event of damage by a
hurricane, flood or earthquake.

The development of an adequately staffed building inspectorate is necessary to ensure that the
minimum standards stared in the code and guidelines are maintained. The inspectorate will be
expected to ensure compliance with the minimum standards set out in the code and also to assist
home owners where possible in understanding the requirements of the code and guidelines.

No code can be expected to provide answers to all of the problems faced by builders. It is
considered however that the code and guidelines produced for the OECS countries are responsive
to the environmental concerns of the countries and in keeping with the accepted building practices
in the Region. The code provides administrative and enforcement requirements relating to the
building practices and use of acceptable materials and building systems. The code also provides for
approval of any system or material which can be demonstratively proven to be resistant to the
natural hazards. In this way new building systems which may be more efficient than the ones in
current use can be accepted without endangering the integrity of the buildings or the lives of the
occupants.

1
The OECS Secretariat is grateful to the UNDP for its assistance in this vital area of the principles
of design and construction of the housing sector.

PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION

This edition of the Code results from reviews of and comments on the draft Building code by some
of the planning Authorities/Boards of the OECS with the assistance of the UNCHS Consultant.

Since the draft Code was circulated in 1992, there have been other parallel efforts by the OECS and
UNCHS to improve the standard of building and infrastructure in the Region. It is to be noted that
the OECS Secretariat has prepared and .circulated an Environmental Impact Assessment
Procedures Handbook and the UNCHS has assisted the OECS in the preparation of planning and
infrastructure standards. A draft Model Physical planning Act has also been circulated to the
OECS.

These documents provide planning and environmental guidelines, which along with the Building
Code will provide the Planning Authorities with the tools needed for examination of development
proposals to ensure that all developments are in concert with the physical, social and economic
environment of the States. There are other laws of Antigua and Barbuda which must be adhered in
the construction and maintenance of developments. Of particular interest to designers and
developers are those laws which control the use of land and any developments on the land, public
health electricity and the generation and distribution of electricity. Developers are required to
contact the relevant Ministry for copies of the legislation which affects the proposed developments.

The use of the Caribbean Uniform Building Code (CUBiC) as the preferred code of reference has
been emphasized. CUBiC was developed specifically for use in the Caribbean and contains the
design and construction standards applicable to the environment. It is therefore recommended that
designers of structures consult CUBiC where indicated in the Antigua and Barbuda Building Code.
As CUBiC does not yet include standards for foundations and building services, the appropriate US
and UK standards have been used and are so noted.

The changes and amendments in this edition have generally been to clarify certain specifications,
particularly in the use of concrete block for load bearing walls, and in the construction of steel
framed building systems. Designers are given some latitude in submitting alternate designs for
approval of the Board provide the designs submitted meet with basic criteria set out in the Building
Code and in the Environmental Impact Assessment Procedures Handbook.

Additional appendices have been added to provide more specific information on:

■ the construction requirements of each Occupancy Group and for each Construction Type
■ weights of building material commonly used in the Caribbean
■ general guidelines for fire resistive construction
■ Accessibility guidelines for handicapped persons

2
The committees which reviewed the draft Building Code and Building Guidelines considered that
there should be provision made for access to public buildings by handicapped persons. This
appendix provides basic information and other references for the construction of access ways and
facilities for handicapped persons. This information has also been included in the Planning and
Infrastructure standards prepared by UNCHS/OECS.

It is recommended that the planning Authority arrange for periodic reviews of the Code. The
primary objectives of these reviews will be co ensure that the Code is responsive to the
environmental needs of Antigua and Barbuda and is in keeping with current design and
Construction technology.

March 1995
PREFACE TO THE THIRD EDITION

(ANTIGUA AND BARBUDA)

This edition includes changes and amendments resulting from discussions in Antigua and Barbuda
with the Ministry responsible for planning and with engineers, architects, and planning officials.
The main changes have been to introduce development standards as Section 19 of the Code. This
has been done in response to the request of the Development Control Authority and to ensure that
applicants for development permission have all of the relevant information in one document. This
new Section however, does not replace the need for developers to follow the requirements laid
down in the Planning and Infrastructure Standards Manual, in the same way that the other Sections
of the Code require engineers to examine other relevant Codes and Standards for technical
information.

Other amendments have been made to include technical information now in the Land Development
(Interim Control) Regulations 1976. This has been done as a preliminary to amending the
Regulations to include and mandate the use of the Antigua and Barbuda Building Code.

Amendments have been also made to Sections 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 8, 10, and 11. The amendments to these
Sections are noted on every other page of the documents amended.

June 1995

3
 PREFACE TO THE FOURTH EDITION

(COMMONWEALTH OF DOMINICA)

This edition includes the changes and amendments resulting from the UNCHS mission to the
Commonwealth of Dominica in November, 1996.

The changes have been made to customize the documents to the procedures and practices of the
planning Authority of Dominica and to include in formation on the relevant legislation applicable
to Dominica.

The maximum size of building for which the Building Guidelines have been developed has been
reduced from 3,000 square feet to 2,500 square feet of gross floor area and of not more than 2
stories. It must be recognized however that the requirements of the Building Code govern the
construction of all buildings and that the information given in the Building Guidelines is consistent
with that given in the Code.

The use of a Special Inspector has been made more specific. All buildings which are accessible to
the public must be carefully designed and constructed and it has been made mandatory that a
Special Inspector be employed for certain classes of buildings as described in the Code.

Discussions with most of the Planning Authorities of the OECS have indicated that there is a great
difficulty in attracting and keeping the cadre of experienced engineers and technicians required to
staff a functioning Authority. It is recommended that the Authority examine other management
models for ensuring effective control of developments. One model used in France and in the
neighboring Islands of Martinique and Guadeloupe is worthy of examination for possible adoption
in the OECS.

The amended Sections are dated on every other page of the Section amended.

The updating of this Code has been carried out for the OECS and Caricom under the direction of
Tony Gibbs. C.Eng. and with the assistance of UNCHS/UNDP and CDMP/OAS.

November 1996

4
 SECTION 1

ADMINISTRATION OF THE CODE

Contents

101 TITLE

102 SCOPE

102.1 General
102.2 Applicable Legislation

103 PERMITS AND FEES

104 EXISTING BUILDINGS

105 HISTORIC BUILDINGS

106 HURRICANE PRECAUTIONS

107 ALTERNATE MATERIALS AND TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION

107.1 General
107.2 Standards
107.3 Application

108 UNSAFE BUILDINGS

109 APPLICATION TO BUILD

109.1 General
109.2 Form of Application to Build

110 PLANS

110.1 Location Plan

110.2 Site Plan
110.3 Subdivision Plan
110.4 Building Plans

111 APPROVAL IN PART

112 USE OF OTHER CODES AND STANDARDS

(1-1)
113 INSPECTIONS

113.1 Procedure
113.2 Special Inspector
113.3 Procedure for Appointment of Special Inspector

113 CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY

114 COMPLIANCE

(1-2)
 SECTION 1

ADMINISTRATION OF THE CODE

101 TITLE

This compilation of rules shall be known as "The Commonwealth of

Dominica Building Code", and may be cited as such, or as the "Building
Code," and will be referred to hereinafter as "this Code."

102 SCOPE

102.1 General

(a) The provisions of this Code shall apply to the design and
construction of new buildings, and the alteration,
reconstruction, demolition, removal, relocation,
maintenance and occupancy of existing buildings or any
appurtenances connected or attached to such buildings or
structures.

(b) The appendices included in this Code are not intended for
enforcement unless specifically referenced in this Code text.
The latest edition of referenced Standards and Codes shall
be used where appropriate. The principal reference Code is
the Caribbean Uniform Building Code (CUBiC) published
by the Caricom Secretariat, Georgetown, Guyana.

(c) Unless otherwise authorized by the Authority, the

Commonwealth of Dominica Building Code takes
precedence over any other Code or Standard.

102.2 Applicable Legislation

a) The provisions of this Code are nor intended to supersede or

amend any legislation in force in Dominica which affects the
design and construction of developments or the
responsibilities or authority of the Planning Authority.

b) Owners and developers should be aware of and consult the

following legislation in force unless amended or appeared by
subsequent legislation:

○ Development and planning Corporation Act, 1972

○ Town and Country Planning Act, 1972

(1-3)
 ○ Electricity Supply Act Chapter 43:70

○ Hydro-Electricity Rules CAP. 258

○ Beach Control Act CAP 42:04

c) Developers/owners should also consult the Planning and

Infrastructure Standards Manual prepared by UNCHS and
the Planning Applications Guide prepared by the Physical
Planning Division of the Economic Development Unit of the
Government of the Commonwealth of Dominica for
guidance with respect to the layout and infrastructure
requirements of a development, and other legislation
affecting the safety and health of workers and occupants of a
building or development.

103 PERMITS AND FEES

a) A permit is required whenever work regulated by this Code

is to be undertaken. To obtain a permit the owner shall file
an application with the Authority as described in 109 "APP
LICATION TO BUILD".

b) After issuance of a permit an application may be made by the

owner for a revision of the permit and such application shall
be made in the same manner as for the original permit.

c) The approval of the Authority of proposed work shall be

deemed to have lapsed and the right of the owner under the
permit terminate if:

i) the work authorized by the permit is not commenced

within 1 2 months from the date of issuance of the
permit, or

ii) work is suspended for a period of 24 months or more,

or

iii) the applicant does not comply with all the conditions
regarding payment of fees as required by the
applicable legislation in force.

d) Permit fees payable and all procedures and conditions

applicable thereto shall be established by the Authority in
accordance with the applicable Regulations.

(1-4)
104 EXISTING BUILDINGS

(a) Alterations, repair or rehabilitation work may be made

to any existing building without requiring the building to
comply with all of the requirements of this Code
provided that the alteration, repair or rehabilitation work
conforms to the requirements of this Code for new
construction. The Authority shall determine the extent, if
any, to which the existing building shall be made to
conform to the requirements of this Code for new
construction.

(b) Alterations, repairs or rehabilitation work shall not cause

an existing building to become unsafe.

(c) If the occupancy classification of an existing building is

changed, the building shall be made to conform to the
intent of this Code for the new occupancy classification
as established by the Authority.

(d) Repairs and alterations, not covered by the preceding

paragraphs of this Section, restoring a building lo its
condition previous to damage or deterioration, or
altering it in conformity with the provisions of this
Code or in such manner as will not extend or increase
an existing non-conformity or hazard, may be made
with the same kind of materials as those of which the
building is constructed; but not more than twenty-five
percent of the roof covering of a building shall be
replaced in any period of twelve (12) months unless the
entire roof covering is made to conform with the
requirements of this Code for new buildings.

(e) No building shall be removed or demolished without the

approval of the Authority.

105 HISTORIC BUILDINGS

Repairs, alterations and additions necessary for the

preservation, restoration, rehabilitation or continued use
of a building or structure may be made without
conformance to all the requirements of this Code when
authorized by the Director and approved by the Authority,
provided:

(a) The building or structure has been designated by official

action of the legally constituted authority as having
special historical or architectural significance.

(1-5)
 (b) The restored building or structure will be no more
hazardous based on consideration of life, fire, sanitation
and safety, than the original building.

(c) The owner has submitted for the approval of the Authority
plans and specifications for the work to be carried out.
These plans and specifications must provided by an
engineer or architect engaged by the owner and approved
by the Authority.

(d) The Authority in the public interest of health, safely and

welfare has required all necessary corrections to be made
before use and occupancy.

(e) The decision of the Director is transmitted in writing to the

Authority within thirty days, where the Authority at its next
regularly scheduled meeting may on its own initiative
review the decision of the Director to ensure that adequate
criteria have been utilized. The Authority may modify,
rescind or confirm the decision of the Director.

106 HURRICANE PRECAUTIONS

During such periods of time as are designated by the Government as

being a hurricane watch, the owner, occupant or user of a property
shall take precautions for the securing of buildings and equipment.
Fabric awnings and swing signs shall be lashed to the ground, and
such other precautions shall be taken for the securing of buildings or
structures or material or equipment as may be reasonably required.

107 ALTERNATE MATERIALS AND TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION

107.1 General

The provisions of this Code are not intended to prevent the use of
types of construction or materials or methods of designs as
alternates to the standards herein set forth. Such alternates may be
offered for approval and their consideration shall be as specified in
this Section.

107.2 Standards

The types of construction or materials or methods of design referred

to in this Code shall be considered as standards of quality and
strength. New types of construction or materials or methods of
design shall be at least equal to these standards for the
corresponding use intended.

(1-6)
 107.3 Application

a) Any person desiring to use types of construction or

materials or methods of design not specifically mentioned
in this Code shall file with the Authority proof in support
of claims that may be made regarding the safety and
sufficiency of such types of construction or materials or
methods of design, and request approval and permission
for their use.

b) The Board-Authority shall approve such alternate types of

construction or materials or methods of design if it is clear
that the standards of this Code are at least equaled. If, in
the opinion of the Authority, the standards of this Code
will not be satisfied by the requested alternate, it shall
refuse approval.

108 UNSAFE BUILDINGS

When any building, construction or excavation or part thereof is in an

unsafe condition as a result of being open or unguarded, or because of
danger from fire or risk of accident because of its ruinous or dilapidated
state, faulty construction or otherwise, due notice to correct such condition
shall be given by the Director. When such notice has not been complied
with the Authority may:

a) demolish, remove or make safe such building, construction,

excavation or part thereof at the expense of the owner.

b) take such other measures as it may consider necessary to protect

the public.

109 APPLICATION TO BUILD

109.1 General

A person wishing to erect a building or structure, or to carry our a

development as defined in the applicable legislation in force, shall comply
with the requirements of the said legislation and also with the
requirements of this Code.

109.2 Form of Application to Build

a) A person wishing to build shall apply in the manner prescribed in

the legislation and the established procedures of the Authority
and as herein set forth.

b) Each application shall be accompanied by the required number and

type of plans appropriate to the particular type of development
project for which planning permission is sought.

(1-7)
 c) Three copies of the relevant plans shall be submitted with each
application. These plans include the location plan, the site plan, the
subdivision plan and the building detail plan; but the plans for a
particular type of development shall be those specified in the
Planning Applications Guide.

d) The information to be contained in a location plan, a site plan, a

subdivision plan, a building detail plan and the scales to which these
plans are to be drawn shall be as set out in Subsection 110 of this
Code.

e) Every drawing, specifications and accompanying data which

accompanies an application for planning permission shall be
legibly signed by the maker thereof and shall bear his full address.

f) All drawings shall be individually numbered for ease of reference.

Revisions shall carry revision numbers.

g) The Authority may require structural and other details, computations,

stress diagrams, the basis of the calculations and other data
necessary to describe the construction and they shall bear the
signature of the person responsible for the design. The
qualifications of the person or persons responsible for these derails
shall be stated.

h) Where an alteration or extension to an existing building is applied

for, any part of the existing building to be demolished must be
clearly indicated and distinguishable from the new construction.
110 PLANS

110.1 Location Plan

a) Where it is available, a copy of the Director of Overseas Surveys

Plan must be used the basis for the location plan. These plans are
available for most areas of the island and are obtainable at the
Land Registry office or at the office of the Authority.

b) The location plan must be drawn to a scale of:

- For towns at 1:25000

- For villages and rural areas at 1:500

c) The location plan must show the name and locations of exciting
roads and fixed and easily identifiable points such as streams,
road junctions, bridges, and nearby houses.

(1-8)
110.2 Site Plan

a) At the option of the applicant, site plans may be drawn to a scale of 1:200
(1” to 20’) or 1:500 (1" to 40’) or 1:100 (1" = 100’) as may be appropriate.

b) The Site Plan must show:

i) The area, boundaries and principal dimensions of the land.

ii) The location of existing buildings on the land and on the lands
immediately adjacent.

iii) The location and spread of any existing mature trees on the land.

iv) The location of any new proposed building and the relevant
dimensions of appropriate setbacks.

v) Such contours or spot levels as are necessary for determining the

grade of any proposed road and for the proposed drainage.

vi) Location and width of existing and proposed means of access

including roads adjacent to the property.

vii) Water and sanitary drainage systems.

viii) The proposed landscaping plan.

ix) Any land reserved for public access or for public use.

Subdivision Plan

a) The scale of subdivision plans shall be at least:

- For subdivided areas of l/2 acre or more, 1:1250

- For subdivided areas of less than l/2 acre, 1:200

b) The subdivision plan must show:

i) All relevant physical features related to the proposed development

such as water courses, rock outcrops, trees, swamps, and existing
buildings, roads and walks.

ii) Such contours or spot elevations as are necessary for determining

the grade of any proposed road and for proposed drainage.

iii) The boundaries, area, and principal dimensions of the land.

(1-9)
 iv) At least one boundary must be connected to the
trigonometrical control station or alternatively, to identifiable
points of detail on the national map sheets (scale 1:5000)
available at the Survey Department.

v) The dimensions and area of each proposed subdivided lot.

vi) The location of proposed building, if any.

vii) The roads, walks, and utility services proposed to be made

available to each lot.

viii) The use to which each lot is proposed lo be put, e.g.

residential, commercial or industrial purposes, or for
churches, schools or parks. Residential lots shall be
designated as high, medium, or low density. (See Planning
and Infrastructure Standards Manual)

ix) Any land reserved for public access or other public use.

x) The proposed location of fire hydrants.

110.4 Building Plans

a) Building plans at customary scales to include:

i) Floor Plan generally to Scale 1/8" or 1/4” to 1' 0” or metric

equivalent

To show:

- room sizes
- positioning of doors and windows
- materials used in construction
- thickness and structure of each wall
- size of closets

ii) Elevations and Sections generally to Scale 1/4'' to 1' 0'' or

metric equivalent. For details scales should be 1/2” to 1'
(1:20).

To show:

-roof heights (floor to ceiling) and pitch

-height of floor above ground
-positioning of doors and windows

iii) Foundation Plan

To show:

-foundation layout and sizes of members

-type of soil on which the foundation will rest

(1-10)
 iv) Structural Plan

To show:

- details of beams
- details of columns
- details of slabs
- details of all walls
- details of cisterns
- all reinforcement derails
- roof design and construction details
- foundation details, piling etc

v) Plumbing

To show:

- location of inspection boxes

- location and details of grease traps

- sizes and slopes of the pipes used in the

sewer lines

- details of septic tanks and soakaways

- water storage and catchment details
- sizes of water lines
- location of shut-off valves
- size and location of pumps

vi) Electricity

To show:

- electrical layout in floor plan

- amount of wires in conduit and wire gauges
- circuit numbers
- panel sizes and locations

111 APPROVAL IN PART

a) Where approval of a portion of a building or development is desired prior

to the issuance of a permit for the whole project, application shall be made
for the complete development, and detailed plans for which immediate
approval is desired shall be filed with the Authority.

b) Should a permit be issued for a part of a building or development the

holder of such permit may proceed with construction without the
assurance that the permit for the entire building or development will be
granted. The granting of such permit will depend on the approval of the
Authority of the application including all requirements as set out in
Sub-section 109.

(1-11)
112 USE OF OTHER CODES AND STANDARDS

a) The Authority shall require that the laws: rules and regulations of any other
regulatory body or authority having jurisdiction, where such laws, rules and
regulations are applicable and are known to the Authority, shall be satisfied
before a permit shall be issued.

b) The Authority shall require such evidence, as in its opinion is reasonable, to

show such other approvals The Authority shall not thereby be held
responsible for enforcement of such regulations that it is not specifically
authorized to en force.

c) All tests required by the Authority to show that materials and methods of
construction proposed by the applicant meet the requirements of this Code
shall be carried out by the applicant at his expense. The testing agency to be
used by the applicant must be approved by the Authority.

d) The Authority shall publish in the Official Gazette a list of the Codes and
Standards approved for use in this Code, and the Director shall make such
lists available to the applicant.

113 INSPECTIONS

113.1 Procedure

a) The Director, upon receipt of 48 hours notice from the builder,

exclusive of Saturdays, Sundays and declared Public Holidays, is
authorized to make the following inspections and either approve the
portion of the works completed or shall notify the builder in writing
where such work does not meet with his approval:

(i) SETTIN OUT

(ii) FOUNDATIONS BEFORE CONCRETING

(iii) STRUCTURAL FRAME AND ROOF

(iv) RING BEAMS CASING AND REINFORCEMENT

(v) PLUMBING AND PLAINS

(vi) ELECTRICAL WORK – IN ASSOCIATION

WITH THE ELECTRICAL INSPECTOR

(1-12)
 (vii) OTHER INSPECTIONS TO BE MADE AS THE OWNER,
BUILDER OR DIRECTOR MAY REASONABLY REQUIRE

(viii) SPECIAL INSPECTIONS OF ALL MECHANICAL

INSTALLATIONS

(ix) FINAL INSPECTION (OCCUPANCY CERTIFICATE)

b) All inspections shall be carried out by persons employed by the Authority

as Building Inspectors or by suitably qualified persons approved by the
Authority and appointed to carry out such inspection.

c) Work shall not be done on any part of a building or structure beyond the
point indicated in each successive inspection without first obtaining the
written approval of the Director. Such written approval shall normally be
given only after an inspection shall have been made of each successive
step in the construction as indicated by each of the foregoing nine
inspections where appropriate.

d) Reinforcing steel or structural frame work of any part of any building

shall not be covered or concealed in any manner whatsoever without first
obtaining the approval of the Building Inspector or the Special Inspector.

e) If circumstances warrant, the Authority in its discretion may waive such

inspection in writing to the owner and builder, but this does not absolve
the owner and builder from the responsibility of any construction in
contravention of the Building Regulations and this Code.

113.2 Special Inspector

a) The Director shall impose a condition on the permit requiring the owner
to employ a Special Inspector for the inspection of the structural
framework or any part thereof, for the installation of equipment and for
the review of all plans relating to such work, The Special Inspector shall
be employed for the following projects:

(i) Buildings or structures (or part thereof) of unusual design or method

of construction.

(ii) Marine construction.

(iii) Installation of equipment such as elevators, power plants and water

and sewage treatment plants.

(1-13)
 (iii) Public buildings in Groups A, B, C and F (Section 3 of this Code)
and other buildings so designated by the Authority.

b) For certain other projects such as those listed under the Director may
impose the condition requiring the use of a Special Inspector as follows:

(i) Major foundations and/or pile driving.

(ii) Major site works.

(iii) Drainage and waste disposal.

c) The Special Inspector shall be an experienced and professionally qualified

structural engineer for the inspection of projects listed in 113.2 (a) (i), and
(iii) and a professionally qualified and experienced engineer of the relevant
discipline for projects listed at 113.2 (a) (ii) and 113.2 b).

d) The Special Inspector shall ensure compliance with this Code and shall
submit regular progress reports and inspection reports to the Director with
recommendations for any remedial or enforcement action required.

e) The Special Inspector shall be employed at the expense of the Developer

and engaged on the basis of a recommendation from the professional
institution or the Secretary General of he Council of Caribbean Engineering
Organizations or similar bodies in the USA, Canada or the UK.

f) At the completion of the construction work, the Special Inspector shall

submit a Certificate of Compliance to the Director if he considers that the
work was done in compliance with this Code and in accordance with the
approved plan or plans, His duties shall end with the submission of such
certificate.

g) Final Inspection shall be made by the Director before a Certificate of

Occupancy is issued.

113.3 Procedure for Appointment of Special Inspector

The procedure to be followed by applicants for a Building Permit for the

construction of buildings which would require the services of a Special Inspector is
as follows:

a) The developer should first apply to the Authority for outline permission
with conceptual drawings and in formation on the proposed development.
The basic information required at 110.1, 110.2 and 110.3 in addition to the
building layout plans must be supplied. The Authority may in approving the
outline permission place conditions on the approval requiring, as may be
appropriate, the carrying out of an environmental impact assessment, an
economic feasibility study and the employment of a Special Inspector.

(1-14)
 b) When the Authority grants this outline permission the developer
can then engage architects and engineers to provide preliminary
drawings and other information required for development
permission. The drawings and information will include:

i) preliminary drawings will at l/8th scale showing the

details as required by 110.4.

ii) The name and qualifications of the engineer who will be

employed as a Special Inspector for the review of the
structural plans and for the inspection of construction.

iii) The terms of reference for the employment of the

Special inspector.

c) On grant of the development permission, the developer should

then proceed to develop the information required for a building
permit. The information to be supplied will include:

i) all architectural drawings to scales of at least l/4 in to 1

fool or similar,

ii) all structural and civil engineering derails and

computations,

iii) all mechanical and electrical derails, and

iv) sewage treatment and disposal details.

(d) The architectural, structural and civil engineering details required

must be accompanied by a certificate of compliance from the
Special Inspector where this is required under the conditions of
grant of the development permission and before a building permit
can be granted.

114 CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY

a) A new building shall not be occupied or a change made in

occupancy or the nature of the use of a building or part of a
building until after the Director shall have issued a Certificate of
Occupancy.

b) Upon completion of a building erected in accordance with

approved plans and after final inspection herein referred to, and
upon application therefore, the Director shall issue a Certificate
of Occupancy stating the nature of the occupancy permitted.

(1-15)
 c) A temporary certificate of occupancy may be issued for a portion or
portions of a building which may safely be occupied prior to final
completion of the building.

Note: A Certificate of Occupancy will not be issued until necessary Certificates of

Completion have been issued by the Electrical Inspector in accordance with
electricity regulations in force.

115 COMPLIANCE

a) The issuance and granting of a permit shall not be deemed or

construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of this
Code.

b) The issuance of a permit upon plans and specifications, shall not

prevent the Authority from thereafter requiring the correction of
errors on such plans and specifications, or from preventing building
operations being carried on thereunder when in violation of this Code
or any Regulations applicable thereto.

c) When during the construction of the work carried out under the
permit, from issuance of permit to issuance of Certificate of
Occupancy, the Director reasonably believes that approved plans are
in violation of this Code, he shall notify the permit holder and the
permit holder shall correct the drawings or otherwise satisfy the
Director that the design and/or working drawings are in compliance
with this Code.

d) Compliance with this Code is the responsibility of the permit holder

until the issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy; at which time it shall
become the responsibility of the owner.

e) The permit granted for the construction of the work shall be available
at the construction site during normal working hours for inspection
by the Director.

(1-16)
 SECTION 2

DEFINITIONS

In the interest of brevity, words in singular where applicable, shall be constructed lo include the
plural, and words in plural shall, where applicable, be construed to include the singular.

Access Entrance or opening.

Accessible Adequate clearance for inspection, service, repair, and

replacement, and within physical reach.

Accessory use A building or structure, the use of which is incidental to the main
building structure.

Addition Any extension or increase in floor are a or height of a building or

Structure.

Alley Any public space, or thoroughfare, 20’ 0” or less in width, with

public right of way.

Alteration Any change or modification of construction, arrangement of space,

and/or occupancy of a building; or change in the area of cubic
contents; a change in equipment.

Apartment One or more rooms occupied as a home or residence for an

individual or a family or a household. The existence of, or the
installation of sink accommodations and cooking facilities with in
a room or suite of rooms shall be deemed sufficient to classify
such room or suite of rooms as an apartment.

Apartment building A building which is used or intended to be used for human

habitation as a residence for two or more families living in
separate quarters.

Application An application to the Authority for permission to carry out

development or for an approval required by the Land Development
and Control Act and any subsidiary legislation made hereunder
including the Building Code of the Commonwealth of Dominica.

Approved Approved by the Authority under the requirements of this Code,

including the Director or other designated persons given
jurisdiction by this Code.

(2-1)
Architect A person technically qualified and approved by the Board or Authority to
design and supervise the construction of buildings and in accordance with
existing laws of she State.

Area of storey The gross area of such Storey measured from the internal faces of external
walls or where there are no walls, to the outside edge of floors.

Area of building The total of the areas of the stories comprising that building, measured from
inside the face of the external walls.

Attic Shall be taken to mean any space immediately under the roof rafters and
above the ceiling joists of the Storey nearest the roof.

Automatic Applied to a door, window, or other opening. Not requiring manual

operation.

Awning A projecting canopy.

Authority The Authority or other body appointed by the Government for the
administration of the Code.

Balcony That portion of a seating space of an assembly room. The lowest part of
which is raised four feet or more above the level of the main floor.

Balcony exterior A landing or porch projecting from the wall of a building. Where serving as
a required means of egress the long side shall be at least 50 percent open and
the open area above the guard rail shall be so distributed as to prevent the
accumulation of smoke or toxic gases.

Basement Any storey or part of a storey where more than half of the height from the
finished floor to the finished ceiling is below the average of associated
finished ground levels at external walls.

Boundary line A line dividing One site from another or from a street reservation or other
publicly owned space.

Board See Authority

Building Includes any erection, structure or any part of a building erected on or made
on or in or under any lands, and where the context so permits, includes the
land on, in or under which the building is situated but does not include plant
or machinery comprised in a building.

(2-2)
 Where a building is separated into two or more parts by fire
division walls each part may be deemed a separate building
for the purpose of this Code.

Building line The line established by law beyond which no building

shall extend except as provided for by the requirements of
this Code.

Building operations Includes rebuilding operations, structural alterations of, or

additions to buildings and any other operations normally
undertaken by a person carrying on business as a builder.

Bulkhead A part of a structure enclosing stairs, elevator machinery,

or ventilating equipment; the part of an external wall
immediately below a shop window; are raining type
Structure.

Canopy A covering to an entrance way or walk way fixed to a

building.

Car port A covering are a for sheltering a motor vehicle, not fully
enclosed by walls.

Code The Building Code of the Commonwealth of Dominica.

Combustible Any material that will ignite at or below are temperature of

1200 degrees F. and which ignited will continue to bum or
glow.

Condominium Multi-units with individual ownership of single units.

Corridor An access connecting more than one room; a link at each

floor level, open or covered.

Construction Unit building or component assembly additive process;

includes reconstruction and /or alteration and/or addition to
building or structure.

Court An open or occupied space enclosed at any level on two or

more sides by the walls of a building or in the case of a rear
court enclosed on three sides by the boundaries of the site.

Cubic content of a storey The volume of enclosed space measured a storey from the
internal faces of enclosing walls and from finished floor
level to ceiling level or where there is no ceiling to the
average of the underside of the roof construction.

Cubic content of a building The total of the cubic content of the stories comprising that
building.

(2-3)
Curtain wall Any prefabricated assembly of various components to
enclose a building usually supported externally from the
structural frame, and passing all Stories.

Dangerous building Any building which constitutes a danger to public safety

or to the safety of the occupants or adjacent buildings.

Dead load The weight of all walls, floors, roofs, partitions and other
permanent construction.

Developer See owner

Development Subject to the provisions of Section 8(2) of the Land

Development and Control Act means the carrying out of
building, engineering, mining or other operations in, on,
over or under land, or the making of any material change in
the use of any buildings or other land, or the segregation,
division, or subdivision of any building or land whether or
not any building, engineering or other operations have
been carried out or are intended to be carried out for the
formation of lots.

Dining room Any building or part thereof, in which food is dispensed or

served.

Director The Town and Country Planner or other person appointed

by the Government and responsible to the Authority for the
administration of this Code.

Dormitory A room in which sleeping accommodation is provided for

more that four persons.

Duplex building A building providing two separate apartments with or

without common entrance and/or exit facilities.

Dwelling A building occupied exclusively for residential purposes;

for the purposes of this Code, “dwelling” also includes any
verandah or porch attached permanently to the building.

Egress See means of Egress.

Elevator A lift or hoist; a device for carrying persons or goods up or

down.

Engineer A person technically qualified to design and supervise the

construction of building and civil engineering structures,
electrical, and who is approved by the board.

(2-4)
Engineering operations Includes the formation or laying out of means of access to
highways and other roads.

Enclosed Bounded by walls or floors or roof or ceilings provided that,

where a building is not fully enclosed by walls, the external
face of the external frame shall be deemed to be the line of
enclosure for the purpose of this Code.

Equipment Fixtures, fittings, appliances or apparatus of any sort within

or associated with a building whose installation is covered
by the requirements of this Code.

Erection In relation to buildings includes extension, alteration,

re-erection.

Escalator A moving inclined stairway for persons or goods.

Exit Court A yard or court providing egress to a further place.

Existing building Any building constructed or in the course of construction

prior to the effective date of this Code.

Fire Assembly The assembly of a fire door, fire window, or fire damper,
including all required hardware, anchorage, frames and
sills.

Fire Assembly, automatic closing A fire assembly which may remain in an open position and
which will close automatically if subjected to either of the
following:

(a) An increase in temperature.

(b) Products of combustion. Unless otherwise specified, the

closing device shall be one that is rated at a maximum
temperature of 165 degrees F.

Fire Assembly, self-closing A fire assembly which is kept in a normally closed position
and is equipped with an approved device to ensure closing
and latching after having been opened for use.

Fire division A portion of a building so separated from the rest by

fire-walls that it may be erected to the maximum height and
area allowed for the governing Occupancy and the Type of
Construction, independently of adjoining Occupancies or
Types of Construction.

Fire door A door and its assembly so constructed and placed as to

give protection against the passage of fire.

(2-5)
Fire escape A single or series of steel framed balconies attached to the
exterior walls at windows or doors and connected to each
other and to the ground by flights of Steel stairs.

Fire resisting Ability to resist fire and prevent its spread as regulated in
this Code. Fire resistant.

Fire retardant treated wood Wood that has been treated to retard spread of flame.

Flameproof The property of a material, usually decorative fabric,

whether treated or not treated, to not burst into flames or
support combustion when subjected to flames for a period
of 30 seconds.

Floor area, gross Gross floor area shall be the floor area with in the
perimeter of the outside walls of the building with no
deduction for corridors, stairs, closets, thickness of wall,
columns, or Other features.

Floor area, net Net floor area shall be the actual occupied area, not
including accessory unoccupied areas or thickness of
walls.

Formation level Finished ground level, see Grade

.
Foyer An area or space with in a building located between a
lobby and main entrance and the main floor.

Gallery That portion of the seating capacity of a theatre or

assembly room having a seating capacity of more than ten
persons and located above a balcony.

Garage A building, shed or enclosure, or part thereof, in which a

motor vehicle containing flammable liquid in its fuel tank
is housed or stored or repaired.
.
Grade (a) The average elevation of the ground paved or unpaved,
adjoining a building or structure, at the centre of each
exterior wall line.
(b) When used in connection with lumber, means a
division of sawn lumber into quality classes with
respect its physical and mechanical properties, as
defined by the association under whose rules the
lumber is controlled.

(2-6)
 (c) When used in connection with structural or reinforcing
steel, means the quality and strength of the material as
defined by the relevant ASTM or other recognized
international standard.

Gross Floor Area The total area of floors of all stories of the building
including common halls, stairways, porches, overhanging
balconies, and the thickness of walls.

Ground floor The lowest storey or part of a storey of a building of which

more than 50 % of the floor area is above the average of
associated finished ground levels at external walls and no
part of the floor area is more than 2 feet below such
associated ground levels.

Habitable room A room in a residential unit used for living, eating,

sleeping or cooking, but excluding baths, storage spaces
or corridors.

Height-building The vertical distance from grade to the highest finished

roof surface of a flat roof or to the average level to a gable
or hip roof.

Height-storey The vertical distance from top to top of two successive

floors or floor and roof.

Height-structure The height of a structure erected on the ground shall be

the vertical distance from grade to the highest point
thereof, and for roof structures shall be the vertical
distance from the mean level of the roof to the highest
point of such structure. In general the height of a structure
shall be its overall height.

Height of a wall The vertical dimension measured from top of foundation

or beam, to top of highest course, with or without tie
beam.

Hazardous operation A hazardous operation shall be classified as one which is

liable to give rise to fife and burning with extreme
rapidity, or from which poisonous fumes or explosions are
likely in the event of fire or leakage.

Horizontal exit A means of passage from one building into another

building occupied by the same tenant, or from one section
of a building to another section of the same building
occupied by the same tenant through a separation wall
having a minimum fire resistance of 2 hours.

(2-7)
Hotel Any building or group of buildings (including all
structures appurtenant thereto or within the
curtilage thereof) used or intended to be used for
the accommodation of guests for gain or reward.

Imposed Load All loads other than dead loads

Incombustible A material which in the form in which it is used

meets the following requirements:

(a)Material of which no part will ignite or burn when

submitted to fire.

(b)Material having a structural base of incombustible

material as defined in para. (a) above, with a
surfacing not more than 1/8 inch thick having
flame spread rating not greater than 50 when
tested in accordance with the appropriate
standards.

(c)Incombustible does not apply to surface finish

materials or to materials required to be
incombustible for reduced clearances to flues,
heating appliances or other materials, or

(d)No material shall be classed as incombustible

which is subject to increase of combustibility or
flame spreading rating, beyond the limits herein
established, through the effect of age, moisture or
other atmospheric condition.

Inspector A building inspector appointed by the Authority

under Section 19 0f the Act.

Joists Secondary horizontal supporting members in floors,

ceilings, or roof construction.

Jurisdiction The Development Control Authority, or any body

appointed by the Government for the
administration of this Code.

Lintel The beam or girder placed over an opening in a

wall which supports the construction above.

Live load Any load imposed or capable of being imposed on

a Structure other than dead load or wind load.

Lobby An enclosed vestibule directly accessible from the

main entrance.

(2-8)
Load bearing Any part of a building including foundations bearing a load
other than that due to its own weight or to wind pressure.

Lot A portion or parcel of land shown on the land register or in

a deed as a piece or parcel of land or an official
subdivision.

Lot line A line dividing one Lot from another or from a street or
other public space.

Manhole Defined in Section 9.

Masonry Brick, stone, plain concrete, hollow block, solid block or

other similar materials or units bonded together with mortar.
Reinforced concrete is not classified as masonry.

Means of egress Continuous path of travel from any point in a building or

structure to the open air outside at ground level.

(a) Exit is that portion of a means of egress which is

separated by walls, floors, doors or other means from
the area of the building from which escape is to be
made.

(b) Note; An interior aisle, corridor, hallway or other

means of travel used to reach an exit door is not an exit.

Mezzanine An intermediate floor placed in any storey or room. When

the total area of any such mezzanine floor exceeds 33-1/3
percent of the total floor area in that room or storey in
which the mezzanine floor occurs, it shall be considered as
constituting and additional storey. The clear height above
or below a mezzanine floor shall not be less than 7 feet.

Multiple family As in a building, meaning more than two families or

households living independently of each other and cooking
within their living quarters; includes apartments, tenements
and flats.

Normal dimension The dimension or size in which such material, part or unit
is usually manufactured or supplied.

Non-combustible See incombustible.

Non-conforming Applies to any building or structure which does not comply

with the requirements set forth in this code. or amendments
thereto.

(2-9)
Occupant load The total number of persons that may occupy a building
or portion thereof at any one time.

Occupancy As used in this Code, pertains to and is the purpose for

which a building is used or intended to be used.
Occupancy is not intended to include tenancy or
proprietorship.

Occupied Shall be construed as though followed by the words “or

intended, arranged, or designed to be occupied”.

Open plan Open plan buildings are Group D Occupancy buildings

having rooms and corridors delineated by the use of
furniture, or low (5 feet) partitions.

Owner A purchaser, developer, property holder or any other

person, firm or corporation having a vested or contingent
interest, or in the case of leased premises, the legal
holder of the lease contract, or his /her legal
representative, assign or successor, or duly authorized
agent of any of the aforesaid.

Parapet That part of a wall entirely above the roof line.

Parking garage Parking garages for passenger vehicles involving only

the parking or storing of automobiles and not including
automobile repair or service work or the sale of gasoline
or oil.

Partition A non-loading vertical separation between rooms or

Spaces. If such separating construction closes less than
three -fourths of the area from wall to wall and floor to
ceiling, it shall be considered a decorative separation and
not a partition.

Path of egress The course taken by an occupant to effect egress from a

public space.

Penthouse An enclosed one-storey structure extending above the

roof of a building not exceeding as percent of the roof at
the level on which such penthouse or penthouses are
located.

Permit A written authorization by the Authority to proceed with

construction, alteration, repair, installation or demolition.

Permit holder The holder of a permit granted for the construction,

Alteration, repair, installation or demolition of a
development.

(2-10)
Planning Permission Development permission. Permission granted pursuant to
Section 8 of the Land Development and
Control Act.

Platform A portion of an assembly room which may be raised above

the level of the assembly floor and which may be separated
from the assembly space by a wall and proscenium opening
provided the ceiling above the platform shall not be more
than 5 ft. above the proscenium opening.

Plot Ratio The ratio of the gross floor area of a building to the ground
area and expressed in proportionate terms in which the ground
area shall be shown first and the gross floor are shall be shown
second.

Prefabricated Pre-engineered, fabricated prior to installation or erection.

Primary member A structural member, such as a column, beam, girder or truss,

that carries dead, live and/or wind loads to the foundation.

Private stair A stairway serving one tenant only and not for general use.

Public space For the purpose of determining allowable floor areas and/or
egress from building such open spaces as public park &
rights-of-way. waterways, public beaches and other permanent
unobstructed yards or courts having access to a street and a
width of not less than set forth herein for required units of exit
width may be considered a public space.

Rafters Secondary inclined supporting members in roof construction.

Required Required under this code.

Repair The making good to or replacement of existing construction

in a similar manner to and of similar materials to the
construction.

Room Any enclosed part of a building not being a lavatory, corridor,

hallway, foyer, staircase, escalator, ramp, service area or
store.

Sanitary facilities The facilities provided in a lavatory in accordance with the

requirements of this Code.

Site A portion of land registered by title as a unit.

(2-11)
Subdivide To divide or subdivide a lot or parcel of land into two
or more parts for sale, transfer, lease, letting, use, trust
or for any other transaction as well as for the
development of a new building.

Value Applied to a building or structure means the estimated

cost of construction of such building or structure at the
date of valuation.

(2-12)
 SECTION 3

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Contents

301 GROUP CLASSIFICATION BY USE AND OCCUPANCY

301.1 Basis of Classification

301.2 Group A Public Buildings
301.3 Group B Institutional Buildings
301.4 Group C Commercial and Industrial Buildings
301.5 Group D Office, Administrative and Retail Service Buildings
301.6 Group E Residential Buildings
301.7 Group F Hazardous Occupancy Buildings

302 OCCUPANCY CONTENT OF A BUILDING

302.1 Basis of Calculation

Table 3-1 Occupancy Content of a Building

303 TYPE CLASSIFICATION BY CONSTRUCTION

303.1 Abbreviations
303.2 Basis of Classification

304 PERMISSIBLE AREAS AND HEIGHTS

304.1 Abbreviations
304.2 Basis of Determination

305 FIRE RESISTANCE RATINGS FOR BUILDINGS

305.1 Basis of Determination

(3-1)
306 SPECIAL PROVISIONS

306.1 Interpretation
306.2 General Occupancy
306.3 Hazardous Occupancy
306.4 Areas, Heights and Volumes
306.5 Special Fire Resistance Rating

Table 3-2 Type Classification by Construction

Table 3-3 Permissible Areas and Heights

Table 3-4 Fire Resistance Ratings for Buildings within 10’0” of Site
Boundaries

Table 3-5 Fire Resistance Ratings of Buildings between 10'0” and 20"0”
of Site Boundaries

Table 3-6 Fire Resistance Ratings of Buildings over 20’0" from Site
Boundaries and more than 35’ 0” High.

Table 3-7 Fire Resistance Ratings for Buildings over 20’ from Site
Boundaries and up to 35’ 0” high

(3-2)
 SECTION 3

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

301 GROUP CLASSIFICATION BY USE AND OCCUPANCY

301.1 Basis of Classification

Certificates of use and occupancy shall be based on the following group

classification subject to the special provisions of 306 of this Code and
provided that:

(a) Any building having a use or occupancy not specifically mentioned

shall be classified in the group it most nearly resembles.

(b) Different buildings on the same property shall be certified separately

for use and occupancy even when constructed under one permit.

(c) Adjoining parts of the same building may be certified separately for
different use and occupancy provided the division between them
satisfies the fire resistance requirements of this Code for the most
restrictive use.

(d) More than one use and occupancy shall be permitted in any building
without division provided the building conforms to the requirements
of this code for the most restrictive use.

301.2 Group A. Public Buildings

Being buildings in which 50 or more persons regularly congregate for civic,

educational, religious, social or recreational purposes and including:

Assembly halls
Auditoria
Cinemas
City and town halls
Clubs, excluding residential accommodation
Court-houses
Dance halls
Permanent exhibition buildings
Games buildings
Lecture halls
Passenger assembly buildings
Public baths
Public art galleries, libraries and museums
Restaurants seating 50 or more persons

(3-3)
 Religious buildings of all types
Teaching facilities of all types
Theatres

301.3 Group B. Institutional Buildings

Being buildings in which inmates' liberties are restricted for civic, medical,
charitable or correctional purposes including:

(a) Asylums
Hospitals
Infirmaries
Old and handicapped persons homes
Sanatoria

(b) Prisons
Reformatories

301.4 Group C. Commercial and Industrial Buildings

Being buildings used for manufacture, assembly, servicing, repair and factory
operations or for the storage except for display purposes of materials or finished
products where no hazardous processes or materials are involved and including:

(a) Aeroplane hangers

Cold storage buildings
Freight depots
Parking garages
Warehouses

(b) Factories
Commercial laboratories
Laundries
Processing plants
Power stations
Telephone exchanges
Workshops

301.5 Group D. Office, Administrative and Retail Service Buildings

Being buildings used for business or professional transactions or the display or sale
of materials or finished products and including:

(a) Banks
Civic administration buildings
Radio stations
Restaurants seating less than 50 persons
Television stations
Office building

(3-4)
 (b) Markets, Supermarkets
Shops
Show rooms
Stores

301.6 Group E. Residential Buildings

Being all buildings in which sleeping accommodation is a necessary or

major provision, except buildings classified under Group B in 301.3 of this
Code and including:

(a) Apartment buildings containing less than 10 apartments.

Guest houses accommodating less than 25 persons.
Private residences and duplex buildings.
Residential club accommodation for less than 25 persons.
Terrace houses.

(b) Apartment buildings containing 10 or more apartments.

Guest houses accommodating 25 or more persons.
Halls of residence.
Hotels.
Motels.
Residential club accommodation for more than 25 persons.

(c) Tenement buildings.

Dormitories.

301.7 Group F. Hazardous Occupancy Buildings

Being buildings or parts of buildings for the storage or handling or use or

processing of any of the hazardous materials or for the housing or carrying
out of any of the hazardous processes listed and attached to this Code as
Appendix D, or buildings used for any other purpose which, in the opinion
of the Director, creates hazardous or noxious conditions.

302 OCCUPANCY CONTENT OF A BUILDING

302.1 Basis of Calculation

a) Table 3-1 shall determine the number of persons occupying a

building or part of a building subject to the special provisions of 306
of this Code, and except the building or part of the building be
planned for a greater number persons than that determined from
Table 3-1 then the greater number shall be used, and any enclosed
space or room which 50 or more persons regularly congregate shall
be considered a place of public assembly regardless of the group
classification of the building.

(3-5)
 b) Appendix H provides information on the specific requirements of the
Occupancy Groups. This appendix is included for guidance to
designers, However Table 3-1 must be used to determine the
minimum occupancy content of buildings. Designers of public
buildings should apply to the Director for permission to alter any of
the minimum areas given in the Table 3-1, where there is mixed
occupancy or doubt as to the appropriate area to be used.

Table 3-1

Occupancy Content of a Building

Places of public assembly in any building 1 person for each seat, (7 sq.ft required). For the
occupancy content of other assembly buildings see
Appendix H (1) Section 5.
Group A.
Public buildings generally 1 person for each 100 sq.ft. of floor area.

Restaurants, night clubs 1 person for each 12 sq.ft. of floor area.

Group B
institutional buildings generally Group B (b): 1 person for each 100 sq.ft. of floor area.
1 person for each 120 sq.ft. of floor area.
Hospital surgical and obstetrical areas
Group B
Institutional buildings: open wards and dormitories 1 person for each 50 sq.ft. lf area.
Group C Group C (a): 1 person for each 200 sq.ft. of floor area for
Commercial and industrial buildings the first 5 person for each 1,000 sq.ft of floor area
thereafter

Group C (b): 1person for each 50 sq.ft. of floor area for the
first 10 persons. 1 person for each 100 sq.ft. of floor area
for the next 10 persons, and 1 person for each 500 sq.ft. of
floor area thereafter.
Group D. Group D (a): 1 person for each 100 sq.ft. of floor area
Offices, administrative and retail service buildings
Group D (b): 1 person for each 50 sq.ft.. of sales floor area
plus 1 person for each 100 sq.ft. of non sales floor area.
Group E. Residential Group E (a): 1 person for each 300 sq.ft. of floor area
Group E (b): 1 person for each 150 sq.ft. of floor area
Group E (c): 1 person for each 50 sq.ft. of floor area
Group F. Hazardous occupancy 1 person for each 50 sq.ft. of floor area for the first 10
persons, 1 person for each 500 sq.ft. of floor area thereafter

(3-6)
303 TYPE CLASSIFICATION BY CONSTRUCTION

303.1 General
a) The requirements of Types of Construction in this Subsection
are minima for the various Types of Construction and are
intended to represent varying degrees of public safety and
resistance to fire. For the purpose of this Code, Type 1 shall
be deemed to be the most fire-resistive and Type 5 the least
fire-resistive Type of Construction.

b) All buildings and structures shall be classified into one of the

following Types of Construction:

Type l Buildings: Fire Resistive

Type 2 Buildings: Semi-fire Resistive

Type 3 Buildings: Ordinary Masonry (Protected and

Unprotected)

Type 4 Buildings: Noncombustible

Type 5 Buildings: Wood Frame

Appendix I provides more information on the specific

requirements for each Type.

c) In order that a building or structure may be classified in any

specific Type of Construction, it is necessary that all the
requirements for that Type shall be at least equaled. No
building or portion thereof shall be required to conform to
the details of a Type of Construction higher than that Type
for which the minimum requirements based on Occupancy
are met even though certain features of such building
actually conform to a higher Type of Construction.

d) Where specific materials, Types of Construction or

fire-resistive protection are required, such requirements shall
be the minimum requirements, and any materials Types of
Construction or fire-resistive protection which will afford
equal or greater public safety or resistance to fire, as
specified in this Code, may be used, subject to the
requirements of Sub-sections 401 and 402 0f this Code
covering alternate materials and construction standards.

e) Where two or more Types of Construction occur in the same

building and are separated by firewalls as required in the
Chapters of Occupancy, each portion so separated may be
classified as of the Type of Construction to which it
conforms.
If firewalls are not provided as required in Subsection 406.3,
the whole building shall be classified as the least
fire-resistive Type of Construction used and shall be subject
to the restrictions imposed upon that Type.
(3-7)
 f) The structural frame shall be considered to be the columns and the
girders, beams, trusses and spandrels having direct connections to the
columns and all other members which are essential to the stability of
the building as a whole. The members of floor or roof panels which
have no connection to the columns shall be considered secondary
members and not a part of the structural frame.

g) Minor accessory buildings of unprotected non-combustible materials

not exceeding 10 percent of the ground floor of the primary building,
nor 1,500 square feet, whichever is larger, may subject to the specific
approval of the Authority, where separated from the primary building
as required in the Code, be constructed without changing the
fire-resistive classification of the primary building based on Type of
Construction.

303.2 Existing Buildings

An existing building which by its construction cannot be definitely classed

as of Type 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 as defined in this Code shall be defined for the
purpose of this code, by the Director.

303.3 Abbreviations

For the purpose of 303 and in interpretation of Table 3-2 the following
abbreviations shall have be meanings given to them hereunder:

FRC Fire resistance rated construction containing combustible

Materials

FRTW Fire resistance rated and fire retardant treated Wood

FRW Fire resistance rated wood

N/A Not applicable

NFR Fire resistance rated wood

NM Non-combustible materials

PS Fire resistance rated protected structural steel

RC Fire resistance rated reinforced concrete

(3-8)
 TW Fire retardant treated Wood

W Unrated untreated wood

303.4 Basis of Classification

Table 3-2 shall be used to establish Type classification by construction of

a building subject to the special provisions of 306 of this Code and
provided that where any building does not clearly fall into one of the five
Types defined it shall be classified under the most restrictive of the Type
it resembles.

304 PERMISSIBLE AREAS AND HEIGHTS

304.1 Abbreviations

Far the purpose of 304 and in interpretation of Table 3-3 the following
abbreviations shall have the meaning given them hereunder:

Group: Group classification by use and occupancy under 301 of this Code

NL: No limit
NP: Not permitted
Type: Type classification by construction under 303 0fthis Code.
SS: Single storey
MS: Multi-storey

304.2 Basis of Determination

Table 3-3 shall determine the maximum permitted area and height of a
building subject to the special provisions of this Code an d provided that
where two or more parts of a building are separated from one another by
divisions satisfying the fire resistance requirements of this Code far the
most restrictive use, then the maximum permitted areas may be applied to
each part so divided.

305 FIRE RESISTANCE RATING FOR BUILDINGS

305.1 Basis of Determination

Tables 3-4 to 3-7 inclusive shall determine the minimum fire resistance
ratings for the component parts of a building subject to the special
provisions of 306 of this code and provided that the permitted fire
resistance rating of various materials and combinations of materials shall
be established in accordance with this Code.

(3-9)
306 SPECIAL PROVISIONS

306.1 Interpretation

The requirements of 306 are to be read and interpreted with 301 to 305 of
this Code provided that shall the requirement of two or more sections
should appear contradictory when applied co a particular building, the more
restrictive requirements shall apply.

306.2 General Occupancy

(a) Any building with an occupancy content of more than 1,000

persons as calculated from Table 3-1 shall be of Type 1
construction.

(b) No building of Group A: Table 3-1 with an occupancy content of

more than 250 persons as calculated from Table 3-1 shall be of
Type 4 or 5 construction.

306.3 Hazardous Occupancy

(a) Buildings used to store highly combustible or highly inflammable

materials or liquids shall be of Type 1 or 2 construction, not more
than 12' 0” in storey height, not closer than 50’ 0” to a site
boundary or to an adjacent building on the same site and divided
by fire division walls into separate parts, each part not exceeding
5,000 sq. ft. in floor area.

(b) Buildings housing processes using combustible or inflammable

liquids with a flash point lower than 190 degrees F shall be of
Type 1 or 2 single storey construction not closer than 50' 0" to a
site boundary or to an adjacent building on the same site and shall
be separated by fire division walls into separate parts, each part not
exceeding 10,000 sq. ft. in floor area.

306.4 Areas, Heights and Volumes

(a) A building of Type 1 construction more than 100'-0" high may be

required to have higher fire resistance rating for any or all of the
component parts and the whole or any part of the building shall be
equipped with wet and/or dry risers if required by the Director.
These risers and fittings shall be subjected to an acceptance test
and be certified by the Director.

(b) The permissible areas given in Table 3-3 may be increased by as

percent for any building having clear access to public streets on
two sides.

(3-10)
 (c) The permissible area given in Table 3-3 may be increased by 50 percent
for any building having clear access to public streets on three or more
sides.

(d) The permissible areas given in Table 3-3 may increased by 100 percent
far any multistory building equipped with an approved automatic sprinkler
system where such system is not specifically required by this Code.

(e) The permissible areas given in Table 3-3 may be increased by 200 percent
for any single storey building equipped with an approved automatic
sprinkler system where such system is not specifically required by this
Code.

(f) Any building more than 250,000 cu.ft. in volume shall, unless equipped
with an approved automatic sprinkler system be divided by fire division
walls, fire division floors, and or ceilings, into parts not exceeding
250,000 cu.ft.in. volume.

306.5 Special Fire Resistance Ratings

(a) In buildings of Groups A, C, D, and E, not more than 50’ 0” high and not
closer than 50’ 0” to a site boundary or to an adjacent building on the
same site, non-load-bearing exterior walls may be of non rated
combustible materials.

(b) Suspended ground floors with less than 3'0" clearance need not be of fire
resistance rated construction for Groups A and E. For Types 1, 2 and 4,
construction shall be of non-combustible materials.

(c) Roofs, where every part of the structural framework is more than 20’ 0”
above the highest part of any floor, need not be of fire resistance rated
construction, but for Groups A and F, and for Types 1, 2 and 4
construction shall be of noncombustible materials.

(d) Untreated wood or other combustible materials may be used only for wall
and floor finishes, skirtings window sills, wall trims, staircase handrails
and other minor non-structural decorative purposes.

NOTE: Untreated wood should not be used as wall finishes or handrails on escape routes.

(3-11)
 Table 3-2

Type Classification by Construction

Item Type 1 Type 2. Type 3. Type 4. Type 5.

Fire Semi-fire Ordinary Non-combust Wood frame
resistant resistant Masonry ible
Exterior structural RC or PS RC or PS RC or PS NFR, FRTW NFR
Interior structural frame RC or PS RC or PS NFR or NM NM or TW
FRTW
Exterior load bearing NFR NFR NFR NFR NFR or FRTW
walls
Exterior non-load NFR FRC or NFR FRC NFR FRC or FRW
bearing walls
Interior load bearing NFR NFR NFR or NM NM or FRW
walls FRTW
Party walls and fire NFR NFR NFR NFR NFR or FRW
Division walls
Interior walls enclosing NFR or NFR or FRC or NFR FRC or FRW
vertical openings in FRTW FRTW FRTW
buildings more than 1
storey high
Interior walls and/or NFR or NFR FRC or NFR or FRW FRC or FRW
Doors facing on to a FRTW FRTW
Means of escape
Fire division floors NFR NFR NFR NFR NFR or FRW
Other floors NFR NFR or Group C: NM NM or W
FRTW NFR or
FRW
Other
Groups:
NM or TW
Roofs NFR or NFR or NFR or NM NFR or FRTW
FRTW FRTW FRTW
Cantilevered projections NFT NFR or NFR or NFR NFR or FRTW
FRTW FRTW

Note: See 303.3 for abbreviations used

3-12
 Table 3-3

Permissible Areas and Heights

group Areas and Type 1 Type 2. Type 3. Type 4. Type 5.

Heights Fire Semi-fire Ordinary Non-combust Wood frame
resistant resistant Masonry ible
Group A Area per NL 15,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
Storey
Height ( ft ) 100 60 SS SS SS
Group B Area per NL 10,000 7,500 NP NP
Storey
Height ( ft ) 100 60 35 NP NP
Group C Area per NL NL or SS 15,000 15,000 10,000
Storey 20,000 for
MS
Height ( ft ) 100 60 35 SS SS
Group D Area per NL 20,000 15,000 15,000 15,000
Storey
Height ( ft ) 100 60 35 NP NP
Group E Area per NL 15,000 10,000 7,500 7,500
Storey
Height ( ft ) 100 60 35 25 25
Group F Area per 15,000 10,000 7,500 5,000 NP
Storey
Height ( ft ) 60 25 SS SS NP

Note: Read this Table with 306 of this Code

3-13
 Table 3-4

Fire resistance ratings in hours for buildings within 10’0” of site boundaries or adjacent buildings
on the same site

Item Type 1 Type 2. Type 3. Type 4. Type 5.

Fire resistant Semi-fire Ordinary Non- Wood
resistant Masonry combustible frame
Exterior structural 4 3 2 2 1
frame
Interior structural 3 1 1 SS: 1/2 SS: 1/2
frame MS: 1 MS: 1
Exterior load bearing 4 2 2 2 1
walls
Exterior non-load 3 2 2 1 1
bearing walls
Interior load bearing 2 1 1 SS: 1/2 SS: 1/2
walls MS: 1 MS: 1

Party walls 4 3 3 3 2
Fire division walls 3 2 2 2 1
Interior walls 2 1 1 1 1
enclosing vertical
openings in buildings
more than 1 storey
high
Interior walls and/or 1 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
doors facing on to
means of escape
Interior walls not Groups A & Groups A & 0 0 0
otherwise described D only: 1/2 D only: 1/2
Fire division floors 3 2 2 2 1
and/or ceilings
Other suspended floor 2 1 1 1 1
and/or ceilings
Roofs 2 1 1 SS: 1/2 SS: 1/2
MS: 1 MS: 1
Cantilevered 3 2 2 1 1
projections
Fire check doors 1 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2

Note: See 303.3 for abbreviations used

3-14
 Table 3-5

Fire resistance rating in hours for buildings between 10’0” and 20’0” from
site boundaries or adjacent buildings on the same site.

Item Type 1 Type 2. Type 3. Type 4. Type 5.

Fire resistant Semi-fire Ordinary Non- Wood
resistant Masonry combustible frame
Exterior structural 3 2 1 1 1
frame
Interior structural 2 1 1 SS: 1/2 SS: 1/2
frame MS: 1 MS: 1
Exterior load bearing 3 2 1 1 1
walls
Exterior non-load 2 1 1 1 1
bearing walls
Interior load bearing 2 1 1 SS: 1/2 SS: 1/2
walls MS: 1 MS: 1

Fire division walls 3 2 1 1 1

Interior walls 2 1 1 1 1
enclosing vertical
openings in buildings
more than 1 storey
high
Interior walls facing 1 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
on to means of escape
Interior walls not Groups A & Groups A & 0 0 0
otherwise described D only: 1 D only: 1/2
Fire division floors 3 2 1 1 1
and/or ceilings
Other suspended floor 2 1 1 1 1
and/or ceilings
Roofs 2 1 1 SS: 1/2 SS: 1/2
MS: 1 MS: 1
Cantilevered 2 1 1 1 1
projections
Fire check doors 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2

3-15
 Table 3-6

Fire resistance ratings in hours for buildings over 20’0” from site boundaries
or adjacent buildings on the same site and more than 35’0” high.

Item Type 1 Type 2. Type 3. Type 4. Type 5.

Fire resistant Semi-fire Ordinary Non- Wood frame
resistant Masonry combustible
Exterior structural 2 2 N/A N/A N/A
frame
Interior structural 2 1 N/A N/A N/A
frame
Exterior load bearing 2 2 N/A N/A N/A
walls
Exterior non-load 2 1 N/A N/A N/A
bearing walls
Interior load bearing 2 1 N/A N/A N/A
walls

Fire division walls 2 2 N/A N/A N/A

Interior walls 1 1 N/A N/A N/A
enclosing vertical
openings in buildings
more than 1 storey
high
Interior walls not Groups A & Groups A & N/A N/A N/A
otherwise described D only: 1/2 D only: 1/2
Fire division floors 2 1 N/A N/A N/A
and/or ceilings
Roofs 2 1 N/A N/A N/A
Fire check doors 1/2 1/2 N/A N/A N/A

3-16
 Table 3-7

Fire resistance ratings in hours for buildings over 20’0” from site boundaries
Or adjacent buildings on the same site and up to 35’0” high

Item Type 1 Type 2. Type 3. Type 4. Type 5.

Fire resistant Semi-fire Ordinary Non- Wood
resistant Masonry combustible frame
Exterior structural 2 1 1 1 1
Frame
Interior structural 1 1 1 SS: 1/2 SS: 1/2
frame MS: 1 MS: 1
Fire division walls 2 2 1 1 1
Interior walls 1 1 1 1 1
enclosing vertical
openings in buildings
more than 1 storey
high
Interior walls facing 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
on to means of escape
Fire division floors 2 2 1 1 1
and/or ceilings
Other suspended floor 1 1 1 1 1
and/or ceilings
Roofs 1 1 1 SS: 1/2 SS: 1/2
MS: 1 MS: 1
Cantilevered 1 1 0 0 0
projections
Fire check doors 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2

3-17
 SECTION 4

MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

Contents

401 SCOPE

402 MATERIALS STANDARDS

402.1 Approval for Use

402.2 Form of Application
402.3 Storage and Use
402.4 Require use of Used Material
402.5 Required Standards of Materials

403 CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

403.1. Approval for Use

403.2 Form of Application
403.3 Required Standards for Construction
403.4 Applicable Codes of Practice

404 FIRE RESISTANCE RATINGS FOR MATERLALS

404.1 Scope
404.2 Basis of Ratings

405 FIRE RESISTIVE ASSEMBLIES FOR PROTECTION OF OPENINGS

405.1 General
405.2 Fire Doors
405.3 Hardware and Frames
405.4 Glazed openings in Fire Doors and Windows
405.5 Fire Windows

406 REQUIRED SEPARATION OF CONSTRUCTION

406.1 Separation Between Buildings
406.2 Vertical Separation
406.3 Party Walls and Fire walls
406A Opening in Party Walls and Fire Walls

(4-1)
407 FIRE BARRIERS IN CEILING AND ROOF SPACES

Table 4-1 Minimum Protection of Structural Parts

Table 4-2 Rated Fire Resistive Periods for various Wall sand Partitions

Table 4-3 Minimum Protection for floor and Roof Systems

(4-2)
 SECTION FOUR

MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

401 SCOPE
a) This Section sets out the requirements for use of materials and
construction methods to conform to the minimum standards provided
in the code.

b) The construction standards are based on the ability of buildings to

resist fire hazards and to accommodate safely the imposed dead and
live loads including the hurricane and earthquake loads. This Section
provides Tables of fire resistance of various materials and assemblies
and gives the requirements for minimum protection of floor and roof
systems.

c) This Section must therefore be read with the following:

Section 3 - General Requirements,

Section 12 - Dead and live Loads,
Appendix G - Fire safety Requirements.
Appendix H -Requirements of Groups A to F
Appendix I – classification by Types of Construction

402 MATERIALS STANDARDS

402.1 Approval for Use

The requirements of this Code are not intended to exclude the use of any
material not specifically described or recognized herein. Any such material
shall be approved provided it can be shown to be satisfactory for the purpose
intended and be at least equal to the requirements of this code for quality,
strength, effectiveness, fire resistance rating, durability and safety where
applicable, and provided that if special knowledge or experience is required
in its use it shall only be used by an approved specialist.

402.2 Form of Application

Any person desiring to use a material not recognized in this Code shall make
application to the Authority for permission to use such material. The
application shall be adequately supported by evidence that the material is at
least equal to the standards required by this Code and the Authority shall
power to require additional tests to be made if in its opinion those are
necessary for proper consideration of the application.

(4-3)
 402.3 Storage and Use

All materials shall be stored on site in such a way as to prevent deterioration

or impairment of their quality or strength or effectiveness and no material
which has been seriously damaged or permitted to deteriorate shall be used
in/for construction.

402.4 Re-use of Used Material

The re-use of used material shall be permitted provided that it can be clearly
shown to the satisfaction of the Director that such material is suitable for the
purpose intended and meets fully the requirements of this Code for quality,
strength, effectiveness, fire resistance rating, durability and safety.

402.5 Required Standards of Materials

All materials used in construction shall conform to the requirements of this

code and shall at least be equal to the requirements of the applicable standards,
the list of which is at Appendices A and B.

403 CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

403.1 Approval for Use

The requirements of this Code are not intended to exclude the use of any
method of construction not specifically described or recognized herein. Any
such method of construction shall be approved provided it can be shown to be
satisfactory for the purpose intended and at least equal to the requirements of
this Code for quality, strength, effectiveness, fire resistance rating, durability
and safety and provided that if special knowledge is required in its use, it shall
only be used by an approved specialist.

403.2 Form of Application

Any person desiring to use a method of construction not specifically described

in or recognized by this code shall make application to the Authority for
permission to use such method. The application shall be adequately supported
by evidence that the method proposed is at least equal to the standards
required by this code and the Authority shall have power to require additional
tests to be made at the expense of the applicant, if in his opinion it is
necessary for proper consideration of the application.

403.3 Required Standards for Construction

Standards of construction shall be in accordance with be requirements of this

Code and shall at least be equal to the requirements of the list of standards
attached to this Code as Appendices A and B or to any other standard or Code
approved by the Authority.

(4-4)
 403.4 Applicable Codes of Practice

A list of codes of practice applicable to standards of construction is attached

to this code as Appendices A and B.

404 FIRE RESISTANCE RATTINGS FOR MATERIALS

404.1 Scope

This Sub-section provides information on the fire resistance of materials and

construction assemblies. The information provided must be used with the
Use and Occupancy Tables in Section 3 in order to determine the appropriate
type of structure and the appropriate materials of construction that should be
used.

404.2 Basis or Ratings

a) The fire resistance ratings for materials and combinations of materials

recognized by this code are based on standard ratings presented by
recognized international agencies such as British Standards
Institution (BSI), or The American Society for Testing and Materials.
(ASTM).

b) The requirements of this Section constitute the minimum functional

performance standards for fire protection purpose, and are not
intended to indicate the structural strength of materials or assemblies.
It is the responsibility of the architect or engineer to ensure that a
building is constructed in a manner which would limit the spread of a
fire and that exits are adequately designed in accordance with Section
5 of the code, and at the same time to ensure that the building is
structurally adequate to accommodate safely the imposed loads.

c) The following Tables 41 to 43 give fire ratings of various materials

and assemblies commonly used in construction in the OECS. Other
materials and assemblies may be used provided that tests show that
the fire-resistive rating of the materials are acceptable for the uses
intended, and provided the materials or assemblies are used in
accordance with, the conditions of this Code.

405 FIRE-RESISTIVE ASSEMBLIES FOR PROTECTION OF OPENINGS

405.1 General

(a) The design and construction of fire-resistive assemblies and openings

shall be carried out in accordance with this Code and in accordance
with section 6 Part 3 of CUBiC.

(4-5)
 (b) Where required by this Code (Table $2) for fire protection of openings,
fire-resistive assemblies shall comply with the standards set forth in the
relevant ASTM or BSI standard for fire tests of building materials.

(c) All fire assemblies required to have fire-protection rating of one-half hour or
more shall bear a label or other identification showing the rating thereof,
issued by an approved testing agency.

405.2 Fire Doors

(a) Approved fire door assemblies shall be constructed of any material or

assembly of component materials which meets the test requirements of the
ASTM or BSI, and the fire resistance ratings required by this Code.

(b) The identification, testing hardware, frames glazing and installation of fire
doors shall be as set forth in paragraph 3.617 of Section 6, Part 3 of CUBiC.

(c) A three-fourths-hour labeled fire assembly door may be used where a

one-hour rating 8 required provided the door is tested together with the frame
and of hardware as set forth in this Code, for a period of three-fourths hour in
accordance with the standard set forth in Section 4 Subsection 404.2 (a).

(d) Doors from patient rooms of Group B (a) Occupancy, shall have a minimum
one hour fire protection rating. The corridor through which the patients have
to exit shall be constructed of materials and assemblies with minimum fire
resistant ratings of not less than 1 hour.

405.3 Hardware and Frames

(a) Every fire assembly required to have a half hour, three-fourths hour, one hour,
one and a half hour, or three hour fire protection rating shall be automatic or
self-closing type.

(b) Exit doors shall have closing devices as provided in Section 5 Sub-sections
503.7 of this Code.

(c) Where required to be a rated fire assembly, doors shall be equipped with
approved steel frames or such frames shall be of be material as used in the test
assembly.

(d) Heat-activated devices used in automatic fire assemblies shall be installed,

one on each side of the wall at the top of the opening or one on each side
of the wall at ceiling height where the ceiling is more than three feet above
the opening.

(4-6)
 (e) Devices detecting products of combustion shall meet the
approval of the Authority as to installation and location,
and shall be subject to such periodic tests as may be
required by the Authority. The tests must be carried out
by an experienced testing laboratory approved by the
Authority.

405.4 Glazed Openings in Fire Doors and Windows

(a) Glazed openings in a fire assembly shall conform to the following:

i) Where the door serves as a horizontal exit, the self-closing

swinging doors may be provided with a wired glass vision
panel preferably vertical, made of 1/4" thick wired glass
labeled for fire protection purposes.

ii) The panel shall be not more than 100 square inches,
without either dimension exceeding 12 inches.

iii) The developer shall provide the Director with test results
from a recognized testing laboratory or institution showing
that the fire assembly would have the fire resistance
required.

(b) Wired glass vision panels may be used in fire doors of 1-1/2 hour
fire-resistance rating intended for use in fire separation walls,
provided that the glass panels are not greater than 100 square
inches in area.

(c) The area of glazed openings in a fire door required to have 1-1/2
hour or one-hour fire-resistive ratings shall be limited to 100
square inches with a minimum dimension of four inches.

(d) Where both leaves of a pair of doors have vision panels the total
area of the glazed openings shall not exceed 100 square inches for
each leaf.

(e) Glazed openings shall be limited to 1200 square inches in wood and
plastic faced composite or hollow metal doors per light, when
fire-resistive assemblies are required to have a 3/4 hour
fire-resistive rating.

(f) Windows required to have a 3/4 hour fire-resistive rating may have
an area not greater than 84 square feet with neither width nor height
exceeding 12 feet.

(4-7)
 405.5 Fire Windows

Where windows are provided in openings required by this Code to be protected

rating by a fire resistive assembly having a 3/4 hour fire-protection rating such
window shall be labeled or shall be as follows:

(a) Windows shall have frames and sash of solid steel section or of hollow
steel or iron shapes and be fabricated by pressing, riveting, interlocking
welding or crimping together, but not by the use of solder or other fusible
alloy.

(b) Wire glass and glazing shall comply with acceptable standards for fire
resistive assemblies.

(c) Maximum height of hollow-metal-frame window shall be 10 feet.

(d) Maximum width of hollow-metal-frame window shall be six feet for

double-hung, counter-weighted, counter-balanced, and fixed-sash type
windows and shall be five feet for all other types.

(e) Solid-section-frame windows shall have a maximum area of 84 square

feet with neither width nor height exceeding 12 feet, except that, when
used with unprotected steel mullions, the width shall not exceed seven
feet.

(f) Solid-section mullions, where used in lengths exceeding 12 feet, shall be

fire protected.

406 REQUIRED SEPARATION OF CONSTRUCTION

406.1 Separation Between Buildings

a) Where two or more buildings are joined or adjoin, the combined building
must comply with the fire resistive requirements and with the height and
floor area requirements of this Code and,

b) The buildings must be separated by fire walls having the fire resistivity
specified for adjoining classifications of the higher ratings as per Table
3-2.

406.2 Vertical Separation

With the exception of open deck public garages, openings in the external wall
in successive stories in an unsprinklered building required to be Type 1
construction (Fire resistive), must be separated by at least 3 ft., with a spandrel
or other member having the same fire rating as required for the wall.

(4-8)
 406.3 Party Walls and Fire Walls

Party walls and fire walls separating buildings and compartments must:

a) have sufficient structural stability to allow collapse or burn out of

the contents of compartments on the other side of the wall without
collapse of the wall,

b) be extended as necessary to the underside of a non-combustible roof

covering with the gap between the top of the wall and the roof
covering adequately fire stopped.

c) be extended a minimum of 20 inches above the roof line, if the

covering is combustible (eg asphalt or wood shingles),

d) have the greater of the fire ratings prescribed in Tables 3-4 to 3-7 for
the adjoining occupancy classification.

e) Where the roofs of adjoining buildings or of fire compartments are

at different levels, the wall must be extended at least 3' 0" above the
lower roof, if any part of the lower roof within 20 feet from the wall
does not have a fire resistance rating of at least 2 hours.

406.4 Openings in Party Walls and Fire Walls

Doorways and other openings in party walls or fire walls between buildings
or fire compartments must:

a) not exceed 100 square feet in area at any one opening and

b) not be greater in aggregate width of all openings in any one storey,

than 25% of the length of the wall in that storey.

407 FIRE BARRIERS IN CEILING AND ROOF SPACES

a) Except where the floor/ceiling or roof/ceiling assembly is of

non-combustible construction, enclosed roof and ceiling spaces must
have fire barriers to divide the space into areas of not more than
3,000 square feet.

b) Fire barriers in roof and ceiling spaces must be of non-combustible

construction and located directly above the tenancy separation walls,
if the walls do not extend to the floor space above.

(4-9)
 Table 4-1

Minimum Protection of Structural Parts Based on Time Periods

for Various Incombustible Insulating Materials.

(Minimum thickness of insulating material given in inches)

A.

Structural part to be protected. Steel Columns and 4 Hr. 3 Hr. 2 Hr. 1 Hr.
all Members of Primary Trusses
Grade A concrete, members 6” x 6” or greater (not including 2-1/2 2 1-1/2 1
sandstone, granite, and siliceous gravel).
Grade A concrete, members 8” x 8” or greater (not including 2 2-1/2 1 1
sandstone, granite, and siliceous gravel).
Grade A concrete, members 12” x 12” or greater (not 1-1/2 1 1 1
including sandstone, granite, and siliceous gravel).
Grade B concrete and Grade A concrete excluded above. 2-1/2 2 1 1
Members 8”x 8” or greater.
Grade B concrete and Grade A concrete excluded above. 2 1 1 1
Members 12”x 12” or greater.
Portland cement plaster over metal lath wired to 3/4 - - 2-1/2 7/8
“cold-rolled vertical channels with No. 18 gauge wire ties
spaced 3” to 6” on centre. Plaster mixed 1:2 1/2 by volume,
cement to sand.
Multiple layers of 1/2” gypsum wallboard adhesively secured - - 2 1
to column flanges.

(4-10)
 Table 4-1(Cont’d)

Minimum Protection of Structural Parts

B.

Structural part to be protected: Wide flanges of 4 Hr. 3 Hr. 2 Hr. 1 Hr.

steel beams and girders
Grade A concrete (not including sandstone, granite and 2 1-1/2 1 1
siliceous gravel) with 3” or finer metal mesh placed 1”
from the finished surface anchored to the top flange and
providing not less than 0.025 square inch of steel area per
foot in each direction.
Grade B concrete and Grade A concrete excluded above 2-1/2 2 1-1/2 1
with 3” or finer metal mesh placed 1” from the finished
surface anchored to the top flange and providing not less
than 0.025 square inch of steel area per foot in each
direction.
Portland cement plaster on metal lath attached to 3/4” - - 2-1/2 7/8
cold rolled channels with No. 18 gauge wire ties spaced
3” to 6” on cement to sand.

C.

Structural part to be protected: Bonded 4 Hr. 3 Hr. 2 Hr. 1 Hr.

Tendons in pre-stressed concrete
Grade A Concrete:

Beams or girders 4 3 2-1/2 1-1/2

Solid slabs - 2 1-1/2 1

D.

Structural Part to be Protected: Reinforcing 4 Hr. 3 Hr. 2 Hr. 1 Hr.

steel in reinforced columns, beams, girders and
trusses
Grade A concrete, members 12” or larger, square or round 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2
(Size limit does not apply to beams and girders
monolithic with floors )
Grade B concrete, members 12” or larger, square or round 2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2
(Size limit does not apply to beams and girders
monolithic with floors )

(4-11)
 Table 4-1 (Cont’d)

Minimum Protection of Structural Parts

E.

Structural Part to be Protected: Reinforcing 4 Hr. 3 Hr. 2 Hr. 1 Hr.

steel in reinforced concrete joists.
Grade A concrete 1-1/4 1-1/4 1 3/4
Grade B concrete 1-3/4 1-1/ 1 3/4

F.

Structural Part to be Protected: Reinforcing 4 Hr. 3 Hr. 2 Hr. 1 Hr.

steel and tie rods in floor and roof slabs.
Grade A concrete 1 1 3/4 3/4
Grade B concrete 1-1/4 1 1 3/4

Notes to Table 4.1:

Re-entrant parts of protected members to be filled solidly.

An approved adhesive qualified under the standards for fire resistive materials

Cover for end anchorages shall be twice that shown for the respective ratings. Where lightweight
Grade A
Concrete aggregates producing structural concrete giving an over-dried weight of 110 pounds per
cubic foot or
Less are used, the tabulated minimum cover may be reduced 25 percent.

For Grade B concrete increase tendon cover 20 percent.

Adequate provisions against spalling shall be provided by U-shaped or hoped stirrups spaced not to
exceed the depth of the member with a clear cover of one inch.

Prestressed slabs have a thickness not less than required in Table 4-3 for the respective fire-resistive
time period

Thickness of material for concrete members applies to bottom steel in slabs and to bottom and side
cover over
bottom steel in beams and joists.

(4-12)
 Table 4-2

Rated Fire-resistive Periods for Various Walls and Partitions

(Thickness of units in inches)

A. Concrete Masonry Units 4 Hr. 3 Hr. 2 Hr. 1 Hr.

Expanded slag or pumice 4-3/4 4 3-1/4 2-1/8
Expanded clay or shale 5-3/4 4-7/8 3-7/8 2-5/8
Limestone 6 5 4 2-3/4
Calcareous gravel 6-1/4 5-3/8 4-1/4 2-7/8

B. Solid Concrete 4 Hr. 3 Hr. 2 Hr. 1 Hr.

Horizontal reinforcement not less than 0.25 percent and
vertical reinforcement not less than 0.15 percent.
(Three-fourths as much for welded wire fabric).

Grade A Concrete 6-1/2 6 5 3-1/2

Grade B Concrete 7-1/2 6-1/2 5-1/2 4

(4-13)
 Table 4-2 (Cont’d)

Rated Fire-resistive Periods for Various Walls and Partitions

C. Incombustible Studs-Interior Partition with 4 Hr. 3 Hr. 2 Hr. 1 Hr.

plaster Each Side
3-1/4 by No.18 gauge steel studs spaced 24” on centre - - - 4-3/4
5/8” gypsum plaster on metal lath each side mixed 1:2 by
weight, gypsum to sand aggregate.
3-5/8” No.16 gauge approved nail able studs spaced 24” - - 5-5/8 -
on centre.
5/8” neat gypsum wood fibered plaster each side over
3/8” rib metal lath nailed to studs 8” on centre. Nails
driven 1-1/4” and bent over.
2-1/2” steel studs 16” on centre formed with No.16 gauge - - - 4-1/4
wire diagonals. 3/8” perforated gypsum lath attached to
the studs each side with No.12 gauge wire clips at
horizontal and vertical joints.
1/2” gypsum plaster applied each side mixed 1:2 by
weight, gypsum to sand aggregate.
2-1/2” steel studs 16” on centre formed with No. 16 gauge - - 4-3/4 -
angle flanges and No. 7 gauge wire diagonals. 3/8”
perforated gypsum lath attached to the studs each side
with No. 12 gauge approved end joints clips. 3/4 perlite or
vermiculite gypsum plaster applied each side.

D. Incombustible Studs. Interior Partition with 4 Hr. 3 Hr. 2 Hr. 1 Hr.

Gypsum Wallboard Each Side.
No. 25 gauge channel-shaped studs 16” on centre with - 4-7/8 - -
one hull-length layer of 5/8” Type “X” gypsum wallboard
applied vertically attached with 1” long N0. 6 drywall
screws to each side.

(4-14)
 Table 4-2 (Cont’d)

Rated Fire-resistive Periods for Various Walls and Partitions

E. Wood studs-Interior Partition with Gypsum 4 Hr. 3 Hr. 2 Hr. 1 Hr.

Wallboard Each Side
2” x 4” wood studs 16” on centre with two layers 3/8” - - - 5-1/8
regular gypsum wallboard each side. First layers applied
full length vertically, second layer applied horizontally or
vertically.
2” x 4” wood studs 16” on centre with space between - - - 5-5/8
filled with mineral wool batts nailed to studs and
full-length 1/2” regular gypsum wallboard applied
vertically.
2” x 4” wood studs 16” on centre with two layers 1/2” - - - 5-5/8
regular gypsum wallboard applied vertically or
horizontally each side, joints staggered. Nail base layer
with 5 cooler nails at 8” on centre, face layer with 8
cooler nails at 8” on centre.
2” x 4” wood studs 16” on centre with 5/8” Type “X” - - - 4-7/8
gypsum wallboard applied vertically or horizontal nailed
with 6” nails 7” on centre with end joints on nailing
members.
2” x 4” fire-retardant treated wood studs spaced 16” on - - 4-7/8 -
centre with one layer of 5/8” thick Type “X” gypsum
wallboard applied studs.

(4-15)
 Table 4-2 (Cont’d)

Rated Fire Resistive Periods for Various Walls and Partitions

F. Exterior or Interior Walls 4 Hr. 3 Hr. 2 Hr. 1 Hr.

2” x 4” wood studs 16” on centre with two layers 5/8” - - 6-1/8 -
Type “X” gypsum wallboard each side. Base layers
applied vertically or horizontally and nailed 7” on centre.
face layers applied with coating of approved wallboard
adhesive and nailed 12” on centre.
3/4” drop siding or 3/8” exterior type plywood over 1/2” - - - Varies
gypsum sheathing on 2” x 4” wood studs at 16” on centre,
or exterior surface with interior surface treatment as
required for one-hour rated extension, or interior 2” x 4”
wood stud partitions.
2” x 4” wood studs 16” on centre with 1/2” metal lath and - - - 5
3/4” exterior cement plaster on each side.
2” x 4” wood studs 16” on centre with 7/8” exterior - - - Varies
cement plaster (measured from the face of studs) on the
exterior surface with interior surface treatment as required
for interior wood stud partitions in this Table. Plaster mix
1:2 scratch coat and 1:3 brown coat, by weight, cement to
sand.
3-5/8” No. 16 gauge incombustible studs 16” on centre - - - varies
with 7/8” exterior cement plaster (measured from the face
of the studs ) on the exterior surface with interior,
non-bearing, incombustible stud partition. Plaster mix 1:2
for scratch coat and 1:3 for brown coat.

(4-16)
 Table 4-3

Minimum Protection for Floor and Roof Systems

A. Concrete-(Excluding Expanded Clay Share or Slag).

Construction and Minimum Thickness of Floor 4 Hr. 3 Hr. 2 Hr. 1 Hr.

(ins)
No ceiling required 6-1/2 5-1/2 4-1/2 3-1/2

B. Reinforced Concrete Joists

Construction and Minimum Thickness of Floor 4 Hr. 3 Hr. 2 Hr. 1 Hr.

(ins). No ceiling required.
Slab with suspended ceiling of gypsum plaster over metal 3 2 - -
lath attached to 3/4” cold-rolled channels spaced 12” on
centre.
Ceiling located 6” minimum below joists.

C. Steel Joist Construction with a Reinforced Concrete Slab on Top Poured on a Metal Lath Form.

Construction and Minimum Thickness of Floor 4 Hr. 3 Hr. 2 Hr. 1 Hr.

(ins)
Portland cement plaster over metal lath attached to the 2-1/4 2 - -
bottom chord of joists with single No. 16 gauge or
doubled No. 18 gauge wire ties.
Minimum Thickness of Ceiling
Ceiling of 5/8” Type “X” wallboard attached to 7/8” deep - - 5/8 5/8
by 2
5/8” by No. 25 gauge furring channels 12” on centre.

(4-17)
 Table 4-3 (Cont’d)

Minimum Protection for Floor and Roof Systems

D. Plywood Stressed Skin Panels

Construction and Minimum Thickness of Floor 4 Hr. 3 Hr. 2 Hr. 1 Hr.

/Ceiling (ins)
1/2” thick wood fiberboard weighing 15 to 18 lbs. per - - - -
cu.ft. installed with long dimension parallel to stringers.
Second layer of 5/8” Type “X” gypsum wallboard applied
with long dimension perpendicular to joints.
Minimum Thickness of Ceiling - - - 3/4

E. wood Trusses Spaced a Maximum of 24 inches on Centers, Sheathed with a Minimum of

one-half-inch Plywood and Covered with Approved Roofing Materials.

Construction and Minimum Thickness of Floor 4 Hr. 3 Hr. 2 Hr. 1 Hr.

/Ceiling (ins)
1” x 3” furring 16” o.c.; flat expanded metal lath (3.4 lbs. - - - -
per sq.yd.) and 3/4” sanded vermiculite or perlite gypsum
plaster.
Minimum Thickness of Ceiling - - - 3/4

(4-18)
 SECTION 5

PUBLIC HEALTH AND SAFETY

Contents

501 SCOPE

502 MINIMUM STANDARDS

502.1 Basis of Requirement

a) General
b) Handicapped persons
c) Ventilation
d) Resistance to Transmission of heat
e) Resistance to Transmission of Sound

503 FIRE, HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

503.1 Requirements for Applications

503.2 Requirements for Fire Safety in Buildings
503.3 Requirements for Building Sites
503.4 Service Provisions
503.5 Minimum Areas, Widths and Heights of Habitable Rooms and Lavatories
503.6 Light and Ventilation

Table 5-1 Minimum Areas and Dimensions of Habitable Rooms

503.7 Windows
503.8 Skylights
503.9 Enclosed Courts
503.10 Rear Courts
503.11 Rodent Proofing
503.12 Sanitation
503.13 Storage of Hazardous Materials

503 MEANS OF ESCAPE AND EXITS

504.1 Basis of Requirement

504.2 Definitions
504.3 Basis of Calculation
504.4 Number of Means of Escape and Exits

Table 5-2 Minimum Number of Means of Escape and Exits Required per Storey

(5-1)
 504.5 Maximum Distance of Travel to Exits
504.6 Width of Means of Escape and Exits
504.7 Exits and Fire Check Doors

Table 5-3 (a) Maximum Permitted Distance of Travel to and from Exit

Table 5-3(b) Exit Capacities

Table 5-4 Minimum Required Widths of Means of Escape and Exit

504.8 Internal Staircases and Ramps used as Means of Escape

504.9 Fixed Seating in Place of Public Assembly

505 STAIRCASES AND RAMPS

505.1 Definitions
505.2 Basis of Requirements
505.3 Private Stairways
505.4 Common Stairways

Table 5-5 Tread and Riser Sizes/Dimensions

505.5 Open Riser Stairways

505.6 Tapered Steps
505.7 Guarding of Stairway and Landings
505.8 Guarding of Balconies and External Areas
505.9 Ramps
505.10 Landings

506 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS

506.1 Basis of Provisions

506.2 Special Provisions
506.3 General Requirements
506.4 Approval of Installation

(5-2)
 SECTION 5

PUBLIC HEALTH AND SAFETY

501 SCOPE

This Section provides information on the design parameters for provision of

buildings which will be environmentally acceptable and which if constructed
in accordance with this Code provide reasonable fire resistance of critical
elements and allow persons in the building time to evacuate safely.

502 MINIMUMS STANDARDS

502.1 Basis of Requirement

a) General

All buildings intended for human use or occupancy shall conform to

the requirements of this Section. Provided that where artificial
lighting and/or ventilation are permitted as alternative to natural
lighting and/or ventilation they shall also conform with the pertinent
requirements of Section 11 of this Code.

b) Handicapped Persons

Provisions for physically handicapped persons must be made in

accordance with Appendix F of this Code.

c) Ventilation

Every building and its several compartments shall be adequately

ventilated having regard to the use for which the building and its
individual compartments are intended. An adequate amount of open
space shall be provided at the front and back of every building and on
any side which includes a door, window or other opening.

d) Resistance to Transmission of Heat

For every building used or intended to be used for human occupation,

the external walls, the roof, or roof in conjunction with the ceiling of
the topmost storey, and the floor nearest the ground shall be of such
materials and be so constructed as to offer adequate resistance to the
transmission of heat from the outside of the building to the inside,
and from the inside of the building to the outside.

(5-3)
 e) Resistance to Transmission of Sound

Every building shall be sufficiently protected against the

transmission of sound from adjoining buildings or from adjoining
parts of the same building, according to the use for which the
building is intended.

f) Reducing Danger from Fire

i) For the purpose of reducing the danger of the outbreak of

fire in a building and having regard to the risk inherent in
the use to which a building or part thereof is intended, the
size of the building and its proximity to other buildings,
every building and its several parts shall be so designed and
constructed as to

(aa) reduce sufficiently the risk of ignition of any part

of the building and the spread of fire within the
building to other buildings;

(bb) withstand the effects of fire for a sufficient period

to avoid such collapse of the building as would
increase the risk of the spread of fire.

ii) Every building shall be so designed and constructed that in

the event of an outbreak of fire in the building, every
person therein may leave the building and its precincts
safely.

iii) All heat and flame producing appliances in a building

together with their necessary accessories, shall be so
constructed and installed as to prevent the ignition of any
combustible material forming part of the building, or any
combustible material which may be placed against the
surface of any wall, or other part of the building enclosing
or adjacent to the appliance.

503 FIRE AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

503.1 Requirements for Applications

Applications for building permits for buildings intended for public use are
required to satisfy the requirements of this Code. The applicant must
demonstrate through the information provided in the application, and
included on the appropriate drawings in the plans, elevations and sections,
that the design and construction of the building or buildings being the
subject of this application conforms in principle to this Code and to the
latest edition of the National Fire Protection Association Life Safety Code,
1981, NFiPA 101, and Amendments.

(5-4)
503.2 Requirements for Fire Safety in Buildings

(a) All buildings other than private residences or apartment houses referred to
in Group E(a) Residential Buildings, should be provided with approved fire
appliances in accordance with the requirements of this Code; the provision
of, and the installation of, such appliances shall be approved in writing by
the Authority.

(b) All buildings of more than 4 stories and over 50 feet in height shall be
provided with one or more wet rising mains, as the Authority shall
determine; such mains shall be exclusively for fire fighting purposes.

c) The requirements of Sub-sections 505 and 506 of this Code shall, in

particular apply to any part of any building more than 10,000 sq.ft. in area
of any type of occupancy as listed in Table 3-1, where such part is used for,
or intended for the use of, the bulk storage of combustible materials or
products. (See Appendix D).

(d) Where automatic fire extinguishing protection is provided in other than

High Hazard Occupancies the fire-resistance requirements may be reduced
by one hour in the area or portion of the buildings so protected provided
that such a building is not more than 50 feet or 4 stories in height.

(e) The installation of fire protection systems shall be carried out in accordance
with Part 3 Section 7 of the Caribbean Uniform Building Code.

503.3 Requirements for Building Sites

No building shall be erected on a site which

(a) Consists in whole or part of harmful or offensive animal or vegetable

matter until such matter shall have been removed and the site made good to
the satisfaction of the Director.

(b) Cannot be put into such a condition as to prevent any harmful effect to the
building or to its occupants by storm or flood waters.

(c) Has an average site elevation of less than 4’ 0” above mean sea level.

Adequate provision shall be made for the disposal of storm water so that the effect
of increased run-off from the site will not materially affect adjoining sites.

(5-5)
503.4 Service Provisions

Every building shall, having regard to its use or intended use, be provided
with:

(a) Adequate light and ventilation,

(b) A sufficient supply of suitable water.

(c) Adequate arrangements for the sanitary storage of solid waste (refuse
and garbage). (See Section 10).

(d) Adequate facilities for the removal, and where necessary the
treatment and disposal of all waste products in such a way as not to
affect public health, safety and welfare. (See Section 10).

(e) Efforts shall be made to equip ail Public Buildings in Group A and
Institutional Buildings in Group B with access ramps and
adequately wide entrances and exits for use by persons in wheel
chairs. (For other provisions for handicapped persons see Appendix
F).

503.5 Minimum Areas, Widths and Heights of Habitable Rooms

Table 5-1 shall determine the minimum areas, widths and heights of
habitable rooms and lavatories provided that

(a) The areas given in Table 5-1 shall be measured between the
structural faces of walls permitted for such individual uses.

(b) No habitable room used for two or more purposes shall be divided by
any wall, partition, screen or fitting into areas less than the
minimum areas permitted far such individual uses, unless such
division or partition is not more than 4’0” high.

(c) Any open kitchen recess shall have a minimum floor area of 30 sq.ft.

(d) Every building or apartment of group E(a) shall provide living dining
and sleeping accommodation, together with suitable cooking and
sanitary facilities, and adequate storage facilities.

(e) In any building or apartment of group E(a) providing only one

habitable room, the area of such a room shall not be less than 200
sq.ft.

(f) Where any building of group E(a) or group E(c) is used or intended
to be used for the letting or renting of individual rooms or apartments
with common cooking and/or sanitary facilities, the area of any such
shall be determined in accordance with the following:

(5-6)
 (i) If shared by two (2) apartments only, the area of the facility shall
be not less than 100 sq.ft. in area.

(ii) If shared by more than two apartments the area of the facility
shall not be less than 65 sq. ft. per unit of accommodation sharing
the facility.

(g) Any room used as a place of public assembly for more than 50 persons
shall have a minimum height of 10' 0", except that the minimum clear
height under a gallery or balcony or mezzanine of less than 500 sq. ft,
may be reduced to 8 ft. provided that the space under the gallery or
mezzanine is not separately enclosed.

(h) Where ceiling fans are being erected, the minimum height from the floor
to the ceiling should not be less than 9'0".

503.6 Light and Ventilation

(a) Any habitable room not provided with adequate artificial lighting and
ventilation shall be provided with one or more window or skylights,
having an area or combined area of not less than 10 percent of the floor
area of the room. Not less than 50 percent of the total area of such
window or skylights shall open to permit the free unobstructed passage
of fresh air.

(b) In the case of buildings provided with full mechanical ventilation

systems, then the area of opening light may be reduced to not less than
one third of total window area, at the discretion of the Authority.

(c) In the case of usable rooms or spaces in buildings without natural light
and ventilation, then artificial lighting and full mechanical ventilation
systems or air conditioning must be provided in accordance with design
and installation requirements of Section 11 of this Code.

(5-7)
 Table 5-1.

Minimum Areas and Dimensions of Habitable Rooms

Description of Room Area (sq.ft.) Min. Width or Length Min. Height

Living Room 120 10’ 0” 8’ 0”
Bed rooms 90 8’0” 8’ 0”
Dining room 80 8’0” 8’ 0”
Kitchen 40 5’0” 8’ 0”
Living/dining/bedroom 200 10’0” 8’ 0”
Living/dining/kitchen 180 10’0” 8’ 0”
Living/bedroom 180 10’0” 8’ 0”
Living/dining room 160 10’0” 8’ 0”
Dining room/Kitchen 100 8’0” 8’ 0”
Any other habitable room 80 7’0” 8’ 0”
Lavatory (W.C. bath & basin) 35 4’6” 7’6”
Lavatory (W.C. & shower & basin) 30 4’0” 7’6”
Lavatory (bath & basin) 25 3’4” 7’6”
Lavatory (W.C. & shower) 20 2’8” 7’6”
Lavatory (Shower & basin) 20 2’8” 7’6”
Lavatory (W.C. &basin) 20 2’6” 7’6”
W.C. compartment 12.5 2’8” 7’6”
Shower compartment 7.5 2’6” 7’6”

503.7 Windows

Windows used for the provision of natural light or ventilation shall be located in
an external wall and in such a position that light and fresh air are not substantially
excluded by adjacent walls of the building or by the walls of adjoining buildings.
Windows within toilet facilities shall normally be located 4’ 0” minimum above
floor level. The minimum height from the floor to the window head shall be 6’ 8”.

503.8 Skylights

Skylights used for provision of natural light or ventilation shall be located in a

clear area of roof and shall be designed to prevent the entry of rain water when
closed. Where glass is used or shall be safety glass or shall be screened
internally with a high tensile steel mesh of area not more than I sq. in.

(5-8)
503.9 Enclosed Courts

Any court enclosed on three or more sides and serving windows providing natural
light and ventilation shall have an area for its full height of not less than 150 sq.ft
for each 10' 0" of its height, and a width of not less than 10' 0"; nor less than 5' 0”
for each 10’ 0" of its height up to 60' 0", plus 2' 6" for each 10' 0" of its height
above 60' 0".

503.10 Rear Courts

Any building of Group E (a) on a site where the rear boundary is a common
boundary with an adjoining site shall have a war court of the full length of such
boundary and of a width not less than 10' 0" nor less than 2' 6" for each 10' 0" of
building on the line of such court.

503.11 Rodent Proofing

Special precautions are required for restaurants, buildings where food is prepared,
food storage premises and slaughter houses. Applicants for building permits arc
required to contact the Ministry of Health for minimum requirements with respect
to the type of surfaces of walls, floors and ceiling and the screening necessary.

503.12 Sanitation

(a) Toilet facilities accessible to the public shall be provided on each floor for
each sex for all types of building except that in a building of two floors and
occupied by a single tenant, the combined toilet facilities required may be
located on either floor.

(b) Where common sanitary facilities are provided in buildings of Group E(c)
used by more 'than 10 persons, then at the least, separate facilities shall be
provided for males and females, and such facilities shall be so located that
they are accessible under cover from all of the habitable rooms they serve.

(c) A toilet shah preferably not open directly onto a room intended primary for
human habitation, other than a bedroom or dressing room and never onto
any area used for the manufacture, preparation or storage of food for human
consumption.

(d) The floor and walls of public toilet facilities, to a height of 5 feet, shall be
of tile or other smooth, cleanable, impervious materials.

(5-9)
 (e) Shower compartments shall have floors and walls constructed of smooth,
corrosion resistant and non-absorbent water resistant materials to a height
of not less than 70 inches above the compartment floor.

(f) Tables 3-8 and 3-9 give the number of lavatory fixtures required for various
occupancies.

503.13 Storage of Hazardous Material

a) Buildings constructed for the storage and use of hazardous material

(Appendix D) must be sited and constructed in accordance with Part 3
Section 7 of CUBiC or in accordance with any other Code or Standard
approved by the Authority.

b) Part 3 Section 7 of CUBiC provides information on the following:

■ Explosion hazards

■ Volatile flammables

■ Liquefied petroleum gases

■ Pyroxylin plastics

■ Use and storage of flammable film

■ Use and storage of combustible fibers

■ Combustible dusts, grain processing and storage

■ Paint spraying and spray booths

■ Dry cleaning establishments

■ Private garages

■ Public garages

■ Motor fuel service stations

■ Motor vehicle repair shops

■ Places of public assembly

■ Public assembly and ether theatres

(5-10)
504 MEANS OF ESCAPE AND EXITS

504.1 Basis of Requirement

All new buildings, also existing buildings for which a certificate of use and
occupancy has been issued, shall be provided with adequate means of escape
and exits in accordance with the requirements of this Code. Where the
change of use and occupancy of an existing building requires additional or
improved means of escape and/or exit, and the exact requirements of this
Code cannot reasonably be met, the Authority shall have power to approve
alternative proposals for providing adequate means of escape and/or exits, so
long as such alternative proposals are also submitted to and approved by the
Director.

504.2 Definitions

For the purposes of this Code the following special definitions shall apply:

(a) "Means of escape" shall include any corridor, hallway, lobby,

staircase, escalator or ramp by use of which the occupants of a
building may proceed safety from within a building to an exit.

(b) "Door" shall include any shutter, cover or other form of protection
to an opening in any wall of floor of a building or in the structure
surrounding a protected shaft, whether the door is comprised of
one leaf or several.

(c) "Exit" shall be a means of egress and shall include:

(i) Any doorway in the ground storey leading directly to a street

or to an open space providing free access to a street.

(ii) Any doorway in an upper storey fitted with fire resisting

doors and leading through, a fire resisting lobby, directly to
an external staircase terminating at ground level in an open
space providing free access to a street.

(iii) Any doorway in an upper storey leading directly to an

external balcony or flat roof from which there is further
means of escape.

(iv) Any doorway in an upper storey or basement storey, leading

directly to an enclosed internal staircase separated from all
the stories through which it passes by fire resisting doors,
provided that such staircase leads directly to a ground storey
exit, or a ground storey fire-resisting lobby from which there
is a further means of escape.

(5-11)
 (d) "Fire resisting door" shall mean any door with a fire resistance rating in
accordance with the requirements of an approved agency, and which is
fitted in such a way that it cannot reasonably be fixed in an open position,
and is provided with an approved automatic closing device.

(e) “Fire resisting lobby" shall mean a lobby used or intended to be used as a
means of escape in which all of the doors are either fire resistive doors or
exits 1eading directly to open air.

504.3 Basis of Calculation

The occupancy content of a building or a storey of a building used in determining

the number and width of means of escape and exits shall be calculated in accordance
with Table 3-1 of this Code and it shall be an offence to occupy any building with a
greater number of persons than the means of escape and exits provide for.

504.4 Number of Means of Escape and Exits

Table S-2 shall determine the minimum number of means of escape and exits
required for each storey of a building provided that:

(a) The requirements for exits in this clause shall not apply to a single family
residence which shall be supplied with at least two doors, preferably on
opposite sides of the building.

(b) Exits shall be located as remotely as practicable from one another and shall
be reasonably distributed throughout the building.

(c) All corridors, halls or foyers used as a means of escape shall lead directly
to an exit from the storey.

(d) Every enclosed space of more than 1,000 sq.ft with an occupancy content
of more than 5 persons shall have at least two means of escape or exits.

(e) Two or more means of escape may serve the same or communicating
corridors, halls or foyers provided that the capacity of such corridors, halls
or foyers is not less than the capacity of the two nearest exits.

(f) In places of public assembly accommodating more than 500 persons,

means of escape or exits shall be provided on at least 3 sides and where
fixed seating is provided such means of escape or exits shall be served by
permanent aisles and cross aisles.

(5-12)
 g) Half of the required main floor exit widths shall be proportioned to
the side exits and when mere than one side exit is required, shall be
equally divided in full units of unit width to each side.

h) The number of side exits shall be not less than that required by
distance limitations and as set forth in the following

Number of Persons Number of Side Exits

0 - 600 1
601 - 999 2
1,000 or More 4

i) Where one or two side exits on each side arc required one of such
exits on each side shall be located at the front of the assembly space,
remote from the main-floor exits. And where four or more exits on
each side are required, the additional exits shall be proportionally
spaced along the length of the side walls.

(j) No two means of escape from one place of public assembly shall use
a common staircase.

(k) No open staircase from a basement or lower ground floor shall be

considered a means of escape unless it leads directly to a ground
storey exit or to a ground storey hall or foyer from which there is an
exit.

(1) Stairways from the basement to ground floor should be separated

from stair cases serving upper floors.

Table 5-2

Minimum Number of Means of Escape and Exits

Required per Storey

Occupancy content of floor Means of Escape Exits

1-10 1 1
11-100 1 2
101-500 2 3
501-1000 3 4
1000 or more 4 5

(5-13)
504.5 Maximum Distance of Travel to Exits

Table 5-3(a) shall determine the greatest permitted distance from any point in a
storey measured along the line of travel to the nearest exit from the storey provided
that:

(a) Where an area is subdivided into rooms not exceeding 250 sq.ft in
individual area the permitted distance may be measured from any door of
such room which opens directly to a corridor, hall or foyer.

(b) No dead end of a corridor shall be more than 20'0" from an exit or from a
means of escape leading to at least two exits.

504.6 Widths of Means of Escape and Exits

Table 5-4 shall determine the minimum widths of means of escape arid exits
provided that in places of public assembly where fixed seats are provided, no means
of escape or exit shall be less wide than any aisle leading directly to it.

504.7 Exits and Fire Check Doors

(a) Exit doors shall be kept clear of obstruction at all times.

(b) Exit doors shall be so located that they open only in the direction of escape
a full 90 degree swing unobstructed by cross traffic, provided that doors
regularly used for entry and fitted with glazed observation panels may also
open in reverse to a full 180 degree swing.

(c) Exit doors provided only for emergency use may be fitted with approved
internal panic bolts but shall not be fitted with any other locking or closing
device.

(d) Fire check doors including doors to enclosed internal staircases, shall be so
located that they open in the direction of escape with a full 90 degree swing
unobstructed by cross traffic routes and fitted with glazed observation
panels; they may also open in reverse to a full 180 degree swing. No fire
check door shall be fitted with any kind of latch or automatic locking
device. Fire check doors shall be self closing.

(e) Glazed observation panels in fire check doors shall be 1/4” wired glass, or
toughened safety glass of equal and approved performance.(See 404.4)

(5-14)
 Table 5-3(a)

Maximum Permitted Distance of Travel to an Exit (ft.)

(Without fire suppression system)

Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5

Building Occupancy Fire-resistant Semi-fire Ordinary Non- Wood
Group resistant Masonry combustible Frame
Groups A,C,D, E(a), E(c) 150 150 100 75 75

Groups B & E(b) 100 100 75 N/A N/A

Group E (except E(b) 75 75 50 50 N/A

*Group F 300 300 N/A N/A N/A

*With fire suppression system

Table 5-3(b)

Exit Capacity: Number of Person per Unit of Exit Width (22 inches)
(Without fire suppression system)

Occupancy Group Level Travel (corridors, doors, ramps Stairs

etc)

Group A: Public Buildings 100 75

Group B: Institutional Buildings (Generally) 30 22

Group C: Commercial and Industrial 100 60

Group D: Offices, Administrative and Retail service
Buildings 100 60

Group E: Residential Buildings 100 75

*Group F: Hazardous Occupancy 100 60

*With fire suppression system

See also Table 3.500 and 3.510 of CUBiC Part 3 Section 5.

(5-15)
 Table 5-4

Minimum Required Widths of Means or Escape and Exit Doors

Capacity in Number of Corridors, Halls and Staircases and ramps Exit doors and fire
Persons Foyer clear between check doors between
handrails jambs
1-10 3’ 4” 3’ 0” 3’ 0”
11-200 4’ 0” 4’ 0” 3’ 8”
201-500 6’ 0” 6’ 0” 5’ 8”

501 or more 8’ 0” 8’ 0” 7’ 8”

504.8 Internal Staircases and Ramps used as Means of Escape

Internal staircases and ramps used as means of escape shall be designed and
constructed in accordance with the following requirements:

(a) They shall be considered as enclosed vertical openings and the

enclosing structure shall be of fire resistance rating construction in
accordance with the requirements of Section 4 of this Code.

(b) They shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of

Section 4 of this Code and constructed of non-combustible
materials.

(c) Flights shall preferably run straight from landing to landing

without winders or tight spiral sections.

(d) The number of risers in one flight from landing to landing shall
not exceed 16.

504.9 Fixed Seating in Places of Public Assembly

In places of public assembly with fixed seating arrangements the seating

shall be separated into blocks by aisles in accordance with the following
requirements:

(a) The maximum number of seats in a row between two aisles shall
be 14 and in a row served by only one aisle shall be 7.

(b) Where bench seats without dividing arms are provided they shall
not be longer than 21’ 0” between two aisles or 10’ 6” when
served by only one aisle.

(5-16)
 (c) The spacing of scats shall not be less than 2' 3" back to back nor
less than 1' 0" clear from the back of one seat to the front of the
seat immediately behind it.

(d) The maximum number of rows of seats in one block shall be 21

and blocks shall be separated by cross aisles.

(e) The number of seats in a row may be increased to 100 where

seats are so spaced that there is an unobstructed space of not less
than 18" horizontal projection between the rows of seats, and
doorways leading directly to exit corridors are provided along
each side of the place of assembly at the rate of one doorway for
every 3 rows of seats.

(d) Every aisle shall lead directly to a means of escape or to an exit

or to a cross aisle.

Aisles serving up to 50 seats shall be not less than 2' 6" wide.

(g) Aisle serving more than 50 seats shall be not less than 3’ 0'' wide
when serving seats on one side only, and not less than 3' 6" wide
when serving seats on both sides.

(h) Aisles leading directly to a means of escape or an exit shall not

be less than 4' 0'' wide.

(i) Every cross aisle shall lead directly to a means of escape or to an

exit.

(g) Every ramped aisle shall have a non-slip walking surface.

(k) No ramped aisle shall have an average slope of more than 1 in 10

or a maximum slope of more than 1 in 5. No aisle or cross aisle
shall be ramped across its widths.

(1) In stepped aisles the risers shall extend the full width of the aisle
and each riser shall be illuminated, Treads and risers shall
conform with the requirements of Sub-section 504.

505 STAIRCASES AND RAMPS

505.1. Definitions

(a) Private stairway shall mean a stairway of steps intended to be

used by only one dwelling.

(b) Common stairway shall mean a stairway of steps which is

intended for common use.

(c) The width of a stairway shall mean:

(5-17)
 (i) the horizontal distance between the centre lines of handrails, in the
case of a stairway with handrails on both sides;

(ii) the horizontal distance between the centre line of handrail and any
wall, screen or extremity on the other side of the step, where there
is a handrail on one side only;

(iii) the width of the narrowest part if tapered.

(d) Pitch line shall mean a notional line drawn to connect all the nosings of the
treads in a particular flight of stairs.

(e) The going of a step shall mean the distance measured on plan between the
nosing of its tread and the nosing of the tread of the step or landing next
above it.

(f) Parallel step shall mean a step of which the nosing is parallel to the nosing
of the steps or landing above it.

(g) Tapered step shall mean a step, the nosing of which, is not parallel to the
nosing of the step or landing next above it.

505.2 Basis of Requirements

Staircases and ramps shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the
requirements of Sub-section 504 and when used as a means of escape they shall also
conform to the pertinent requirements of Sub-section 503 of this Code.

505.3 Private Stairways

Any private stairway shall be so constructed that:

a) Between consecutive floors there is an equal going for each parallel step and
an equal rise for every step and landing.

b) Over the whole width of the stairway there is:

(i) headroom of not less than 6' 6", measured vertically above the pitch
line,

(ii) clearance of not less than 5' 0" measured at right angles to the pitch
line,

c) The dimensions of treads and risers conform to Table 5-5.

d) The pitch of the stairway is not more than 42 degrees.

e) Tapered steps conform to the requirements of Sub-section 504.6.

(5-18)
 505.4 Common Stairways

Any common stairway shall be so constructed that:

a) It complies with Table 5-5 for the relevant category of use.

b) The pitch of the stairway is not more than 38 degrees.

c) The stairway has not more than 16 risers in any fight.

d) Tapered steps must conform to the requirements of Sub-section 504.6.

e) The sum of the going plus twice the rise should not be less than 24'' nor
more than 26".

Table 5-5

Treed and Riser Sizes/Dimensions

Occupancy Group Maximum for Risers Minimum for Treads*

(inches) (inches)
Group A - Public Buildings 7-1/2 10

Group B – Institutional Buildings 7-1/2 10

Group E – Residential Buildings 8-1/4 9

All others 8 9

*Excluding nosings

505.5 Open Riser Stairways

(a) Stairways which have no risers below the treads and landings shall
conform in all respects to the requirements of Sub-sections 504.3
and 504.4 as appropriate.

(b) The nosing of each tread and landing shall overlap on plan, the
back edge of the tread of the step below it by not less than 5/8".

505.6 Tapered Steps

(a) In the application of requirements Sub-sections 504.3, 504.4 and

504.5 to tapered steps, the going and pitch of tapered steps shall be
measured in the vertical planes of the pitch lines connecting the
nosings of consecutive steps at a distance of 10-1/2” from the
extremities of the width of such steps.

(5-19)
 (b) The sum of the going plus twice the rise shall be:

(i) Not less than 22-1/2".

(ii) Not more than 25" where the angle of taper is 10 degrees or less or 28"
in all other cases.

505.7 Guarding of Stairways and Landings

(a) Any private or common stairway shall be guarded on each side by a wall, a
securely fixed screen, balustrade or railing extending to a height of not
less than 2' 9" measured vertically above the pitch line.

(b) The side of any landing or similar space forming part of a stairway or
directly overlooking a stairwell shall be guarded by a wall, securely fixed
screen, balustrade or railing extending to a height above the floor of such
landing or space, in the case of private stairways 3' 0" and in the case of
common stairways 3' 6".

(c) Any flight of steps with an aggregate rise of more than 2' 0” shall have a
continuous handrail fixed securely at a height of not less than 2' 9" nor
more than 2' 11" measured vertically above the pitch line, one on each side
if the stairway is more than 3' 6" wide or on one side only if the width is
less.

(d) Easy to grasp handrails with 1-1/2" clearance from a wall shall extend 1'6''
at top and bottom of stairs with ends turned down to floor or into walls, but
not to create a safety hazard.

(e) All handrailing should have intermediate vertical or longitudinal rails or

latticework which would prohibit the passage of a 6" diameter sphere, except
for industrial buildings where the intermediate rails or latticework should
prohibit the passage of a 12” sphere.

505.8 Guarding of Balconies and External Areas

a) Any balcony, platform, roof or other external area which is 2' 0" or more
above ground and to which a person habitually has access ether than for
maintenance and repair shall have a balustrade, parapet or railing not less
than 3' 6" high and of such extent, construction and material as to afford
safety to persons using the balcony, platform, roof or external area.

b) Balustrades, parapets and railings on balconies and platforms for single

family dwellings only shall not be less than 3’ 0” high.

(5-20)
 505.9 Ramps

No ramp shall be steeper than 1:10 nor more than 40" wide between
handrails, nor more than 8' 0" wide Without a centre handrail and the
whole of the walking surface shall be finished with a non-slip material,
Minimum headroom for a ramp shall be 6' 6" measured at right angles to
the slope of the ramp.

505.10 Landings

Landings shall be at least as deep as the widest staircase, flight or ramp

served, and such depth shall be clear of any door swing or other
obstruction to free passage. However for straight staircases landings shall
be a minimum of 3 ft deep.

506 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS

506.1 Basis of Provision

When fire suppression systems such as automatic sprinkler systems are

installed in accordance with the requirements of this Code or on the advice
of the Director they shall be maintained to the satisfaction of the Director.
Reference should be made .to CUBiC Part 3 Section 7 for the choice of a
suitable suppression system for the building.

506.2 Special Provisions

Special precautions, and fire protection systems, e.g. halogenated

installation & shall be provided if so required by the Authority in any
building, or part of a building.

506.3 General Requirements for Sprinkler Systems

All automatic sprinkler or other type of systems shall be of proprietary

manufacture. The installation shall be carried out by an experienced
specialist contractor and both design and installation shall be in
accordance with recognized standards of good practice at least equal to the
standard recommended in !he latest edition of NFiPA Standards 13,13A,
13D, 13R and 14 as may be appropriate for the class of building and
availability of water supply.

506.4 Approval of Installation

The installation of any required sprinkler system shall be approved by the

Authority in writing on completion; no Certificate of Occupancy shall be
issued by the Director until a copy of such approval has been provided.

(5-21)
 SECTION 6

PRECAUTIONS DURING BUILDING CONSTRUCTION

Contents

601 GENERAL

601.1 Scope
601.2 Erection of Scaffolds and Safeguards
601.3 Electricity Lines and other Hazards
601.4 Underground Utilities

602 DEMOLITION

603 EXCAVATION

604 SIDEWALKS, SHEDS AND FENCES

604.1 Sheds
604.2 Construction Fences
604.3 Exceptions

605 STORAGE OF MATERIAL

605.1 General
605.2 Hazardous Material

606 HOISTING MACHINERY

607 DERRICKS AND CRANES

607.1 General
607.2 Visibility
607.3 Compliance
607.4 Exceptions

608 CABLES, ROPES, CHAINS AND BLOCKS

609 PLATFORM HOISTS

610 HOIST, TOWERS

611 TEMPORARY FLOORING

(6-1)
612 FLOOR OPENINGS

613 RUNWAYS AND RAMPS

614 TEMPORARY STAIRWAYS

615 LADDERS

616 SCAFFOLDS

617 SAFEGUARDS

617.1 Railings
617.2 Toeboards

618 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER

620 SANITATION

621 WELDING AND CUTTING

622 OPEN FIRES

623 FIRE PROTECTION

624 SPECIAL HURRICANE PRECAUTIONS

(6-2)
 SECTION 6

PRECAUTIONS DURING BUILDING CONSTRUCTION

601. GENERAL

601.1 Scope

a) The provisions of this Section shall apply to all work in connection

with erection alteration, repair, removal and demolition of buildings
and structures. It is the duty of all builders to make every effort to
provide a safe working environment for workers on building sites. On
sites on which more than 30 persons are working the use of hard hats
may be enforced by the Board/Authority.

b) The Board/Authority will issue an order to stop work if any provision

of the Section is violated. Work will not be allowed to recommence
until the owner has complied with the provisions of the Section to the
satisfaction of the Board/Authority.

601.2 Erection of Scaffolds and Safeguards

a) The construction, erection, alteration and removal of scaffolds and the

application, installation and setting up of safeguards and equipment
devices shall be done by skilled workmen under the supervision of a
person qualified by experience and training for such work.

b) A safeguard, device or piece of equipment which is unsafe shall be

reported to the superintendent or foreman, who shall take immediate
steps to remedy such condition or remove such safeguard device or
equipment.

c) Scaffolds, ladders stair & fuel gas tanks and other devices or
equipment regulated by this section shall be maintained in a good, safe
and usable condition as long as they are in use.

d) No ladders, scaffold, railing or other devices or equipment required or

regulated by this section, or any part thereof, shall be removed altered
or weakened when required by the work unless so ordered by the
superintendent or foreman in charge.

e) Scaffolds, temporary floors, ramps, stairway landings, stair treads, and

all other walkway surfaces shall be kept free from protruding nails and
splinters. They shall be kept free from necessary obstructions so that
the workers may move about safety.

(6-3)
 f) Protruding nails and tie wire ends shall be removed, hammered in
or bent in a safe condition.

601.3 Electricity Lines and other Hazards

a) Electric lines, moving ropes and cable gears, or similar hazards with
which a worker might come in contact, shall be encased or guarded.

b) No person, firm or corporation, either personally or through an

employee or agent of another, shall operate or move any machine,
equipment, material, scaffolds or assembly closer than six feet to
any energized high-voltage overhead electrical facilities except with
the approval of the Electrical Inspector.

601.4 Underground Utilities

Prior to making an excavation, drilling or otherwise disturbing the ground,

the person doing the work, or causing such work to be done, shall contact
all public utility organizations to determine the possible location of
underground facilities, to avoid the hazard to public safety, health and
welfare caused by inadvertent disruption of such facilities.

601.5 Duty of Cane

It is the responsibility of the builder to ensure that all operatives in his/her

employ are appropriately trained and that they can operate the equipment
safely. It is also his/her responsibility to ensure that no member of the
public is exposed to a hazardous act.

602 DEMOLITION

a) Before commencing the work of demolition of a building or

structure, all gas, electric, water and other meters shall be removed
and the supply lines disconnected, except such as are especially
provided or required for use in connection with the work of
demolition.

b) Glazed sashes and glazed doors shall be removed before the start of
demolition operations.

c) No wall, chimney or other construction shall be allowed to fall in

mass, except under competent supervision. Scaffolds or stagings
shall be erected for workers if walls or other elements of the
structure are too thin or too weak to work on. Heavy structural
members, such as beams or columns, shall be carefully lowered and
not allowed to fall freely.

d) Chutes for the removal of materials and debris shall be provided in

all parts of demolition operations which are more than 20 feet above
the point from which material is to be removed.

(6-4)
 e) Chutes shall be completely enclosed and shall be equipped, at
intervals of 25 feet or less, with substantial stops to prevent
descending material from attaining dangerous speeds.

f) The bottom of each chute shall be equipped with an adjustable

gate or stop, for regulating the flow of materials. A danger sign
shall be placed at the discharge end of every chute; and except for
the discharge of materials, the gate or stop shall be kept closed.

g) Proper tools shall be provided and kept available to loosen material

or debris jammed in the chute. Chutes, floors, stairways and other
places shall be effectively wet down, at frequent intervals, when
the dust from such operations would cause a menace of hardship to
adjoining buildings or premises.

h) Stairs and stair railings shall be kept in place and in usable

condition as long as is practicable, and steps and landings shall be
kept from debris.

i) Floor openings, unless covered or otherwise protected, shall be

provided with guard rails and toe boards.

j) All areas of danger in demolition operations shall be properly

enclosed and danger signs posted. Sufficient watchmen shall be
provided to warm workers of impending dangers, and all
unauthorized persons shall be excluded from places where
demolition in progress.

603 EXCAVATION

a) The sides of every excavation in connection with building

operations, including trenches for pipes or for any purposes, shall
be sheet-piled braced or shored when necessary to prevent the soil
from caving in on persons engaged in work within such
excavation.

b) Where workers are employed adjacent to an excavation on work

other than that directly connected with the excavation, substantial
railings or fences shall be provided to prevent such workers from
falling into the excavation.

c) Every trench, five feet or more in depth, shall have suitable means
of escape at least every 25 feet of its length.

(6-5)
 d) Excavations shall be drained and kept cleat of excess water and
debris to the satisfaction of the Ministry of Health

e) The need for all excavations and the probable depths of the
excavations and the time such excavations shall be in place shall be
reported to the Director for approval before the work commences. It
is the duty of the permit bolder to ensure that the excavations are
completed and covered within the time frame reported to the
Director.

604 SIDEWALK SHEDS AND FENCES

604.1 Sheds

a) Where buildings, which exceed 45 feet in height, are to be erected or

demolished closer than ten feet, or buildings which exceed 25 feet
in height are to be erected or demolished closer than five, to a street
line, there shall be erected and maintained, during such work
adjacent to the street line, a shed of sufficient strength and stability
to sustain safely the weight of materials that may be placed thereon,
and to withstand the shocks incident to the handling of such
materials or their preparation for use, and accidental jars from
trucks passing or delivering materials.

b) When the roof of such shed is used for the storage of materials or for
the performance of work of any kind, substantial railings not less
than three feet high and solid toe boards not less than six inches
high shall be placed along the open sides and ends of such roof.

c) Such shed shall be constructed to afford unobstructed walkways, not

less than eight feet high and five feet wide. The street side shall be
kept open for a height of not less than seven feet above the curb,
and the sheds shall be properly lighted at night with not less than
one 100-watt bulb every 20 feet of its length and at each change of
grade or elevation of the sidewalk surface.

d) Such shed shall remain in place until the building is enclosed, or if

being demolished until the building is reduced to 20 feet in height.

604.2 Construction Fences

Buildings which are erected or demolished closer than five feet to a street
line and which are not required to have a sidewalk shed shall be provided
with protection on the street sides in the form of a substantial fence not less
than eight feet high. Such fence shall not restrict the sidewalk to less than
five feet in width and shall be built solid for its full length, except for such
openings as may be necessary for a proper execution of the work.

(6-6)
 604.3 Exceptions

The Director may waive, or may vary, any or all of the provisions of
subsection 604 where the safety of the public may otherwise be protected.

605 STORAGE OF MATERIAL

605.1 General

a) Materials to be stored at or near locations where workers are

employed or on any public property shall be piled or stacked in an
orderly manner to avoid toppling over or being otherwise
displaced.

b) No material shall be piled or stacked to a greater height than six

feet except in yards or sheds intended especially for storage. When
piles exceed four feet in height, the material shall be so placed that
the sides and ends of the piles taper back.

c) The placing of construction materials in a building or structure

during building operations shall be done with due consideration of
the effect of such loads on the structural members, and such loads
shall, in general, be placed as near to the points of support of the
structural members as possible, Such loadings shall not cause
stresses in any structural member beyond the design stresses.

d) Waste material rubbish resulting from building operations shall be

removed as rapidly as possible and shall not be allowed to
accumulate on the premises or adjacent thereto.

605.2 Hazardous Materials

a) When storing hazardous materials (eg flammable, explosive or

toxic materials) the manufacturer's recommendations shall be
followed, in any event the owner and builder shall construct and
maintain safe storage areas in accordance with the requirements
given in Part 3 Section 3 of CUBiC.

b) In general hazardous materials should be stored in well ventilated,

shaded areas away from naked flames, water courses and high
traffic areas. The plans and drawings for such storage areas must
be submitted to the Director.

(6-7)
606 HOISTING MACHINERY

a) Every hoisting engine shall be provided with adequate breaks, capable

of holding the maximum load at airy point of travel.

b) Guards shall be provided for exposed gears and other moving parts and
around hoisting cables at all points to prevent workers from tripping or
gutting clothing caught.

c) Ample room shall be provided around hoisting engine, motors or other

machinery or apparatus for the free and safe movement of those who
operate or otherwise attend such engines motors or other machinery
apparatus.

d) Hoisting machinery shall be enclosed to exclude unauthorized persons

and if placed outside the building, further protection against falling
objects shall be provided.

e) When hoisting machinery is set on an elevated platform, such platform

shall be of substantial construction, and guard rails and toe boards
shall be provided along all open sides platform.

607 DERRICKS AND CRANES

(a) Derricks shall be so designed and assembled that no part shall be

stressed beyond the safe-working stress for the material, as specified
in this Code, under maximum-rated load in any possible position. Such
maximum-rated load shall be conspicuously posted on each derrick.

(b) The foot-block of every derrick shall be firmly secured against motion
in any direction.

(c) Guy derricks shall have the top of the mast held by not less than six
steel guy cables secured by firm anchorages and so placed that the
angle of the guy with the mast shall be as large as possible.

(d) The moving parts of derricks and cranes shall be kept well lubricated,
and all parts shall be inspected at least every other day.

607.2 Visibility

Masts and booms of derricks and cranes, where higher than 150 feet above
ground, shall have installed:

(a) At the top in a manner to ensure unobstructed visibility of at least

one beacon and one flag from any angle, one or more flashing 300
mm beacons, each equipped with two lamps and aviation color filters
and rectangular flag markers of solid color not less than two feet on a
side.

(6-8)
 (b) Along the height of the mast or boom, a pair of lamps of at least
100 watts each, enclosed in aviation-red obstruction light globes, on
opposite sides or corners at regular intervals not to exceed 50 feet
and, rectangular flag markers of solid color aviation-surface-orange,
not less than two feet on a side at regular intervals not to exceed 50
feet.

(c) Where masts and booms are within 50 feet, measured horizontally
of existing buildings which exceed the maximum heights of such
masts or booms, light and flags may be omitted.

607.3 Compliance

(a) Compliance with this Section shall not be construed as satisfying

the zoning height requirements or any special provisions needed for
safety of flying aircraft etc.

(b) Compliance can be achieved by contacting the Director.

608 CABLES, ROPES, CHAINS AND BLOCKS

a) Cables, ropes, chains and blocks shall be of such size that the
maximum load supported by them will not exceed one sixth of their
breaking strength.

b) Blocks designed for use with manila ropes shall not be used for steel
cables. Blocks used at or near floors or in other exposed places to
change the direction of- cables shall be enclosed or otherwise
effectively guarded.

c) All ropes and cables used in connection with scaffolds, derricks and
hoisting apparatus shall be tested before being put to use and at least
once every 30 days while in use, to insure their safety and suitability
for the purpose to which they are to be put. Any rope or cable found
to be unsafe or unfit shall not be used.

d) Chains shall not be used for slings, bridles or other similar purposes,
but shall be restricted to only such purposes as require a straight
pull.

e) Hook shall not be used for hoisting buckets, cages or skips.

(6-9)
609 PLATFORM HOISTS

a) No person shall be permitted to ride on any platform hoist unless it

has been designed and constructed far passenger service. Elevators
used for the transportation of workers during construction shall
comply with the requirements of Section 11.

b) Platform hoists for the handling of materials within buildings under

construction shall have the car substantially constructed and provided
with covers, either solid or wire mesh. Sections of the cover may be
arranged to swing upward for the handling of bulky materials, or the
covers may be omitted if suitable overhead protection is provided.

c) Hoists shall be equipped with a broken-rope safety device.

d) Where wheel barrows or buggies are used for handling material on

platform hoists, cleats shall be nailed to the platform to fix the proper
position so that handles shall not project beyond platform edges.

e) Supports for the overhead sheave shall be designed to carry no more

than the hoist and its maximum load.

610 HOIST TOWERS

a) Hoist towers, erected in connection with building construction shall

be substantially constructed, and all members shall be so
proportioned that the stresses shall not exceed those specified for
that material, when carrying the dead load of the tower plus two
times the weight of the platform or bucket. Hoist towers shall not be
used unless the design and construction of the tower is approved by
the Director.

b) Every hoist tower shall rest on a sufficiently solid foundation to

prevent injurious settlement or distortion of its framework.

c) Every hoist tower shall be secured in not less than four directions
against swaying or tipping, at intervals of not more than 32 feet in its
height, by steel cable guys adequately anchored or by other
satisfactory means. Such towers which are constructed adjacent to
buildings shall be secured to the building frame at each floor as the
building progresses.

d) Landing platforms in hoist towers or platform connecting a hoist

tower to a building or other structure shall be provided with guard
rails and toe boards.

(6-10)
 c) The bottom of every hoist tower shall be screened or otherwise
protected on all sides to a height of not less than six feet.

d) Hoist towers erected within the building, but not occupying the
entire opening through which they pass, shall be completely
enclosed on all sides and shall be provided with doors at the
unloading points unless the platform hoist is solidly enclosed an
all sides to the height to which material is to be loaded or
unloaded.

611 TEMPORARY FLOORING

a) In buildings of skeleton construction, the permanent floor, except

for necessary hoistway openings, shall, when possible, be
constructed as the building progresses. There shall be not more
than three unfilled floors above the highest permanent floor.

b) In buildings of skeleton construction, the entire working floor

shall be planked over, except spaces required for construction
work, for raising or lowering materials, and for stairways or
ladders. Planks shall be placed so that they cannot tip under the
weight of a worker at any point and secured so that they cannot
slip out of place.

c) In buildings of wood joist construction, the underfloor shall be

laid for each floor as the building progress.

612 FLOOR OPENINGS

a) All floor openings, used as hoistways or elevator shaftways, shall

be guarded on all sides, except the side being used for loading or
unloading. Guards shall be barricades not less than four feet high
along or near the edges of such openings, or guard rails not less
than three feet high, placed not less than two feet distant at all
points from the edges of such openings. If guard rails are used,
toe boards shall be provided along the edges of the openings.
Sides left open for loading or unloading shall be guarded by
similar solid doors or gates.

b) All floor openings used as stairways, or for the accommodations

of ladders or runways, shall be guarded by railings and toe
boards.

c) All other floor openings shall be guarded on all sides by solid

barriers not less than three feet high, or by railings and toe boards
or shall be planked over or otherwise covered over by temporary
construction capable of sustaining safely such loads as are likely
to come thereon.

(6-11)
 d) Barriers for the guarding of openings used as hoistways or elevators
shall be constructed so that workers cannot thrust head arm or legs
through them, and loose material cannot fall or be pushed into the
shaftway.

e) Barriers and guard rails around floor openings shall remain in place
until permanent enclosures or protection are otherwise provided.

613 RUNWAYS AND RAMPS

a) Runways and ramps in connection with scaffolds or extending from

story to story or otherwise located and maintained for an extended
period of time or for the transfer of bulky material shall be
constructed of at least three 10-inch planks laid closely side by side
and substantially supported and braced to prevent unequal deflection
and springing action.

b) Runways and ramps shall have a slope not steeper than one in three,
and the total rise of a runway or ramp between landings shah not
exceed 12 feet.

c) When the rise is steeper than one in six, or when the rise is more than
six feet and steeper than one in eight, runways or ramps shall be
provided with cleats spaced not more than eight inches apart.

d) Runways and ramps, having a total rise of more than six feet, or
passing over or near floor openings, high-tension wires or other
dangerous places, shall be provided with guard rails and toe boards.

614 TEMPORARY STAIRWAYS

a) In all buildings, the permanent stairways shall be installed as soon as

conditions will permit. When the work on a building has progressed
to a height in excess of 60 feet and it has not been practicable to
install the permanent stairways, at least one temporary stairway shall
be provided for the full height and continued upward as rapidly as the
work progresses.

b) Stairs and stairways shall be of sufficient strength to support a load of

at least 100 pounds per square foot, and all stairways shall be
guarded on all open sides with hand rails and toe boards.

(6-12)
 c) Temporary stairs shall be constructed so that treads and risers are
uniform in width and height in any one flight. The sum of the height
of the two risers and the width of one tread shall be not less than 24
nor more than 26 inches. Temporary stairways shall be not less than
36 inches wide. Landings shall be not less than 30 inches long.

d) No flight of stairs of a temporary stairway shall have a vertical rise

in excess of 12 feet, and when necessary, intermediate landings
shall be provided.

e) Temporary and permanent stairways shall be adequately lighted as

set forth in 618.

d) No door shall open directly onto a fight of stairs, but a landing equal
to at least the width of the door shall be provided between the door
and the stairs. Temporary doors higher than 4 ft. 6 ins. shall be fitted
with wire glass panels.

g) Permanent stairs that are to be used during construct ion and on

which treads are to be filled in later shall have wooden treads firmly
fitted in place for the full area of the tread. The top surface of the
temporary treads shall be maintained above the tops of the risers or
nosings.

h) The storage of materials on stairs or in stairways or adjacent to stair

openings shall not be permitted.

615 LADDERS

a) Except where either permanent or temporary stairways or runways

are required ladders shall be provided to give access to all floors,
stagings or platforms where work is being done more than five
stories above ground or above a permanent or temporary floor.

b) Ladders required by this Code shall be left in place until the

permanent stairways are ready for use or until temporary stairways
are installed, and stairways shall be erected as soon as the building
exceeds 60 feet in height.

c) All ladders, when in use, shall be set up in a manner to be secure

and to prevent dipping; and ladders, except stepladders or other
self-supporting ladders, shall be securely fastened to a permanent
support at the top, and if necessary, at the bottom, and braced to
prevent swaying, bending or shaking.

d) Ladders, leading to floors, stagings or platforms, shall extend at last,

three feet above the level of such floors, stagings or platforms.

(6-13)
 e) No single ladder shall exceed 20 feet in length. When greater heights
are to be reached, intermediate platforms shall be erected. Ladder
landings shall be at least four feet square and equipped with
handrails and toe boards.

f) Ladder rungs shall be spaced uniformly as near to 12 inches as is

practicable.

g) When used temporarily, in place of stairways or runways, ladders

serving traffic in both directions simultaneously shall be at least 40
inches wide. If separate ladders are provided for going up and
coming down, they shall be marked "UP" and "DOWN"
respectively at each floor and platform level.

h) Ladders, other than sectional or extension ladders, shall not be

extended by joining two or more together.

i) Ladders shall not be placed or used in shafts of operative elevators

or hoists except by workers engaged in the erection, construction,
alteration or repair or any such shafts, hoistways or equipment.

j) Ladders shall not be painted, but may be oiled or otherwise treated

with preservative so as to permit the detection of faults. Every
ladder shall be inspected by the superintendent or foreman in charge
before being put to use on a building operation and thereafter at
least once every 30 days while continued in use. Broken or weak
ladders with weak or missing rungs, shall not be used or permitted
to remain on the site of building operations, but shall be repaired
and made safe or destroyed.

k) The angle of any access ladder shall be at not less than 60 degrees
nor more than 80 degrees to the horizontal.

616 SCAFFOLDS

a) Properly constructed scaffolds shall be provided for all work which

cannot be done safely by workmen standing on permanent or solid
construction, except when such work can be done safety from
ladders. All such scaffolds shall be substantially constructed, to
support at least four times the maximum load and shall be secured
to prevent swaying.

b) Planks used in the construction of stationary scaffolds shall be not

less than two inches nominal thickness. Where such planks overlap
at the ends, the overlap shall be not less than six inches.

c) Planks shall be so placed that they cannot tip under the weight of
the worker at any point. Nails used in the construction of scaffolds
shall be of ample size and length to carry the loads they are intended
to support, and all nails shall be driven full length. No nails shall be
subject to direct pull.

(6-14)
d) Ropes, cables and blocks used in the support of
swinging scaffolds shall be of sufficient size and
strength to sustain at least six times the maximum
loads to which they will be subject. Where acids are
likely to come into contact with them, ropes shall not
be used in the support of scaffolds, but steel cables
properly protected by grease or oil or other effective
method shall be used instead.

e) Every scaffold, the platform level of which is more

than six feet above the ground or above a permanent
or temporary floor, other than iron workers' scaffolds
and carpenters' bracket scaffolds, shall be provided
with guard rails and toe board extending the full
length of the scaffold and along the ends except
where ramps or runways connect with them, unless
otherwise enclosed or guarded. On suspended,
swinging and pole scaffolds, the space between
guard rails and toe boards shall be fitted with wire
mesh screens securely attached.

f) Where objects are likely to fall on a scaffold from

above, a substantial overhead protection shall be
provided. Not more than ten feet above the scaffold
platform, and at doorways, passageways or other
points where workers must pass under scaffolds, a
substantial overhead protection shall be provided.
No materials or equipment, other than required by
the workers, shall be placed on scaffold platforms.

g) Roof brackets, roof scantling, crawling boards and

similar forms of support shall be substantial in
construction and securely fastened in place when in
use.

h) Barrels, boxes or other similar unstable objects

shall not be used as supports for planking intended
as scaffolds or places of work.

i) When used over public sidewalks or other places of

public use, scaffolds used for minor building
repairs, alterations, or painting shall be equipped
with drop cloths to effectively prevent the falling
of paint or debris.

j) Scaffolds used for sandblasting and guniting

operations shall be entirely and effectively
enclosed, and the determination of effective
enclosure shall be the complete absence of
particles of Material of operation in the air at a
horizontal distance of 50 feet from the point of
operation.

(6-15)
617 SAFEGUARDS

617.1 Railings

(a) Railings, where required during construction, shall comply with the
Standards of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA), Part 1926, or as provided herein.

(b) The top rail of such railings shall be not less than 42 inches above
walking surfaces.

(c) Such railings shall be provided with an intermediate rail midway

between the walking surface and the top rail and shall be
constructed to resist a load of 50 pounds per lineal foot at the top
rail.

617.2 Toeboards

Toeboards, where required during construction, shall comply with the

Standards, referenced in 617.1 (a) herein, or any approved alternate design.

618 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER

a) A- parts of buildings under construction, or other operations covered

by the general provision of this Section, and all sheds, scaffolds,
covered walks, other work or storage areas, and equipment in
connection with such operations shall have sufficient light to ensure
safety and protection of life and property. In passageways, stairways
and corridors, the average light intensity measured at the floor level
shall be not less than two foot candles.

b) At locations where tools and/or machinery are used, the average

light intensity measured at the floor level shall be not less than five
foot candles. Natural or artificial illumination shall be provided in
such a manner that glare and shadows will not adversely affect the
safety protection of workers and property.

c) Temporary wiring for light, heat and/or power shall be adequately

protected against mechanical or overcurrent failures. All conductive
materials enclosing fixed or portable electrical equipment, or
forming a part of such equipment shall be, grounded by one or more
of the methods permitted by Section 11 of this Code.

d) Temporary electric service poles shall be self-supporting or

adequately braced or guyed at all times.

(6-16)
 (e) The installation of temporary lighting and power must be done in
accordance with the Electricity Supply Regulations of Antigua and
Barbuda. The developer must obtain a permit for this installation
from the Electrical Inspector before electricity can be supplied to the
site.

619 FIRST AID

a) On every building operation, arrangements shall be made for prompt

medical attention in case of accidents, and an ample supply of
suitable antiseptic solution and sterile gauze bandages shall be
provided and maintained in a clean, sanitary cabinet, and at all times
available under the direction of the superintendent or a person
designated by him.

b) Unless competent medical attention is otherwise quickly available,

where more than 200 workers are employed, a properly equipped
first-aid room or field hospital shall be provided, and a physician or
nurse shall be available on call.

620 SANITATION

a) Adequate toilet facilities, maintained in a clean, sanitary condition,

shall be provided as set forth in Section 9.

b) An adequate supply of pure, drinking water shall be provided for

workers during hours of employment, and adequate, sanitary
washing facilities shall be provided for workers within reasonable
access.

621 WELDING AND CUTTING

a) Gas welding and cutting and are welding in building construction

and demolition operations shall be restricted to experienced workers
acceptable to the Director. Suitable goggles or helmets and gloves
shall be provided for and worn by workers engaged in gas welding
or cutting or welding.

b) Incombustible shields shall be provided to the worker when exposed

to falling hot metal or oxide.

c) Unless unavoidable, gas welding or cutting or arc welding shall not

be done above other workers. When unavoidable, an incombustible
shield shall be provided between the work and the workers below;
or a watchman shall be stationed to give warning at places where
workers, in the course of their employment are likely to pass under
a gas welding or cutting or an arc welding operation.

(6-17)
 d) Unless unavoidable, gas welding or gutting shall not be carried on in
any place where ample ventilation is not provided, or from which
quick escape is difficult. When unavoidable, workers engaged in
such work in confined spaces shall be allowed frequent access to
fresh air and a relief worker shall be stationed close at hand to assist
the worker in case of accident and to shut off the gases.

e) Tanks of fuel gas shall not be moved or allowed to stand for any
extended period when not in use unless the caps of such tanks are
place. Suitable cradles shall be used for lifting or lowering oxygen
or fuel tanks, to reduce to a minimum the possibility of dropping
tanks, Ordinary rope slings shall not be used.

f) Tanks supplying gasses for welding or cutting shall be located at no

greater distance from the work than is necessary for safety. Such
tanks shall be securely fastened in place and in an upright position.
They shall be stored, or set in place for use, so that they are not
exposed to the direct rays of the sun or to high temperature.

g) Before steel beams or other structural shapes or elements of

construction are cut by means of a gas flame, they shall be secured
by cables or chains to prevent dropping or swinging.

622 OPEN FIRES

a) Open fires, for the purposes of disposing of waste materials, the

heating of roofing or other materials, or for any other purpose
whatsoever, shall not be allowed except with the permission of the
Director.

b) Wherever any enclosed flame heaters or open fires are used, there
shall be a workman in constant attendance, whose duty it shall be to
have such heater or fire under proper control at all times.

623 FIRE PROTECTION

a) Storage of combustible material shall not be permitted under or near

welding operations. No part of the building shall be used for the
storage of combustible materials until such fire proofing of the part
has been installed.

b) In every building of reinforced concrete construction, forms of

combustible materials shall be stripped from the concrete and
removed from the building as soon as practicable. No part of the
building shall be used for the storage of combustible materials until
such forms have been removed in that part of the building.

(6-18)
 c) In every building operation wherever a tool house, storeroom or
other shanty is placed, or a room or space is used for storage,
dressing room or workshop, at least one approved hand pump, tank
or portable chemical extinguisher shall be provided and maintained
in an accessible location.

d) During building operations, free access from the street to fire

hydrants where installed and to outside connections for stand pipes,
sprinklers or other free-extinguishing equipment, whether
permanent or temporary, shall be provided and maintained at all
times.

e) No material or construction equipment shall be placed within ten

feet of such hydrant or connection, nor between it and the central
line of the street.

624 SPECIAL HURRICANE PRECAUTIONS

a) During such periods of time as are designated by the Government

being a hurricane, watch, all construction materials or equipment
shall be secured against displacement by wind forces; provided
that where a full complement of personnel is employed or
otherwise in attendance, or engaged for such protection purposes,
normal construction procedures or use of materials or equipment
may continue allowing such reasonable times as may be necessary
to secure such materials or equipment before winds of hurricane
force are anticipated.

b) Construction materials and equipment shall be secured by guying

and shoring and by tying down loose materials, equipment and
construction sheds.

(6-19)
 SECTION 7

WATER SUPPLY SERVICES

Contents

701 SCOPE

702 GENERAL

703 ADEQUACY OF WATER SUPPLY

703.1 General
703.2 Source of Supply
703.3 Treatment Facilities
703.4 Design of Storage Facilities

704 INSTALLATION OF WATER SUPPLIES

704.1 General
704.2 Water Pressure
704.3 Gravity and Surge tanks
704.4 Backflow
704.5 Stop Valves and Drain taps
704.6 Supply Pipes to Individual fixtures
704.7 Distribution Pipes

Table 7-1 Minimum Size of Water Supply Pipes to Individual Fixtures

Table 7-2 Minimum Size of Water Distribution Pipes

705 PIPELINE SYSTEM

705.1 General
705.2 Excavation of Pipe Trenches

Table 7-3 Minimum Depth of Cover to the Crown of the Pipe

Table 7-4 Maximum Particle Size

705.3 Pipe Laying

705.4 Jointing of the Pipe
705.5 Anchoring of Pipes
705.6 Hydraulic Testing of Pipe Lines and Joints

(7-1)
 705.7 Disinfection of the Pipe Line
705.8 Back filling of Trenches
705.9 Connection of Accessories
705.10 Color Code

706 UTILIZATION OF POTABLE GROUND WATER

707 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

708 SAFETY DEVICES

(7-2)
 SECTION 7

WATER SUPPLY SERVICES

701 SCOPE

This Section provides guidance to persons who are submitting

development proposals to the Authority and outlines the requirements for
the provisions of water supply services for these developments. It is
recommended that persons wishing to construct developments for
buildings used by the public or housing developments of more than 10
units contact the Ministry of Health for advice on the appropriate
regulations affecting such developments in addition to the requirement of
this Section.

702 GENERAL

a) The developer is responsible for providing an adequate and potable

water supply to his development. This will include the provision, as
may be necessary, of a source(s) of supply, treatment facilities,
pipeline system and storage facilities.

b) Developers shall be fully responsible for the design and construction

of water supply and sewerage systems for their developments and
shall satisfy the Authority that there is adequate provisions for the
operation and maintenance of such systems.

c) Developers should be aware that rainfall in some of the islands

averages less than 30 inches per year and that there may be no public
pipe borne water supply in or adjoining the development area.

d) In areas where there is a centralized water supply adjacent to or in

close proximity to the development, the developer will carry out
such work as may be required by the Authority and by the water
authorities for connection to his development.

e) The provisions in this Code regarding submission of plans, payment

of fees and approvals shall apply.

703 ADEQUACY OF WATER SYSTEM

703.1 General

a) The applicant is to include in his proposal complete arrangements

for providing an adequate quantity and quality of water to meet
fully the needs of his development. The per capita consumption
rate assumed for design purposes must be approved by the
Authority.

(7-3)
 b) Minimum daily potable water consumption rates are as follows;

Dwelling house 40 gallons /person/day

Hotels 150 gallons/room/day

Offices 8 gallons/employee/day

703.2 Source of supply

The source of supply must be established with the approval of the

Authority as below:

a) Every building shall be provided with a water supply system and storage
facility to the approval of the Authority.

b) Where a piped water supply is available, the design must provide for
individual storage facilities of a minimum capacity of 40 imperial gallons
for each person regularly occupying the building, or in the case of
buildings of public occupancy such as churches or theatres or industrial
buildings, storage facilities which in the opinion of the Authority are
adequate.

c) The Authority may permit private residences in Group E (Sub-section

301.6) which are wholly dependent on rain water catchment to install
catchment and storage facilities which would provide on average less
than the 40 gallons per person per day recommended.

d) Where no piped water supply is provided to serve the development, or

unless a desalination plant is, or will be installed, the design submitted
with the application for buildings in Groups B (Institutional Buildings)
and E (Residential Buildings) must provide for individual rain water
storage to the extent of 10 imperial gallons for each square foot of roof
surface, except that for multi-family dwellings the capacity of the tank
must be based on a minimum storage of 4,000 gallons per bedroom.

e) Sub-section 703.2 d) will not apply if:

(i) the building is to be supplied with potable water by means of

desalination of non-portable water or by any other means such as
to avoid the occupants of the building needing to rely on water
being supplied from any existing public well or borehole, public
tank or cistern or to extract potable water from any lens or
underground water; and

(7-4)
 (ii) adequate back up system fed from an alternative source or 3 days
storage, whichever is greater, is provided against the possible
break down of the primary supply. The back up system is required
to be in full working order at all times.

f) A fault or breakdown in the primary system referred to in e) shall be

repaired without delay.

g) Abstraction from a ground water source requires prior approval of the

Authority. Full details are to be supplied of the proposed borehole to be
established including the intended rate of abstraction and available
information on the aquifer.

h) Pumping levels in the borehole will not be allowed to fall below 1.0 feet
above mean sea level and the rate of abstraction must take into account the
water needs of other developments, proximity to potential source of
pollution such as a sewage outfall, and the characteristics of the aquifer in
which the borehole is located.

i) Desalination plants must be designed and constructed with the approval of

the Authority and of the Ministry of Health. Full details of the proposed
plant must accompany the application.

The details must include:

■ location of the source of raw water,

■ analysis of the raw water,
■ capacity of the plant,
■ main features of the treatment process,
■ method of disposing of the effluent and
■ future arrangements for operation and maintenance

j) Sea water can be used for flushing of toilets and other such uses, but the
water system carrying sea water must be kept separate from the system
carrying potable water.

k) There shall be no cross connection between a potable supply and a

non-potable supply.

703.3 Treatment Facilities

a) The water supply must be treated as necessary and disinfected by

chlorination or other approved process to ensure that the quality satisfies
the Guidelines for Drinking Water Quality as published by the World
Health Organization in 1984, or other acceptable standard guidelines that
are approved in writing by the Ministry of Health.

(7-5)
 b) The treatment facilities shall be designed and constructed to the
satisfaction of the Authority and the Ministry of Health.

703.4 Design of Storage Facilities

a) Unless exempted by the Authority, buildings in Occupancy Groups

A (Public Buildings) and B (Institutional Buildings) should be
provided with at least 3 days storage of treated water based on the
consumption estimates given in Sub-sections 703.1 and 703.2. This
is in addition to any storage provided at the source of a public water
supply.

b) The location and design of the storage facilities, (tanks or cisterns)

must be approved by the Authority and the Ministry of Health. The
applicant should provide the Director with drawings and
calculations showing that the storage facilities are adequate and that
the structure can safely support the water in the facility.

704 INSTALLATION OF WATER SUPPLIES

704.1 General.

As far as possible all pipelines should be laid underground and in a manner

as not to interfere with future development and other services.

704.2 Water Pressure

If the water pressure from the water supply source is insufficient to supply
all fixtures continuously, the supply shall be supplemented by a gravity
tank or a surge tank linked to an auxiliary pumping system.

704.3 Gravity and Surge Tanks

(a) Gravity and surge tanks shall be equipped with over flow pipes not
less than 4" below the supply point and not less than twice the
diameter of the supply and discharging directly to outside the
building line.

(b) Supply pipes from storage tanks may not connect to any public
water mains supply system.

704.4 Backflow

a) The water distribution system shall be fully protected against

backflow either by use of air gap fittings or where it is not possible
to provide an air gap, by non return valves or other means
approved by the Authority.

(7-6)
 b) The Authority shall require that the developers of all institutional
buildings and other facilities used by the public install and maintain
back flow devices complying with recognized standards acceptable to
the Ministry of Health.

704.5 Stop Valves and Drain Taps

(a) A screw stop valve shall be provided within 5’0” of the point of entry of
the main supply pipe to the building and a drain tap shall be provided
within 1’0” of this valve on the distribution side. Such valve shall be
plainly labelled.

(b) Stop valves shall be provided on the supply within 1'0" of the supply
connection to all storage tanks and water heaters and on all branch
distribution pipes from such storage tanks and water heaters and to
isolate all sanitary fixtures in groups of not more than five fixtures.

704.6 Supply Pipes to Individual Fixtures

Table 7-1 shall determine the minimum size of water supply pipe to a sanitary
fixture provided that no supply pipe shall be smaller than the connection to a
fixture and this shall determine the minimum size of supply pipe to fixtures not
listed in Table 7-1.

704.7 Distribution Pipes

Table 7-2 establishes the maximum fixture unit load permitted for a given size of
water distribution pipe and shall be used to determine the minimum sizes of water
distribution pipe provided that:

(a) Individual fixture unit ratings shall be taken from the Table.

(b) Where the incoming central water supply pressure regularly falls below
50 lb. per sq. in. the next large size of pipe shall be used.

(c) Where flush valve operated water closets are installed the minimum size
of the main incoming supply shall be 1-1/2''

(d) No section of distribution pipe shall be smaller than the largest branch
pipe taken from it.

(e) Not more than three fixtures shall be supplied by one 1/2" cold water
pipe.

(7-7)
 Table 7-1

Minimum Size of Water Supply Pipes to Individual Fixtures

Description Size of Pipe Description Size of Pipe

(in) (in)
Bath tub 1/2 Water closet (cistern operated) 3/8
Bidet 1/2 Laundry tub 1/2
Drinking fountain 3/8 Laundry tub 1/2
Flushing sink (cistern operated) 1/2 Slop sink 1/2
Flushing sink (flush valve 1 Urinal (cistern operated) 3/8
operated)

Hose connection (flush valve 1/2 Urinal (flush valve operated) 1

operated)
kitchen sink (domestic) 1/2 Water closet (flush valve operated) 1
Kitchen sink (commercial) 3/4 Water heater 1/2
Washing machine 1/2

Table 7-2

Minimum Size of Water Distribution Pipes

No. of fixture units Size of pipe (in) No. of fixture units Size of pipe (in)
served served
1-10 1/2 76-150 1-1/2

11-25 3/4 151-300 2

26-50 1 301-600 1-1/2

51-75 1-1/4 101-1,200 3

705 PIPELINE SYSTEM

705.1 General

The pipeline system must be designed and constructed to the satisfaction of

the Authority.

(7-8)
 705.2 Excavation of Pipe Trenches

(a) The centre line of the pipe trench should be within the right of
way but not under the road surface. The width of the trench
should be 18 inches minimum and otherwise the minimum
width required to enable the work to be done but not less than
12 inches greater than the diameter of the pipe. The depth of
the trench should be such as to provide the minimum cover
over the crown of the pipe under any carriage way measured
from finished road surface as shown in Table 7-3.

Table No. 7-3

Minimum Depth of Coyer to the Crown of the Pipe

Pipe Diameter Depth of Cover (ft-in)

Up to 6” 2-6
Over 6” and up to 10” 2-9
Over 10” and up to 20” 3-0

(b) The trench should be excavated in straight lines between changes

in direction and be carefully graded so that there is a minimum
number of substantially high points along its length, Air valves are
to be installed at high points in the line subject to prior approval of
the location and size of the air valve in each case. Where the trench
has been excavated too deep, it shall be filled to grade with
thoroughly rammed approved granular material, subject to
paragraph (c) below.

(c) Subject to para. (e) below a 4 inch depth of the bottom of the
trench should be of selected material having no particle larger than
that indicated in Table 7-4 for pipelines of the material as shown in
the Table.

(d) In peaty or boggy ground the bottom of the trench should be

excavated to an approved depth below grade and refilled with
broken stone, and a bedding of chips should be laid over the
broken stone and thoroughly rammed to grade.

(e) In rocky ground the bottom of the trench should be filled to a

depth of 6" with material no larger than that given in Table 7-4.

(7-9)
 Table 7-4

Maximum Particle Size

Pipe material Maximum particle size of selected material (in)

Grey Cast Iron or Ductile Iron 1

Steel or Cooper 3/4

PVC 1/4

705.3 Pipe Laying

a) Pipes must be laid in straight lines between changes in direction. The

entire length of the barrel of the pipe must be supported on the
bottom of the trench. Care must be taken to ensure that the inner
surface of each pipe is left clean after laying. When pipe laying is not
in progress the ends of the pipeline should be plugged to prevent
ingress of foreign matter.

b) Pipes laid under high ground water conditions must be plugged and
backfilled between joints before testing so as to avoid floating of
pipelines. The location of pipes must be marked.

c) Pipes laid under drains, water courses, channels, concrete slabs,

culverts, or other conduits should be laid in a sleeve extending at
least two feet on each side of the conduit, beyond the side wall of the
conduit or toe of embankment supporting the conduit. The sleeve
may be of steel or ductile iron pipe or other material approved by the
Director and be surrounded in concrete if the cover to the pipe is less
than 18 inches or provided with such other protection as maybe
required by the Authority.

705.4 Jointing of the Pipe

The developer must conform to the manufacturers' instructions as regards the

procedure for proper laying and jointing of the particular type of pipe and
joint being used in the development. Other basic requirements for a
satisfactory joint are:

a) Cleanliness of all parts

b) Correct location of components

c) Centralization of spigot and socket sleeve.

(7-10)
 d) True alignment in vertical and horizontal planes.

705.5 Anchoring of Pipes

a) Thrust blocks must be provided at tees, crosses, dead ends and at all bends
(except concave vertical bends). In the case of bends, the blocks should be
located symmetrically with the pipe fitting which should be symmetrical
with the radial centre line. The thrust blocks should be constructed of
2,500 lb. concrete, reinforced if required, and must rest firmly on the solid
ground.

b) The required area of bearing on the solid earth will vary with the type of
soil, and the area of bearing on the pipe fitting must be sufficient to safely
transmit the thrust through the block. Information on the soil bearing and
shear capacity must be submitted with the request for design approval.

c) Pipelines of PVC or other flexible materials must use thrust blocks as

required by the manufacturers' specifications.

705.6 Hydraulic Testing of Pipe Lines and Joints

a) After all work in connection with the laying of the pipeline system has
been completed, the developer shall issue to the Director a certificate of
final inspection and testing. The testing shall be carried out by qualified
engineers or technicians approved by the Authority.

b) The developer shall be responsible for meeting the cost and carrying out
the testing of the pipeline system as required by the Authority and as set
out hereunder.

c) Air vents must be provided at the upper end of the section of pipeline to
be tested and at other locations as required. The line should be slowly
filled, preferably from the lower end. The pressure should be increased to
150 percent of the anticipated working pressure and be sustained for 2
hours.

d) The pipeline and joints will be accepted as having satisfied the test if the
leakage does not exceed 1 gallon per inch of pipe diameter per mile of
pipeline for each 100 feet to test pressure. The measure of leakage is the
volume of water required to be pumped into the pipeline so as to
re-establish the test pressure.

705.7 Disinfection of the Pipe line

a) Newly installed pipe lines must be flushed and the water tested before
being put into use. The developer must provide and fix a valve of the same
diameter as the pipeline in a suitable location for the effective flushing of
the line.

(7-11)
 b) After the pipe line has been flushed it shall then be charged with water to
which has been added chlorine at the rate of 50 parts per million parts of
water. After 24 hours the pipe line will be thoroughly flushed after which
samples will be collected and tested by a reputable laboratory approved
by the Ministry of Health, The testing regime shall be to the approval of
the Ministry of Health.

c) If the laboratory examination shows that the pipe line has not been
adequately disinfected, the disinfection shall be repeated until
satisfactory samples have been obtained.

c) All tests are to be carried out at the expense of the developer and to the
approval of the Ministry of Health.

705.8 Back filling of Trenches

Selected material should be firmly tamped by hand rammers around and to a height
of 12 inches above the top of the pipe. Natural excavated material should then be
ramped by hand rammers to a height of 24 inches over the top of the pipe,
thereafter the remainder of the backfill composed of natural excavated material
may be tamped by mechanical tamper.

705.9 Connection of Accessories

a) Methods for connecting water pipes and fittings of dissimilar materials are
subject to approval by the Authority.

b) The methods of connecting to the pipeline such accessories as service or

communication pipes, hydrants, sluice valves and air valves arc to be
approved by the Authority. Particular attention should be paid to the
material to be used and method to be employed in backfilling the trench or
supporting the accessory.

c) Service or communication pipes of 1/2'', 3/4" and 1'' diameter may be

either of copper equivalent to ANSI B 16.22 1980 or PVC Schedule 40 or
as approved by the Authority. The pipe shall be laid to a minimum depth
of 18" below the surface of the carriage way and terminate on the
pavement (sidewalk), the end of the pipe being securely plugged pending
final connection into the premises to supplied with water. The backfill
material should be thoroughly tamped by hand rammers.

d) In new developments fire hydrants must be provided at locations as

required by the Authority. In areas where fire engines cannot reach the
building, dry mains must be provided. Cisterns should also be made
accessible to fire hoses, if necessary by constructing a special basin
outside of the cistern for receiving a fire hose.

(7-12)
 e) Air valves shall be either single or double orifice type as may be
required. They shall be fitted with a lock test pressure of 400 feet
head of water without leakage.

705.10 Color Code

Where water supply pipelines and sewers are laid in close proximity to
each other a color code or other means of identification must be adopted,
with the approval of the Authority, to ensure that each can be readily
identified.

706 UTILIZATION OF POTABLE GROUND WATER

(a) Fresh ground water utilization shall normally be limited to

government approved developments except where the Authority
considers that a particular case merits special consideration.

(b) No restriction shall be imposed on fresh ground water use in

individual dwelling plots if the method of extraction is limited to
hand pumps or buckets. However the wells must be properly
sealed to the approval of the Environmental Health Department,
to prevent contamination of the well water.

(c) Unless otherwise approved by the Authority, pumping of any

well shall not cause depression of the water level.

(d) A well for potable water supply shall penetrate the fresh water
zone only to a maximum of one third of the depth of the fresh
water lens.

(e) Wells shall be provided with surface aprons to a distance of five

feet around the well, and the well-tops shall project above the
surface apron to a minimum height of two feet, and be equipped
with a sanitary well seal, all to be constructed of approved
materials, to ensure that no direct entry of any surface water can
occur through the well.

(f) Wells shall be located a minimum of the indicated distances away

from sources of pollution, as follows:

(i) Pit latrines, septic tank and sewers: 150 ft

(ii) Cesspools: 150 ft

(7-13)
707 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

a) Where a water pump is provided as part of a private domestic water

supply it shall be sized to maintain a minimum of 20 lbs. pressure
under all conditions of water use. A pressure tank of adequate
capacity shall be installed. It is recommended that the plumbing
within 3 ft. of the water pump be of galvanized steel to prevent
melting of the plastic pipe fittings if the pump should run dry.

b) Paper and charcoal filters placed in the domestic water supply line
will help in reducing color and odor in the water supply. However,
no reliance shall be placed on passive filters to remove disease
organisms from contaminated water.

708 SAFETY DEVICES

a) A pressure relief valve shall be installed for all equipment used

for heating or storing hot water. Hot water shall be run in copper
or CPVC pipe. Regular PVC pipe shall not be used.

b) Water hammer is caused by loosely fixed pipes, bends or taps such

as self-closing or spring type which shut off too quickly. It is more
likely to occur in long branches than when the tap is fixed close to
the supply line. An air vessel or dead-end riser pipe shall be fixed
as close to the pipe as possible in order to absorb the shock and
thus minimize water hammer.

(7-14)
 SECTION 8

SEWAGE AND WASTE DISPOSAL

Contents

801 PROVISION OF SEWERAGE FACILITIES

801.1 General

802 NEEDS OF TOTAL DEVELOPMENT

803 DEVELOPER TO MEET TOTAL COST OF THE WORK

804 JOINT SYSTEMS

805 ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

806 APPROVAL BY THE AUTHORITY

807 PERCOLATION TESTS

808 CONFORMITY WITH BUILDING CODE

809 CONSULTATION PRIOR TO SUBMISSION

810 EMERGENCY POWER FACILITIES

811 EFFLUENT QUALITY

812 DISPOSAL OF TREATED EFFLUENT BY SEA OUTFALLS

813 SEWER SYSTEM

813.1 General
813.2 Separation of Water and Sewer Mains
813.3 Excavation
813.4 Bedding of the Sewer Pipe
813.5 Laying and Jointing of Pipes
813.6 Protection of Sewer Pipe
813.7 Backfilling of Trenches
813.8 House Laterals
813.9 Manholes
813.10 Choice of Systems
813.11 Re-use of the Effluent
813.12 Requirements of the Authority

(8-1)
814 TESTING OF SEWERS

815 TESTING MANHOLES FOR WATERTIGHTNESS

816 SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANTS

816.1 General Requirements

816.2 Approval of Plans

Table 8-1 Approximate Efficiencies of Sewage Systems and Plants

817 SEPTIC TANKS AND SOAKAWAYS

817.1 Use of Septic Tanks

817.2 Design of Septic Tanks
817.3 Location of Septic Tanks
817.4 Construction of Septic Tanks
817.5 Operation
817.6 Maintenance of Septic Tanks
817.7 Soakaways
817.8 Location of Soakaways
817.9 Construction of Soakaways
817.10 Land Drains
817.11 Recommended Length of Land Drains
817.12 Location of Land Drains

(8-2)
 SECTION 8

SEWAGE AND WASTE DISPOSAL

801 PROVISION OF SEWERAGE FACILITIES

801.1 General

a) Every building intended for human habitation, or in which human

beings are to be employed shall be designed to provide for a
sewerage system of drainage to a septic tank or more efficient
treatment facility of a design to be approved by the Authority.

b) The developer must provide a system or systems to fully satisfy the

need for sewage collection, treatment and disposal of effluent and
sludge. The system(s) proposed must direct special attention to the
use of topography, the layout of the development, roadways, and the
location of treatment plants and outfalls. Sewage flows of 80% of
the average daily water consumption rates given in Section 7 should
be provided for.

802 NEEDS OF TOTAL DEVELOPMENT

Where the development is phased, the system proposed for sewage and
waste water disposal must address the needs of the total development to
ensure an orderly solution to those problems.

803 DEVELOPER TO MEET TOTAL COST OF THE WORK

The total cost of the work associated with the development of the sewerage
system shall be payable by the developer.

804 JOINT SYSTEMS

a) Where two or more developments are adjacent or in close proximity

to each other consideration should be given to a joint system in order
that sewage disposal facilities may be integrated without detriment to
any of the developments.

b) In any event the proposed sewage disposal system must not adversely
affect adjoining developments particularly with respect to the
location of treatment facilities and outfalls.

(8-3)
805 ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

(a) All systems shall be located and constructed so that with proper
maintenance the systems will function in a sanitary manner, do not
create sanitary nuisance or health hazards and do not endanger the
safety and water quality of fresh ground water lens or domestic
water supply.

(b) Arrangements for the management and treatment of sewage and

waste water shall take into account the topographical conditions,
environmental factors, the proposed use of the land inside and out
side of the development, and the relative locations of the sea,
surface waters and ground water sources.

(c) The use of effluent for any purpose must be approved by the
Ministry of Health.

806 APPROVAL BY THE AUTHORITY

The proposals and plans for these facilities must be to the satisfaction of the
Authority.

807 PERCOLATION TESTS

a) Percolation tests shall be carried out if required by the Authority

whenever it is planned to use absorption pits or septic tanks with
soakaways or land drains to dispose of the sewage. The approval of
the Authority for the use of such systems will depend on the
percolation rates found. Percolation criteria for soakaways are given
in Table F-3 of Section F of the Building Guidelines:

b) The percolation criteria to be used in determining whether

soakaways can be efficient in a given area must be based on the rate
of absorption of liquid waste and the area of the absorption surface.
In general, soils with absorption rates of less than 1" in 30 minutes
are unsuitable for soakaways.

808 CONFORMITY WITH BUILDING CODE

The arrangement for collection and disposal of sewage and waste water from
buildings must be in accordance with this Code.

(8-4)
809 CONSULTATION PRIOR TO SUBMISSION

Plans for the treatment system proposed be developed in consultation with

the Ministry of Health and the Director prior to formal submission of the
plans for approval.

810 EMERGENCY POWER FACILITIES

Subject to the provision of the Electricity Ordinance in force and unless

specifically exempted by the Authority, all treatment plant and pumping
stations shall be provided with an alternate source of electricity to allow
continuity of operation during power failure.

811 EFFLUENT QUALITY

The quality of the effluent after treatment shall satisfy the following
criteria:

i) BOD not to exceed 45 milligrams per liter based on effluent

samples collected in a period of seven consecutive days.

ii) Suspended solids not exceeding 45 milligrams per liter based on

samples collected in a period of seven consecutive days.

iii) Coliform content not exceeding 400 per 100 milliliters based on
effluent samples collected in a period of seven consecutive days.

iv) Other standard criteria as may required by the Authority and/or

Ministry of Health.

812 DISPOSAL OF TREATED EFFLUENT BY SEA OUTFALLS

a) The type, location, and design of the sea outfalls must be based on a
detailed study of the character of the sea in which the outfall is
placed, the current flows, the present ecology of the area, and the
chemical composition of the effluent.

b) The study shall be carried our at the expense of the developer by

experienced professionals, and the result of the study shall be
forwarded to the Authority. The approval of the Authority is
required for the disposal of effluent by sea outfall.

Note: Sea outfalls are not permitted in some States

(8-5)
813 SEWER SYSTEM

813.1 General

a) The sewer system must be designed and constructed to the

satisfaction of the Authority.

b) The sewer system must be laid in accordance with the conditions

outlined below.

813.2 Separation of Water and Sewer Mains

a) Sewer pipes should not be laid aver water mains. If this is

unavoidable and the sewer pipes must cross over the water pipes, the
sewer pipes should be of ductile iron and encased in a ductile iron
sleeve for at least 20 inches on either side of the points of cross over.
See also 705.3c).

b) Sewer pipes shall not be laid through a water storage tank.

813.3 Excavation

(a) The trench shall be excavated true to line and grade. The width at the
top of the trench will vary with the depth but should not be more than
the minimum required to accommodate shoring when required, and
to provide adequate working space. The width at the bottom of the
trench should not be less than the diameter of the pipe plus 12 inches.

(b) The depth of the trench should be such as lo provide a minimum

cover of 3 ft 6 inches over the socket of the pipe measured from the
finished road surface.

(c) In general, sewers must be sufficiently deep to receive sewage from

all adjacent buildings.

(d) If any portion of the trench has been excavated below grade it must
be refilled with approved granular material well rammed in 6 inch
layers. Adequate bedding must be provided as described in 813.4.

(e) If any portion of the trench is in rocky ground it should be excavated

to a depth of 6 inches below grade and refilled with approved
bedding material as described in 813.4.

(f) If any portion of the bottom of the trench is in peaty or unstable

ground which may not provide adequate support for the pipe, the
trench should be excavated to a sufficient depth below grade and be
refilled with well rammed 6 inch layers of granular material to
provide adequate support for the pipe.

(8-6)
813.4 Bedding of the Sewer Pipe

Subject to the manufacturers' recommendations, sewer pipes constructed of

the following material shall be laid on a bed not less than 4 inches thick
composed of material having no particle size larger than as specified below:

Ductile iron or grey cast iron: 1 inch

PVC 1/4"

813.5 Laying and Jointing of Pipes

a) The pipes shall be laid carefully in conformity with the manufacturers

requirements. The pipes shall be laid true to line and grade. After
each section of the sewer has been laid between successive manhole
locations, it shall be cleared of all foreign matter by passing through
it a scraper or similar instrument, slightly smaller in diameter than the
sewer.

b) In the event of an existing pipeline having been fractured, the

damaged portion shall be cut and replaced by a length of plain ended
pipe and properly jointed.

c) All pipes should be clean, correctly located and laid in true

alignment in horizontal and vertical planes.

813.6 Protection of Sewer Pipe.

a) All sewers shall be protected against damage from vehicular traffic

and from roots of trees. The protection required would depend on
the type of soil in which the sewer is being laid, the location of the
sewer and the material with which the sewer is made. Where
required the developer shall provide plans of such protection for the
approval of the Director.

b) The manufacturers' requirements for special protection should be

observed where there are severe conditions of unstable ground or
excessive depth below the surface.

813.7 Backfilling of Trenches

a) Sewers which have been laid on a bed of concrete or which have been
surrounded with concrete shall not be backfilled until the concrete is
at least 7 days old.

b) The trench shall be backfilled to a height of 12" over the pipe with an
approved granular material well compacted by hand rammer in 6 inch
layers. Thereafter the approved backfill material shall be compacted
by hand rammer to a height of 24 inches over the pipe.

(8-7)
 c) Thereafter the remainder of the backfill of selected excavated material may
be rammed to the surface by mechanical means. In the case of sewers
which have been surrounded by concrete the selected material shall be
rammed in 6 inch layers. To ensure satisfactory consolidation, the backfill
material should be sprinkled with water while being compacted.

813.8 House Laterals

a) The lateral shall be connected to the sewer by means of a 45 degree angle

branch or a 45 degree bend, A special fitting incorporating both the branch
and the bend may be used provided that adequate stocks are available and
can be easily obtained.

b) Where the depth of the sewer is less than 9 feet but greater than 4 feet, the
Director may in his discretion permit the lateral to be laid at a gradient
steeper than 1 in 30.

c) Where the sewer is more than 9 feet deep the lateral shall be connected to
the sewer by a single or double vertical riser and the sewer shall be made
using a 45 degree branch set vertically on the sewer and a 45 degree bend
connecting the riser to the branch.

813.9 Manholes

a) Manholes shall be provided at all horizontal and vertical changes in

direction of the sewer and also on the straight sewer at a maximum interval
of 300 feet. Their internal dimensions shall generally be 3 ft 6 in. by 3 ft.
The materials of construction must be approved by the Authority.

b) Channels and benchings and all interior surfaces in the manhole shall be
smooth and free from obstructions.

c) Manholes greater than 5 feet deep shall be provided with ladders.

d) Each manhole shall be provided with a heavy duty manhole cover frame
and gas tight cover with a clear opening of 8 inches.

e) A drop pipe shall be provided for a sewer entering a manhole where the
invert of the incoming sewer is more than 3 feet above the invert of the
outgoing sewer.

f) To ensure bonding of the pipe to the concrete, all PVC pipes passing
through the walls of the manholes shall be roughened.

(8-8)
813.10 Choice of System

a) The choice of an appropriate sewage system depends on the amount of

sewage to be treated and the economics of the treatment process. The
Authority must approve the choice of the sewage system proposed by the
applicant.

b) It can be seen from Table 8-1 that for large systems and where there are no
special requirements such as disposal of hazardous substances, nuclear
waste and the like, the conventional activated sludge treatment preceded
and followed by plain sedimentation will provide a significant reduction in
B.O.D., suspended solids and B. coli.

c) Intermittent sand filtration will yield slightly better results. About 98 % of

the B. Coli bacteria is removed along with 90 % to 95 % of the suspended
solids.

d) Chlorination of raw sewage does not remove suspended solids but removes
90% to 95% of B. coli bacteria.

e) The use of chemical precipitation (mixing chemicals such as ferric chloride

with the sewage) removes 70 % to 90 % of the suspended solids and 40 %
to 80 % of the B. coli bacteria.

f) Settling tanks required to accommodate the sewage from developments

with flows of more than one million gallons per day (more than 15,000
persons) would have to be about 12,000 cubic feet and about 1,500 square
feet for a retention period of 2 hours and an overflow rate of 800 gallons
per sq.ft. per day. Design information for such systems is available in
manufacturer's manuals.

g) The capacity of sand filters for treating the discharge of septic tanks which
would collect household waste is estimated at 50,000 gallons per acre. For a
population of 20,000 the area of the sand filter would be about 20 - 30 acres
depending on the calculated daily sewage flow.

813.11 Re-use of the Effluent

a) Treatment of the effluent from an activated sludge plant or from an

intermittent sand filter with the appropriate chlorine dosage will reduce the
B.O.D to reasonably acceptable proportions for disposal into tile drains, for
re-use in gardens or water closets or for disposal into a properly designed
sea outfall depending the policy of the Government.

b) The re-use of effluent offers significant advantages where conservation of

water is important. However such effluent must be to reduce both
suspended solids and the B. coli bacteria to an acceptable standard. The
Ministry of Health must approve the plans for re-use of effluent.

(8-9)
 813.12 Requirements of the Authority

a) The Authority would require that plans for the collection and
disposal of sewage show:

i) the size and distribution of the collection system

ii) the location of the final disposal of the effluent and

ii) the area available for siting and constructing treatment

plants.

b) The applicant must show in the plans submitted to the Authority

for approval all details of the design and construction of the plant
including:

■ population to be served

■ type and quantity of waste to be treated

■ sewage treatment flow diagram

■ details of collection system

■ land area required for treatment system

■ construction details of treatment plant

■ quality of effluent to be discharged

■ design of final disposal of the effluent

■ detailed plans for maintenance of the system and for

disposal of sludge.

■ stand-by power

814 TESTING OF SEWERS

a) All sewers shall be tested by the developer before being backfilled

or surrounded with concrete. They shall also be retested after
backfilling.

b) The test shall conform to the following procedure:

i) The sewer shall be tested in length between successive

manholes.

(8-10)
 ii) The pipe shall be slowly filled with water until the water
surface is 4 feet above the invert of the pipe or above
ground water level at the higher end. In the case of asbestos
cement pipe, the water must be allowed to stand in the pipe
for 24 hours, at the end of which time sufficient water shall
be added for it to reach its original level of 4 feet above the
invert or ground level.

iii) The criterion for a successful test shall be that the loss of
water in 30 minutes should not exceed 0.2 gallons per hour
per 100 feet of pipe per inch diameter. Should the result of
the test be unsatisfactory, the developer shall correct the
fault. The test shall then be repeated.

c) Sewage pumping mains shall be tested in the manner described in

705.6.

d) The developer shall be responsible for meeting the cost of carrying

out the testing of the sewer system to the satisfaction of the
Director.

815 TESTING MANHOLES FOR WATERTIGHTNESS

a) All pipes entering and leaving the manholes shall be plugged and the
manhole shall be filled with water to 6 inches to the underside of the
cover slab and shall remain filled for 24 hours. Sufficient water
shall then be added for the surface of the water to regain its original
level.

b) The level shall be observed for a period of 12 hours. The criterion

for a successful test is that the water level should not fall in 12 hours
to a lower level than in the opinion of the Director could be
explained by evaporation.

c) Should the test result be unsatisfactory the developer shall correct

the defects and the manhole shall be retested until a satisfactory test
result has been obtained.

d) The developer shall be responsible for meeting the cost of and for
carrying out the testing of the manholes to the satisfaction of the
Director.

816 SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANTS

816.1 General Requirements

a) Complete data on the proposed treatment system must accompany

all applications including:

(8-11)
 (i) Engineer's Report

(ii) Prints of drawings

(iii) Specifications of equipment

(iv) Data sheet giving full details of design loading ie:

(v) Maintenance schedule.

(vi) Method of disposal of effluent

b) Facilities should be provided for the removal of grit and debris prior to the
influent entering a pumping station or treatment plant. All pumps should be
equipped with strainers capable of removing solids greater than provided for
in the design of downstream processes.

c) The plant as designed must be capable of treating sewage to produce an

effluent to the standards shown in 811.

d) Sewage may be discharged into a septic tank linked with a biological filter or
with land drains or soakaway pit provided that:

i) If the system is connected to a proprietary tank or disposal system

discharging an effluent approved by the Ministry of Health such
effluent may be discharged directly from such tank or system and
recycled for use as approved by the Ministry of Health.

ii) If the system is connected to a septic tank the effluent must be

discharged into land drains or soakaway pits constructed in
accordance with this Code and approved by the Ministry of health.

e) Construction of cess pits may not be approved by the Ministry of Health.

816.2 Approval of Plans

Detailed plans and technical data as required as at 816.1 a) will be reviewed by the
Director and by the Authority in consultation with the Ministry of health. Approval
of the Authority for the installation of the sewage treatment system will be given
only if all of the technical data supplied by the owner is satisfactory, and if
satisfactory arrangements have been made for the maintenance and repair of the
system. The Authority shall require that stand-by systems for major components
such as power plant be supplied and maintained.

(8-12)
 Table 8-1

Approximate Efficiencies of Sewage Systems and Plants*

Treatment, operation or process Percent removal

B.O.D Suspended solids B. coli,
(Coliform)
Fine screening 5-10 2-20 10-20

Chlorination of raw or settled sewage 15-30 - 90-95

Plain sedimentation 25-40 40-70 25-75

High rate trickling filtration preceded and
followed by plain sedimentation 65-95 65-92 80-85
Low-rate tricking sedimentation preceded and
followed by plain sedimentation 80-95 70-92 90-95
Conventional activated sludge treatment
preceded and followed by plain sedimentation 75-95 85-95 90-98

Intermittent sand filtration 90-95 85-95 95-98

Chlorination of biologically treated sewage - - 98-99

*From Date Book for Civil Engineers, Third Edition – Elwyn E. Seelye

817 SEPTIC TANKS AND SOAKAWAYS

817.1 Use of Septic tanks

a) Septic tanks are used to provide primary treatment to sewage

from buildings with sewage flows of no greater than about
10,000 gallons per day. The design and construction of septic
tanks are discussed in 817.2, 817.3 and 817.4.

b) Sewage may be discharged into a septic tank linked with a

biological filter or with land drains or soakaway pit provided
that:

i) If the system is designed to serve less than 20 persons

the sewage may be discharged directly into an
absorption pit so long as the absorption area is designed
and constructed as per 817.7, 817.8 and 817.9, or the
land drains constructed as at 817.10 and 817.11.

ii) If the system is connected to a proprietary tank or

disposal system discharging an effluent approved by the
Authority such effluent may be discharged directly
from such tank or system as may be approved by the
Director.

(8-13)
 iii) The system of disposal of the effluent from the tank is approved by
the Ministry of Health.

817.2 Design of Septic Tanks

a) The basic function of a plain settling or septic tank is to received domestic

sewage, partially treat it, segregate the solids, and discharge the liquid to a
tile field or soakaway.

b) In order to provide for maximum solids removal, adequate tank capacity is

necessary. The appropriate volume of the tank is a function of the amount
of liquid being discharged into the tank and the volume may be calculated
as follows:

i) For flows up to 500 gallons per day, the net volume to be at least
750 gallons.

ii) For flows of 500 gallons to 1500 gallons per day, tank volume to be
at least 1-1/2 days sewage flow.

iii) For flows larger than 1500 gallons per day, the minimum tank
liquid volume should equal the following:

V = 1125 + .75Q, where V is the net volume of the tank in gallons,

and Q the daily flow of sewage in gallons.

iv) For flows above 15,000 gallons per day a septic tank would not be
suitable, and the owner must examine another system such as an
Imhoff tank or proprietary aerobic treatment plant as per 816.

c) The design, construction, maintenance and operation of septic tanks must be

carried out in accordance with the guidelines of the Central Board of Health
(Ministry of Health).

817.3 Location of Septic tanks

a) Tanks shall be located where the largest possible area is available for the
disposal of effluent either by soakaways or by leaching fields (land
drains).

b) The Following guidelines must be taken into account in the location of the
septic tank:

i) The tank must be downstream of any water cistern

ii) at least 5 ft. away from any building

(8-14)
 iii) at least 8 ft. away from any property line/boundary

iv) at least 10 ft. away from any large trees

v) at least 25 ft. away from any stream, and

vi) at least 150 ft. away from any drinking water well.

817.4 Construction of Septic Tanks

a) Tanks shall preferably be of two (rather than one) water tight chambers to
achieve better clarity of effluent.

b) Tanks shall preferably be constructed of reinforced concrete block work

rendered on the inside and base, or of 2500 psi reinforced concrete. The
cover of the tank should be of reinforced concrete and capable of
withstanding loads of 100 lbs per square foot. There must be removable
manhole covers over inlets and outlets.

c) Inlets and outlets with sanitary T branches shall be so located as to avoid

disturbance of the surface scum. An air space of 12 inches should be
provided.

d) The septic tank should be rectangular with the length at least three times the
width. The inlet compartment of the tank should have about 75% of the
total capacity of the total tank capacity. The minimum depth of the tank
should be 4 feet.

e) Septic tanks shall not be undersized or be constructed in series as the

velocity of flow through two identical tanks is the same as the velocity
through one of them. This type of arrangement virtually doubles the
velocity and results in the carry over of 70 % of the suspended material.
The heavier solids settle to the bottom forming a blanket of sludge and the
lighter material rises to the surface to form a layer of scum.

817.5 Soakaways

a) Soakaways shall be used where sub-surface conditions allow. They shall

never be used where there is a likelihood of contaminating underground
water supplies and fresh water lenses. The developer may find that land
drains or leaching fields (817.10) are suitable in some soil conditions in the
State.

b) It is important that a test be carried out at each building site as soil types
vary widely and the size of the pit depends on the type of soil and the
volume of effluent to be absorbed. The test must be carried out to the
specifications of the Ministry of Health and the results used to design the
size and type of soakaway to be constructed.

(8-15)
 c) The area required for absorption in a pit shall be based on the effective
vertical wall area of the pit. No allowance shall be made for the pit bottom
or the area above the inlet.

817.6 Location of Soakaways

a) No soakaway shall be within:

■ 10 feet of a site boundary,

■ 15 feet from a building,

■ 100 feet from a stream used for water supply

■ 150 feet from a well.

Where two soakaways are to be constructed they shall be located not less
than three times the largest of the surface dimensions apart.

b) The sub-surface disposal system must be located downstream of any water

cistern, and the area selected for construction of a soakaway pit shall be
large enough to allow for additional pits in the event of a failure.

c) The location of size, and construction of soakaways must be to the approval

of the Director in consultation with the Ministry of Health.

817.7 Construction of Soakaways

The soakaway pit is to be lined with stones, or concrete blocks laid up dry with open
joints backed with at least 3" with coarse gravel to a depth of at least 1 foot. The
cover shall be made of reinforced concrete and be capable of withstanding loads of
100 lb. per sq.ft.

817.8 Land Drains

Where land drains are used, the drains which are constructed of pipes with open
joints or holes linked to septic tanks, shall be laid in open areas not surfaced with
impervious materials in accordance with the following requirements:

a) Pipe trenches shall be a minimum width of 1' 6 ", a minimum depth of 3'
0" and a maximum length of 100' 0"

b) No pipe runs shall be located within 5' 0" of one another or of a building or
a site boundary.

c) No pipe runs shall be located within 50’ 0” lf any well or stream or open
water source.

(8-16)
 d) Pipes shall be a maximum length of 2' 0" or alternatively shall have
perforations or holes equal to not less than 20 percent of their surface area.

e) Pipes shall be laid on a minimum 6" bed of gravel at a gradient not

shallower than 1:96.

f) Pipes shall be laid with l/4" open joints and the joints shall be covered with
strips of asphalt bonded building paper not less than 4" wide.

g) Trenches shall be backfilled with gravel to a minimum of 3" over the coyer
of the pipes.

817.9 Recommended Length of Land Drains

a) Where permeability tests on the pipe trenches give a water drop of not less
than 4" an hour over a period of 24 hours, 1' 0" run of pipes shall be
allowed for each 8 gallons of septic tank capacity.

b) Where permeability tests on the pipe trenches give a water drop of 2" to 4"
an hour over a period of 24 hours, l' 0" run of pipe shall be allowed for each
4 gallons of septic tank capacity.

817.10 Location of Land Drains

The location of the system should be as per 817.6.

(8-17)
 SECTION 9

PLUMBING

Contents

901 SCOPE

902 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

902.1 Prohibited Fittings and Connections

902.2 Dead Ends
902.3 Changes in Directions
902.4 Supports and Hangers

903 SOIL AND WASTE PIPES

903.1 General
903.2 Pipe Materials
903.3 Pipe Sizes
903.4 Fixture Unit Ratings
903.5 Workman ship
903.6 Gradients and Self Cleaning Velocities
903.7 Joints and Connections

904 PLUMBING FIXTURES

904.1 General
904.2 Water Closets
904.3 Flushing Cisterns
904.4 Lavatory Basins/Sinks
904.5 Shower Baths
904.6 Drinking Fountains
904.7 Traps
904.8 Water Seals
904.9 Clean-outs
904.10 Venting Systems
904.11 Floor Drains
904.12 Number of Sanitary Fixtures Required

(9-1)
905 PIPES UNDER FLOORS AND WALLS

Table 9-1 Capacity of Pipes in Fixture Units

Table 9-2 Fixture Unit Ratings
Table 9-3 Minimum Sizes of Traps
Table 9-4 Number of Sanitary Facilities Required for Employees
Table 9-5 Minimum Requirements for Sanitary Facilities for General Use

(9-2)
 SECTION 9

PLUMBING

901 SCOPE

This section sets out the requirements for plumbing and drainage in
buildings and the disposal of waste to a septic tank or main sewer where this
exists.

902 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

902.1 Prohibited fittings and connections

a) No soil or waste pipe shall be fitted with double hubs, double tees or
double y's (without an access door).

b) No waste pipe shall discharge into a bend attached to a water closet

bowl.

902.2 Dead Ends

a) Wherever a dead end exists or is proposed for a soil or waste system

it shall be laid so as to prevent any accumulation of waste.

b) All unconnected openings in a drainage system with the exception or

a vent pipe shall be properly capped so as to be both air and water
tight.

902.3 Changes in Direction

a) All horizontal changes in direction of soil or waste pipes shall be

provided with an accessible inspection chamber or clean out.

b) 22-1/2 degree bends and sanitary tees should be used for changes in
direction of flow in the horizontal plane.

c) Bends tees, y’s and crosses may be used to effect changes in

direction in vent and water distribution pipes.

902.4 Supports and Hangers

a) All vertical piping shall be supported, anchored and adequately fixed

with spacing not exceeding 5 feet.

(9-3)
 b) All horizontal piping shall be supported anchored and adequately
fixed to prevent sagging at each hub. For cast iron and copper piping,
this shall be at 6 foot intervals, and for PVC and pitch fiber piping
through-out its length.

c) Pipe hangers shall be fixed to stone, brick work block work or

concrete by means of expansion type plugs.

d) Hangers shall be of the same material as the pipe, or if of different

material be insulated at areas of contact with the pipe to prevent
electrolysis.

e) Drains laid in unstable ground shall be adequately supported so as

prevent fracture of the pipe or loosening of the joints in the event of
ground movement.

903 SOIL AND WASTE PIPES

903.1 General

Soil and waste pipes shall be located and fixed in accordance with the
following requirements:

(a) Branch pipes shall be located to provide for drainage of sanitary

fixtures into vertical stacks or directly into manholes.

(b) Vertical stacks shall be located to provide for drainage from branch
pipes directly to manholes.

(c) Connections to pipes shall be located to prevent cross flow from one
connection to the other.

(d) Connections to pipes and between pipes shall be made in direction of

the flow.

(f ) Open ends shall terminate not less than one foot above the building
eaves level nor less than three feet above the head of any window ten
feet away or less and shall be protected with a wire balloon of
durable material.

(g) Pipes shall be fixed with suitable brackets or straps and at a

minimum distance of 6 inches from the wall surface. At least one
fixing shall be provided for each unit length of pipe.

(h) Sufficient cleaning eyes and access points shall be provided to

enable all pipe work to be cleaned by rodding. They shall be located
to allow proper clearance for the easy entry of cleaning roads and be
provided with suitable tight covers.

(9-4)
 903.2 Pipe Materials

a) Generally these shall be of suitable material, hard, smooth,

impervious and non-corrosive, such as copper, PVC, cast iron or
other material which may be approved by the Authority if there is
evidence that the material is suitable.

b) Black iron galvanized iron or concrete pipes are not recommended

for use as soil pipes.

903.3 Pipe Sizes

a) The diameter of pipes shall be consistent with the maximum load,

but soil pipes shall not be less than 3 inches in diameter.

b) Waste water pipes shall not be less than 1-1/4 inches in diameter.

c) Table 9-1 establishes the maximum fixture unit load permitted for a
given size of waste pipe under various conditions and shall be used
to determine the required size of waste or soil pipe provided that:

(1) The total unit load on the pipe is calculated from Table 9-2.

(2) Not more than one WC shall be connected to any one 3" diameter
soil pipe.

(3) No branch pipe shall be smaller than the size of the fixture trap that
it serves.

(4) No vertical stack shall be smaller than the largest branch pipe that it
serves.

(5) The gradient of a branch pipe shall be not less than 1 in 48.

(6) Not more than 4 WCs shall be connected to a branch pipe of

diameter less than 4 inches with a gradient less than 1 in 12.

(7) Not more than 4 WCs shall be connected to any 3" diameter branch
pipe or vertical stack.

(8) Not more than 50% of the maximum discharge unit load permitted
for vertical stacks serving more than 2 stories shall be discharged
into the stack from any one branch pipe or in any one storey height.

903.4 Fixture Unit Ratings

.
Table 9-2 establishes the relative road value of various fixture units and shall be
used in determining the required size of pipes for the fixtures being served.

(9-5)
903.5 Workmanship

a) All plumbing shall be installed in a workmanlike manner.

b) After laying soil and ventilating pipes shall be capable of withstanding

smoke or air tests under pressure, have no bends, except where
unavoidable, in which case bends shall be as obtuse as possible so as not to
reduce the internal diameter of the pipe.

c) Soil waste pipes shall not discharge effluent so as to cause dampness to any
foundation or wall of a building.

903.6 Gradients and Self Cleaning Velocities

a) Soil pipes shall be laid at a minimum gradient of 1:48 for 4 inch pipes and
1:60 for 6 inch pipes.

b) Waste pipes shall be laid at a minimum gradient of 1:30.

c) Self cleaning velocities would be achieved if velocities are approx. 2.5 feet
per second with the pipe flowing 1/4 full.

903.7 Joints and Connections

a) All joints and connections shall be of the same material as the main pipe and
shall be air and water tight, They shall be constructed so as to allow the free
flow of waste, and before commissioning be swabbed and cleaned inside to
avoid obstructions of the bore.

b) In joining soil pipes the spigot or plain end of the pipe shall be laid in the
direction of the flow or downstream.

c) Joints to soil pipes shah be as follows:

i) for lead - wiped or burned.

ii) for cast iron - socket made with hemp or yarn and metallic lead
properly caulked.

iii) for pitch fiber - tapered couplings.

iv) for PVC - with a suitable rubber joint fitting or welded with solvent
cement.

v) for vitrified clay/salt glazed ware - socket made with tarred hemp or
gasket and the remaining space fined with cement / sand mixture.

d) No coating or Paint shall be applied before testing.

e) Where waste pipes are connected to soil pipes, all pipes are to be constructed
in the same way as specified for soil pipes.

(9-6)
904 PLUMBING FIXTURES

904.1 General

Generally these shall be of smooth, hard durable impervious and corrosion

resistant materials free from flaws and blemishes.

904.2 Water Closets

a) Water closet bowls shall be of vitreous china, vitreous glazed

earthenware or other suitable material.

b) Water closet bowls shall be attached to the floor and/or wall and be
fitted with a seat of smooth non-absorbent material.

c) The use of a separate well flushing system will reduce the use of fresh
water from the cistern. All components of the salt water system shall
be plastic or other suitable material non-corrosive.

904.3 Flushing Cisterns

Water closet systems shall have flush valves which are easily accessible for
repairs, and flush pipes of not less than 1-1/4 inches in diameter. When low
level cisterns are used larger flush pipes are necessary.

904.4 Lavatory Basin/Sinks

a) The top edge of every lavatory basin or sink shall be fixed at a height
above finished floor level suitable for the persons using the fixtures.

b) Fixtures for special use, such as for handicaps and for children shall be
mounted at the appropriate height for the particular application.

c) Every lavatory basin shall be provided with an overflow, connected to

the building or inlet side of the trap.

904.5 Shower Baths

Shower and tub outlets must be not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter and be
fitted with removable strainers. Shower outlets arc normally 2". The use of
“water saver” shower heads is encouraged.

904.6 Drinking Fountains

Drinking fountains shall have orifices located above the highest overflow
level of the receptacle and be shielded so that the drinker cannot put his/her
lips on the orifice.

904.7 Traps

a) Traps forming an integral part of plumbing fixtures shall be supplied

with the fittings to which they are to be attached.

(9-7)
 b) All fixtures connected to foul drainage shall be trapped as closely as possible
to the fixture outlet.

c) No trap with partitions shall be used, and crown venting off the upper curve
of an "S '' trap is not permitted as this results in accumulations in the vent.

904.8 Water Seals

All traps shall have a minimum water seal of 3 inches for soil and 2 inches for waste
and be not less than 3 inches diameter for soil fixtures and 1-1/4 inches for Waste
water.

904.9 Clean-outs

Every clean-out shall be equal in wall thickness to that of the pipe, be readily
accessible, shall open opposite to the direction of flow or at right angles to it, and
shall provide adequate space for cleaning.

904.10 Venting Systems

a) All water closets shall have a vent pipe of not less than 1-1/2 inches in
diameter. Vent pipes shall also be used when two or more waste fittings are
connected to a soil or waste pipe.

b) Vent pipes shall be installed in accordance with 903.1(f) or extend to a

greater distance as may be prescribed by the Director for unusual situations
such as roof gardens. Vent pipes shall be connected above the flood level
rim of the highest fixture served and graded to drip back to the soil or waste
pipe.

c) Venting systems shall be in accordance with the National Plumbing Code

approved by the American Standards Association ASA A 40-8-1955 or any
other Code approved by the Authority.

d) Flashings at vent terminals shall be water tight. Vents shall preferably be

fitted with a wire cage so as to permit free passage of air.

e) Drains shall be ventilated to prevent the accumulation of foul air and to

maintain equal pressure inside and outside the system.

904.11 Floor Drains

Floor drains connected to sanitary sewers shall be equipped with, extra deep traps to
prevent the seal from drying out. Drains in seldom used areas shall be equipped with
an automatic filling device to keep the trap filled with water.

904.12 Number of Sanitary Fixtures Required

Tables 9-4 and 9-5, shall determine the minimum number of sanitary fittings
required in a building provided that:

(9-8)
a) Where separate facilities are required for employees and public use the
total number of persons to be provided for shall be proportioned on the
most realistic basis possible.

b) The number of public facilities to be provided by drive in cinemas,

drive-in restaurants or similar establishments shall be based on 3 persons
for each parking bay.

c) For any residence or apartment the minimum provision shall be 1 water

closet (WC), 1 lavatory basin and 1 bath or shower and 1 sink or tub.

d) For any building providing sleeping accommodation the minimum

provision shall be l WC, 1 lavatory basin and 1 bath or shower for each
10 beds or each 10 persons accommodated.

e) For any building where the use or occupancy involves the employment of
staff, facilities shall be provided for employees in accordance with Table
9-4 except that where the total number of employees is less than 10 the
minimum provision shall be for 1 WC and 1 LB. serving both sexes
where facilities are accessible only through private offices and shall be
additional to the required minimum provision.

f) Where facilities for the public are required they shall be additional to and
separate from facilities required for employees, and shall be provided and
maintained in clean condition in accordance with Table 9-5 for:

(i) Any place of public assembly as defined in Section 2 of this Code.

(ii) Any building or part of a building where the major use or occupancy
is the regular provision of food or drink for consumption by the
public on the premises or on drive - in service system.

(iii) Any shop, store or market with more than 5,000 sq.ft of sales area.

(iv) Any building providing more than 500 sq.ft of public waiting space.

(v) Gas stations with 4 or more service pumps.

g) In any building of Group A,B,D,E,(b) and E(c) (Table 3-1) of more than
5,000 sq.ft. in total area, at least one cleaner’s sink shall be provided for
each floor of more than 2,500 sq.ft in area.

h) For buildings of Group B such additional facilities shall be provided as

may be required by the Ministry of Health.

i) For buildings of group C such additional facilities shall be provided as

may be required by the Ministry of Health.

j) For schools, colleges or other educational buildings such additional

facilities shall be provided as may be required by the Ministry of Health.

(9-9)
 k) Except for private residences a minimum of one facility for male and one for
female must be provided for handicapped persons.

905 PIPES UNDER FLOORS AND WALLS

a) No part of a drain shall be laid under a building unless approved by the

Authority.

b) Where a drain is laid under a floor, not being a suspended floor, it shall be
laid in a straight line for its entire length beneath the building. But in no case
shall the drain under the building be longer than 40 ft.

c) Where drains are laid on piers, care must be taken to ensure that the piers are
on sound foundation and be spaced not more than eight feet apart.

d) Rodding and flushing eyes shall be easily accessible, shall open opposite to
the direction of flow, and adequate space for rodding and flushing shall be
provided.

(9-10)
 Table 9-1

Capacity of Pipes in Fixture Units

Size of pipe (diameter Each horizontal Each vertical stack Each vertical stack
in inches) branch (capacity) serving 2 stories in serving more than 2
height stories in height
1-1/4 1 2 -
1-1/2 4 4 -
2 8 10 20
2-1/2 12 20 40
3 24 30 60
4 200 240 500
5 400 540 1,100
6 800 960 1,900

Table 9-2

Fixture Unit Ratings

Description of Fixture Unit Rating Description of Fixture Unit Rating

Bathtub (with or without shower) 2 Lavatory basin (over 1-1/4” trap) 2

Bidet 2 Showers (per shower head) 2

Drinking fountain 1 Urinal (flush valve operated) 6

Flushing sink (cistern operated) 3 Water closet (cistern operated) 4

Water closet (flush valve
Floor Drain 3 operated) 6

Kitchen sink (up to 1-1/2” trap) 1-1/2 Washing machine (domestic) 4

Continuous flow fixture for each
Kitchen sink (commercial) 2 gal. per min. 2

Laundry tub 2 Unspecified to 2” trap or drain 3

Lavatory basin (up to 1-1/4” trap) 1 Unspecified to 3” drain or tap 5

(9-11)
 Table 9-3

Minimum Sizes of Traps (inches)

Bathtub 1-1/2 Shower (with accessible trap) 1-1/2

Bidet 1-1/2 Shower (with concealed trap) 2

Drinking fountain 1-1/4 Shower stall (2 to 4 heads) 2-1/2

Flushing sink 3 Shower stall 5 to 12 heads 3

Floor drain 3 Shower stall (over 12 heads) 4

Kitchen sink 1-1/2 Urinal 2

Kitchen sink (commercial) 2 Water closet (siphonic action) 3

Laundry tub 1-1/2 Water closet (wash down bowl) 3-1/2

Lavatory basin (domestic) 1-1/2 Washing machine 1-1/2

Lavatory basin (commercial) 1-1/2

Table 9-4

Number of Sanitary Fixture Required for Employees

A. Male Employees
Number of employees WCs Urinals Lavatory basins Showers

1-10 1 - 1 -
11-30 1 1 2 -
31-45 2 1 3 1
46-90 2 2 4 1
91-120 3 3 6 1
121-150 4 3 7 2
Plus: 1 urinal for each additional 1 to 60 males
Plus: 1 WC for each additional 1 to 60 males
Plus: 1 lavatory basin for each additional 1 to 60 males

(9-12)
 Table 9-4 (Cont’d)

Number of Sanitary Fixtures Required for Employees

B. Female Employees
Number of employees Showers WCs Lavatory basins

1-10 1 1 1
11-30 1 2 2
31-45 2 3 3
46-90 2 4 4
91-120 2 6 6
121-150 2 7 7
Plus: 1 WC for each additional 1 to 30 females
Plus: 1 lavatory basin for each additional 1 to 60 females

Table 9-5

Minimum Requirements for Sanitary Facilities

A. General use or occupancy (males)

Number WCs Urinals Lavatory basins

1-30 1 1 1
31-120 1 2 1
121-240 3 3 2
241-360 4 3 3
361-480 4 4 4
Plus: 1 urinal for each additional 1 to 200 males
Plus: 1 WC for each additional 1 to 200 males
Plus: 1 Lavatory basin for each additional 1 to 300 males

(9-13)
 Table 9-5 (Cont’d)

Minimum Requirements for Sanitary Facilities

B. General use or occupancy (females)

Number WCs Lavatory basins
1-15 1 1
16-30 2 2
31-120 4 3
121-240 5 3
241-360 6 3
Plus: 1 WC for each additional 1 to 100 females
Plus: 1 lavatory basin for each additional 1 to 200 females

C. Service of food or drink (males)

Number WCs Urinals Lavatory basins

1-30 1 - 1
31-60 1 1 2
61-90 2 2 2
91-120 3 3 3
121-180 3 3 3
Plus: 1 Urinal for each additional 1 to 240 persons
Plus: 1 WC for each additional 121 to 240 persons
Plus: 1 Lavatory basin for each additional 1 to 240 persons

(9-14)
 Table 9-5 (Cont’d)

Minimum Requirements for Sanitary Facilities

D. Service of food or drink (females)

Number WCs Lavatory basins
1-15 1 1
16-30 2 1
31-60 2 2
61-90 3 2
91-120 4 3
121-180 5 3
Plus: 1 WC for each additional 1 to 120 females
Plus: 1 Lavatory basin for each additional 1 to 240 persons

E. Shops, Stores, Markets (males)

Area of sales space in square feet Number of fixture
1 WC
1,000-10,000 1 Lavatory basin
1 WC
1 Urinal
10,000-15,000 1 Lavatory basin
2 WCs
1 Urinal
15,000-20,000 1 Lavatory basin
2 WCs
2 Urinal
Over 20,000 2 Lavatory basins

(9-15)
 Table 9-5 (Cont’d)

Minimum Requirements for Sanitary Facilities

F. Shops, Stores, markets (females)

Area of sales space in square feet Number of fixtures
1,000-10,000 1 WC
1 Lavatory basin
10,000-15,000 2 WCs
1 Lavatory basin
15,000-20,000 3 WCs
2 Lavatory basins
Over 20,000 4 WCs
2 Lavatory basins

G. Gas Stations (males)

Equipment Fixtures
2 or more pumps 1 WC
1 Lavatory basin

H. Gas Station (females)

Equipment Fixtures
2 or more pumps 1 WC
1 Lavatory basin

(9-16)
 SECTION 10

SOLID WASTE DISPOSAL

Contents

1001 SCOPE

1002 GENERAL

1003 COLLECTION SYSTEM

1004 STORAGE

1005 DISPOSAL

1006 HAZARDOUS WASTE

1007 GRANTING THE PERMIT

(10-1)
 SECTION 10

SOLID WASTE DISPOSAL

1001 SCOPE

This Section provides general guidelines to developers and builders on the

disposal of solid waste (garbage and constructor's waste material) from
building sites and from new developments. This Section is not intended to
replace existing Regulations for the handling and disposal of waste.

1002 GENERAL

a) The developer shall submit proposals for the provision of solid

waste collection and disposal. Such proposals shall conform to the
environmental health standards established by the Ministry of
Health and those of the community.

b) Every building in which garbage or trash is produced or from

which solid, liquid, Dr gaseous waste is issued which in the
opinion of the Authority, may be detrimental to the environment of
the neighborhood shall provide a system of disposal satisfactory to
the Authority.

1003 COLLECTION SYSTEM

The developer is responsible for providing an adequate system for the

collection, transportation and disposal of garbage and other solid wastes
from the development. In areas where there are public collection systems
the developer should make proper arrangements with the relevant agency
for the collection and disposal of solid waste.

1004 STORAGE

Adequate facilities must be established to the satisfaction of the Authority

for the storage of garbage an site prior to collection. Refrigerated storage
should be provided where there are large quantities of semi-liquid waste.
The facility for garbage storage must be shown on the plans which
accompany the application for development permission.

The storage of all waste, including refrigerated waste must be carried out to
the approval of the Ministry of Health.

1005 DISPOSAL

a) Garbage and solid wastes must be disposed of at locations

specified or approved by the Ministry of Health.

(10-2)
 b) Waste should be disposed of at a properly established waste disposal
facility and not by ordinary dumping.

c) Disposal shall be carefully carried out and in a manner which

avoids creation of a nuisance through breeding of files and vermin.
The dump should not present an unsightly appearance.

1006 HAZARDOUS WASTE

a) The handling of hazardous waste must be carried out ibn an

environmentally sound manner to the approval of the Authority.

b) Special attention must be paid to the transport and disposal of

hazardous waste. In the application for development per mission,
the developer should provide details of the equipment that will be
used in the collection of hazardous waste and the manner in which
such waste will be collected, stored, transported and disposed of.

1007 GRANTING THE PERMIT

No permit for construction of the development will be issued unless the

plans show adequate arrangements far the storage of all waste, and unless
the developer undertakes to make arrangements satisfactory to the
Authority for the disposal of waste at sites approved by the Ministry of
Health.

(10-3)
 SECTION 11

ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS

Contents

1101 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

1102 AIRCONDITIONING

1102.1 Installation
1102.2 Design Requirements

1103 ELEVATORS AND ESCALATORS

1103.1 General Requirement

1103.2 Design and Construction Requirements
1103.3 Load Capacity of Elevators
1103.4 Width of Escalators
1103.5 Balustrades
1103.6 Speed of Escalators

1104 DUCTS

1104.1 Basis of Requirement

1104.2 Service Ducts
1104.3 Air Ducts

1105 ARTIFICIAL LIGHTING

1106 LIGHTNING PROTECTION

1107 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

(11-1)
 SECTION 11

ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS

1101 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

a) All electrical installations must be carried out in accordance with the

electricity regulations in force and in accordance with good practice as
required by the I.E.E. Wiring Regulations for Electrical Installations 1987.

b) All electrical installations must be certified by the electrical inspector in

accordance with the relevant regulations in force.

1102 AIRCONDITIONING

1102.1 Installation

Air Conditioning and other mechanical ventilating systems shall be done in

accordance with the manufacturers' instructions and in accordance with recognized
practice. The standard of installation must be equal to that approved by the
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE) or other Code approved by the Board.

1102.2 Design requirements

a) At least 2 complete air changes per hour shall be induced for any normally
occupied room or enclosed space.

b) At least 3 complete air changes per hour shall be induced for any internal
lavatory or bathroom and at least 12 complete air changes per hour for any
kitchen, and in both cases the ventilating systems shall be separate and
distinct from any other ventilating system installed in the building.

c) Extract systems shall be capable of handling at least 75 percent of the total

fresh air supply per hour.

d) All equipment shall be installed in such a way that it is readily accessible for
inspection and repair, and all refrigerant condensers anchor receivers
installed in association with systems containing more than 10 lb. of
refrigerant shall be supplied with relief valves of adequate size ventilating to
open air at a suitable protected point.

(11-2)
 SECTION 11

ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS

1101 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

a) All electrical installations must be carried out in accordance with the

electricity regulations in force and in accordance with the codes of
practice of the British Standards Institution.

b) All electrical installations must be certified by the electrical inspector in

accordance with the relevant regulations in force.

1102 AIRCONDITIONING

1102.1 Installation

Air Conditioning and other mechanical ventilating systems shall be done in

accordance with the manufacturers' instructions and in accordance with
recognized practice. The standard of installation must be equal to that approved
by the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
Engineers (ASHRAE) or other Code approved by the Board.

1102.2 Design requirements

a) At least 2 complete air changes per hour shall be induced for any normally
occupied room or enclosed space.

b) At least 3 complete air changes per hour shall be induced for any internal
lavatory or bathroom and at least 12 complete air changes per hour for any
kitchen, and in both cases the ventilating systems shall be separate and
distinct from any other ventilating system installed in the building.

c) Extract systems shall be capable of handling at least 75 percent of the total

fresh air supply per hour.

d) All equipment shall be installed in such a way that it is readily accessible

for inspection, and repair, and all refrigerant condensers and/or receivers
installed in association with systems containing more than 10 lb. of
refrigerant shall be supplied with relief valves of adequate size ventilating
to open air at a suitable protected point.

(11-2)
1103 ELEVATORS AND ESCALATORS

1103.1 General Requirement

All electric lifts, elevators and escalators shall be of proprietary manufacture.

The installation shall be carried out by an approved specialist contractor and
the construction, installation and maintenance shall be in accordance with
recognized standards of good practice and shall conform with the " Standard
Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving Sidewalks -
ANSI A 17.1", except as may otherwise be approved by the Director.

1103.2 Design and Construction Requirements

a) Lift well enclosures, pits and machine rooms shall form part of the
building construction and shall provide for the clearance and other
requirements shown on the manufacturer’s drawings.

b) No lift well shall form part of a ventilating system or accommodate

any services other than those ancillary to the installation and operation
of the lift.

c) Lift well enclosures shall extend from structural floor to structural

ceiling and shall be constructed in accordance with the fire resistance
rating requirements of Section 3 of this Code.

d) A smoke escape vent shall be provided within one foot of the highest
point of each lift well enclosure leading directly to open air.

e) Where a machine room is located on the roof of a building more open

60' 0” high, provision shall be made for lightning protection.

f) The maximum angle of inclination of the escalator with the horizontal

shall be 30 degrees and emergency stop buttons shall be located at the
top and bottom landings of each escalator flight.

1103.3 Load Capacity of Elevators

The safe load capacity of elevators shall be clearly identified on a plate

installed within the elevator cab.

1103.4 Width or Escalators

Escalators shall not be less than 2’ 0” in clear width and shall have horizontal
treads.

(11-3)
1103 ELEVATORS AND ESCALATORS

1103.1 General Requirement

All electric lifts, elevators and escalators shall be of proprietary manufacture.

The installation shall be carried out by an approved specialist contractor and
the construction, installation and maintenance shall be in accordance with
recognized standards of good practice and shall conform with the "Standard
Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving Sidewalks -
ANSI A 17.1 ", except as may otherwise be approved by the Director.

1103.2 Design and Construction Requirements

a) Lift well enclosures, pits and machine rooms shall form part of the
building construction and shall provide for the clearance and other
requirements shown on the manufacturer's drawings.

b) No lift well shall form part of a ventilating system or accommodate

any services other than those ancillary to the installation and operation
of the lift.

c) Lift well enclosures shall extend from structural floor to structural

ceiling and shall be constructed in accordance with the fire resistance
rating requirements of Section 3 of this Code.

d) A smoke escape vent shall be provided within one foot of the highest
point of each lift well enclosure leading directly to open air.

e) Where a machine room is located on the roof of a building more than

60' 0" high, provision shall be made for lightning protection.

f) The maximum angle of inclination of the escalator with the horizontal

shall be 30 degrees and emergency stop buttons shall be located at the
top and bottom landings of each escalator flight.

1103.3 Load Capacity of Elevators

The safe load capacity of elevators shall be clearly identified on a plate

installed within the elevator cab.

1103.4 Width of Escalators

Escalators shall not be less than 2' 0" in clear width and shall have horizontal
treads.

(11-3)
 1103.5 Balustrades

Escalators shall be supplied with solid balustrades on both sides, each balustrade
being furnished with a handrail moving at the same Speed as the escalator.

1103.6 Speed of Escalators

The rated speed of escalators shall not be greater than three feet per Second and
the actual speed measured on the inclined section in an unloaded condition shall
not exceed the rated speed by more than 5%.

1104 EQUIPMENT IDENTICATION AND INSTALLATION

1104.1 General

a) All equipment shall be provided with a legible and securely attached

permanent sign giving the names and addresses of the manufacturer and the
installing contractor.

b) All equipment shall be installed in such a way that it is readily accessible for
inspection, servicing and repair.

1104 DUCTS

1104.1 Basis of Requirement

No void or concealed space within a building shall be used as an integral part of a

duct system unless it conforms fully with the requirements of this Code.

1104.2 Service Ducts

a) All service ducts passing through floors and walls other than chases and pipe
sleeves of not more than 50 sq. in. in area shall conform with the fire
resistance requirements of Section 3 for such floors and walls unless the
whole of the free space within the duct is filled to the thickness of the floor
or wall with non-combustible barrier material to give a fire resistance rating
not less than that of the floor or wall through which the duct passes.

b) Common ducts may be used for the accommodation of different services

provided that adequate precautions are taken in the location of services in
relation to one another and provided that the spacing and arrangements of
pipes and cables is such that one does not interfere with access to another.

(11-4)
 c) All service ducts shall be large enough to give adequate access to
all cleaning eyes, stop cocks and other controls, far the inspection
modification or repair of all services accommodated.

1104.3 Air Ducts

a) All air ducts shall be constructed of non-combustible materials

with no openings other than those essential to the proper
functioning and servicing of the system.

b) Any air duct passing through fire division walls or fire division
floors and/or ceilings shall be provided with automatic fire doors
or shutters having a fire resistance rating not less than that of the
wall or floor through the duct passes.

1105 ARTIFICIAL LIGHTING

Artificial lighting where required shall be in accordance with the

requirements of the electricity regulations in force.

1106 LIGHTNING PROTECTION

a) The Director may require that lightning protection systems must be

in all public buildings in Groups A, B, C and D and in Group E (b).

b) Lightning protection systems shall be in accordance with NFPA

Standard 78.

1107 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS

For buildings in Groups A, B, C, D and E (b) and (c), fire alarm systems
shall be installed to standards of the National Fire Protection Association
standards 72A, B, C, D, F and H.

(11-5)
 SECTION12

LOADS
Contents

1201 GENERAL

1201.1 Definitions
1201.2 Basis of Design
1201.3 Unit Dead Loads
1201.4 Unit Live Loads
1201.5 Special Loads
1201.6 Parapets, Balcony Handrails and Balustrades
1261.7 Roof Live Loads
1201.8 Live and Dead Load Reductions
1201.9 Posting of Live Loads

1202 WIND LOADS

1202.1 Basis of Design

1202.2 Wind Pressure
1202.3 Overturning Moment and Uplift
1202.4 Stresses due to Wind Loading

1203 EARTHQUAKE LOADS

1203.1 Basis of Design

1204 TESTS

1204.1 Conditions Requiring Load Tests

1204.2 Acceptability-criteria

Table 12-1 Floor Loads

Table 12-1(A) Minimum Concentrated Loads

Table 12-2 Design Loads for Stairs and Landings

Table 12-3 Roof Live Loads

Table 12-4 Reductions of Total Imposed Floor Loads on Columns

Table 12-5 Main Differences between Wind and Earthquakes

(12-1)
 SECTION 12

LOADS

1201 GENERAL

1201.1 Definitions

(a) Corridor means a path of egress connecting more than one room or occupied
space on any floor - a hallway.

(b) Dead load means the weight of walls, floors, roofs, partitions and other
permanent constructions.

(c) Flat roof means a roof having no inclination or having an inclination of not
more than 10 degrees with the horizontal.

(d) Live loads means all loads other than dead loads, wind loads and earthquake
loads.

(e) Load bearing means any part of a building (including the foundation)
bearing a load other than that due to its own weight, earthquake forces and to
wind pressure on its surface.

(f) Pitched roof means a roof having an inclination of more than 10 degrees
with the horizontal.

(g) Class of Load defines the minimum uniformly distributed load to be applied
for floors with the occupancy as Stated for each particular class.

1201.2 Basis of Design

(a) Any system or method of design or construction shall admit of a rational

analysis in accordance with well established principles of mechanics and
sound engineering practices.

(b) All buildings and structures and all parts thereof shall be designed and
constructed to be of sufficient strength to support the estimated or actual
imposed dead, live, wind and any other loads both during construction and
after completion of the structure, without exceeding the stresses for the
various materials specified in this code. The designer shall consider the
possibility of extraordinary concentrated loads being applied to the system.

(c) All floor and roof systems shall be designed and constructed to transfer
horizontal forces to such parts of the structural frame as are designed to
carry these forces to the foundations.

(12-2)
1201.3 Unit Dead Loads

The unit weights of basic materials used in the calculation of dead loads shall
preferably be based on properly substantiated information. Where this is not
available, the values given in the latest addition of BS 648 "Schedule of weights of
building materials" or an equivalent authoritative Standard shall be used. Appendix
E provides the approximate weight of building material commonly used in the
Caribbean. It should be noted that the weight of concrete block, plain and reinforced
concrete varies with the type of aggregate and with the amount of reinforcement
used.

1201.4 Unit Live Loads

Table 12-1 shall be used to determine the minimum live loads to be imposed on
various types of floors. These loads shall be applied in such a manner as to produce
the most severe stresses.

In designing floors of classes 30 and 40, provision shall be made for a concentrated
load of 315 lbs. placed on any l ft. square area wherever this load will produce
stresses greater than those caused by the uniformly distributed load.

1201.5 Special Loads

(a) No building or part thereof shall be designed for live loads less than the
loads specified in 1201.4.

(b) The live loads set forth therein shall be assumed to include ordinary impact
but where loading involves unusual impact the necessary allowance shall be
made by increasing the assumed live load.

(c) Provisions shall be made in designing office floors and class 50 garage
floors for a load of 2,000 lb. placed upon any area 2' 6" square wherever this
load upon an otherwise unloaded floor would produce stresses greater than
those caused by a uniformly distributed load of 50 1bs per sq.ft.

(d) In designing floors, not less than the actual live load to be imposed shall be
used in the design. Special provision shall be made for machine or apparatus
loads. Consideration should be given in the design of living rooms where
crowded conditions are likely to occur during parties and dances.

(e) Tanks and their contents should normally be treated as dead load.

(f) Where partitions me shown on the plans their actual weights should be
included the dead load. To provide for partitions where their positions are
not shown on the plans, the beams and the floor slabs where these are
capable of effective lateral distribution of the load, should be designed to
carry in addition to other loads, a uniformly distributed load per sq.ft. of not
less than 10 percent of the weight per foot run of the finished partition, but
not less than 20 lb. per sq.ft. if the floor is used for office purposes. Where
such effective distribution is not provided (e.g. in the case of precast slabs
without topping concrete) special provisions shall be made.

(12-3)
 (g) Floors in garages or portions of buildings used for the storage off
motor vehicles shall be designed for the uniformly distributed live
loads shown in Table 12-1 or the following concentrated loads: (See
Table 12- 1(A). From ANSI A 58.1 1982)

i) for passenger cars accommodating not more than nine passengers,

2,000 lbf acting on an area of 20 sq.in.

ii) mechanical parking structures without slab or deck, passenger

cars only, 1,500 lbf per wheel.

iii) for trucks or buses, maximum axle load on an area of 20 sq. in.

(h) Corridors and balconies shall normally be designed for the same class
of loading as the floor or other space to which they give access.

(i) Table 12-2 shall be used to determine design live loads on Stairs and
landings.

1201.6 Parapets, Balcony Handrails and Balustrades.

a) The minimum specified lead applied horizontally and normal to the

span at the top of every required guard shall be:

Horizontal Load lb/ft

Use run

Light access stairs, gangways and the like not more than 2 ft. wide 15
Light access stairs, gangways and the like more than 2 ft. wide, 40 plus concentrated
stairways, landings and balconies load of 60 lbs
All other stairways, landings and balconies and all parapets and 40 to 60 (exits and
handrails to roofs stairs)

Grandstands and stadia 250

b) For the loading on vehicle barriers for car parks see 2.109 of CUBiC

(12-4)
 c) In all cases, the wind load, if greater in effect, must be allowed for.

d) For the loading on vehicle barriers for car parks see 2.109 of CUBiC

1201.7 Roof Live Loads*

(a) Table 12-3 shall be used to determine roof live loads for design purposes.

(b) The combined effect of dead and live loads on roofs shall be taken into
account.

(c) Roof covering. To provide for loads incidental to maintenance, all roof
covering (other than glass) at a slope less than 45 degree should be capable
of carrying load of 200 lb. concentrated ton any 8” square at normal stress.

*Note: Live loads do not include wind and earthquake loads.

1201.8 Live and Dead Load Reductions

(a) Table 12-4 shall be used to determine the permitted reductions in assumed
total live floor loads to be taken in design of columns, piers, walls, their
supports and foundations, except as provided for in (b) and (c).

(b) No reduction should be made for floors of factories and workshops designed
for less than 100 lb. per sq. ft. live loading or for any buildings for storage
purposes, warehouses and garages. For factories and workshops designed
for 100 lb. per sq. ft. or more, the reductions shown in Table 12-4 may be
taken provided that the loading assumed for any column, etc. is not less
than it would have been if all the floors had been designed for 100 lb/sq.ft
with no reductions.

(c) Where a single span of a beam or girder supports not less than 500 sq.ft of
floor at one general level the live load taken in the design on the beam or
girder may be reduced by 5 percent for each 500 sq. ft supported, subject to
a maximum reduction of 25 percent. This reduction or that given in Table
12-3, whichever is greater, may be taken into account in the design of
columns etc. supporting such beam but should not be made where the floors
are used for storage purposes nor in the weight of any plant or machinery
which is specifically allowed for.

(12-5)
 1201.9 Posting of Live Load Notices

In all cases of Group A buildings (301.2) the Director may require the
owner(s) to fix in a conspicuous position an each floor, plaques stating the
permitted live load and the permitted occupancy intent of that floor or of that
part of that floor.

1202 WINDLOADS

1202.1 Basis of Design

(a) Buildings and structures and every portion thereof shall be designed
and constructed to resist the forces due to wind pressure. The forces
exerted by the wind on a building are the result of a combination of
factors such as wind speed, exposure factor, aerodynamic shape of the
structure and dynamic response factor.

(b) Such forces shall be applied with all possible combination of loadings,
such combinations shall include the case of dead loads plus wind loads
only. In the special case of roofs, in no case shall any roof be designed
for live loads less than those specified in Table 12-3 but the said live
load need not be considered to act simultaneously with the wind load.

(c) Structural systems shall be designed and constructed to transfer wind

forces to the ground.

1202.2 Wind Pressure

(a) The effect of wind pressure on buildings and structures and parts
thereof shall be determined from the latest edition (including
amendments) of Part 2 Section 2 of the Caribbean Uniform Building
Code.

(b) The design engineer may utilize a design based on other internationally
recognized and accepted information on the effects of wind on
structures subject to the approval of the Director.

1202.3 Overturning Moment and Uplift

(a) Where the overturning moment on a building or other structure exceeds

two-thirds of the moment of stability computed from dead load only,
anchorage to resist the excess over two-third of the dead load moment
of stability shall be provided.

(b) Where the uplift on a building or other structure, or portion thereof,

exceed two-thirds of the dead load only, anchorage to resist the excess
uplift over two-thirds of the dead load shall be provided.

(12-6)
 1202.4 Stresses due to Wind Loading

For members carrying wind stresses only, and for combined stresses due to
wind and other loads, the allowable unit stresses and the allowable loads on
connections may be increased by one-third of the maximum working Stress
specified in this Code for the materials used, except for the provisions of
Section 16 - Plain and Reinforced Concrete. Such increases shall not apply to
towers, cantilevered projections or metal sheathing where-vibrating or
fluttering action could be anticipated. In no case shall the section be less than
required if the wind stresses be neglected. The special case of pre-stressed
concrete structures is dealt with under Section 16 of this Code.

1203 EARTHQUAKE LOADS

1203.1 Basis of Design

a) The record of seismic activity within the last 100 years shows that
there have been earthquakes which have created significant damage in
some of the islands in the Eastern Caribbean. In the past twenty-five
years Islands such as Antigua, St. Kitts and Montserrat have
experienced earthquakes which have caused damage to buildings and
other property.

b) It is necessary therefore that every building and structure and every

portion thereof be designed and constructed in accordance with the
latest edition of the “Recommended Lateral Force Requirements and
Commentary by the Seismology Committee of the Structural
Engineer’s Association of California” or in accordance with Part 2
Section 3 of the Caribbean Uniform Building Code (CUBiC).

c) Part 2 Section 3 of the Caribbean Uniform Building Code provide the

zonal coefficients (Z values) of most of the Commonwealth Caribbean
States. The appropriate zonal coefficient for the OECS is taken from
Table 2.305.1 of CUBiC and is to be used for the calculation of the
equivalent static forces in accordance with 2.305.3 of CUBiC.

Territory Z Value Territory Z Value

Antigua .75 St. Lucia .75
St. Kitts/Nevis .75 St. Vincent .75
Dominica .75 Grenada .50

(12-7)
 d) For the design of small buildings to resist seismic forces see Section
18 of this Code and Section A of the Building Guidelines.

1203.2 Building Response Data from Future Earthquakes

In order to develop earthquake resistant design recommendations more

specific to each of the OECS, building response data must be obtained from
future earthquakes. The installation of at least three strong motion
accelerographs is recommended in all buildings six stories or more in height.
Where provided, accelerographs are to be distributed between ground and
roof.

1204 LOAD TESTS

1204.1 Conditions Requiring Load Tests

Whenever there is insufficient evidence of compliance with the provisions of

this Code or evidence that any material or any construction does not conform
to the requirements of this Code, or in order to substantiate claims for
alternate materials or methods of construction, tests as proof of compliance
shall be made by an agency approved by the Authority and at the expense of
the owner.

1204.2 Acceptability Criteria

a) Where there is no recognized standard test procedure for the material

or assembly in question, the material or assembly under dead plus
live vertical load shall deflect not more than 1/240 of the span, nor
more than 1/360 where required to support a plaster ceiling or brittle
partitions, and that the material or assembly shall sustain dead plus
twice the live load for a period of 24 hours, with a recovery of at least
80 percent.

b) Where elements, assemblies or details of structural members are such

that calculation of their load-carrying capacity, deformation under
load or deflection cannot be made by rational analysis, their
structural performance shall be established by tests in accordance
with test procedure as developed by the design engineer based on
consideration of all probable conditions of loading.

1205 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN WIND AND EARTHQUAKES

Table 12-5 shows the main differences between wind and earthquakes on the
design of a building. It will be noticed that the predictability of loads from
wind pressures is usually good, while the loads from earthquakes cannot be
readily assessed. The building frames to accommodate earthquake loads
must be provided with ductility while for wind the buildings do not have to
be designed on the basis of the same criteria, as the main factors affecting
building response are the external shape and size of the building.

(12-8)
 Table 12-1

Floor Loads

Loading Types of Floors Minimum Alternative Imposed Loads

Class Imposed (lb)
Number Loads
Slabs Beams Beams
lb. per Uniformly Uniformly
sq.ft. of distributed distributed
floor area over span, over span
per ft width
30 Floors in dwelling houses of not more than 30 240 1,920
2 stories
40 Floors (other than those of class 30) for residential 40 320 2,560
purposes including dwelling houses of more than
one occupation: residential flats; hospital wards;
hotel bedrooms and sitting rooms: rest rooms
institutional establishments of Group B occupancy.
50 Floors of light work rooms without storage; 50 As required by As required by
floors of garage for passenger cars with 1201.5(c) 1201(c)
gross weight not exceeding 2-1/2 tons.
60 Floors of school class rooms; office ground 60 480 3,840
floor and office floors below ground floor;
floors of banking halls; floors of library
reading rooms; marques, hospital operating
theatres
70 Office floors 70 560 4,480
80 Shop floors used for the display and sale of 80 640 5,120
light merchandise; workrooms generally;
garages for vehicles exceeding 21 tons gross
weight; places of assembly with fixed seating;
churches and chapels, restaurants;
circulation space in machinery halls, power
stations etc. where not occupied by plant or
equipment; theatre balconies with fixed
seating; city halls, court houses; art galleries.

Note: Fixed seating implies that the removal of the seating and the use of the space for other
purposes is impossible.

(12-9)
 Table 12-1(Cont’d)

Floor Loads

Loading Types of Floors Minimum Alternative Imposed Loads

Class Imposed (lb)
Number Loads
Slabs Beams Beams
Lb. per Uniformly Uniformly
Sq.ft. of distributed distributed
Floor area over span, over span
per ft.
width.
100 Floors of warehouse, workshops, factories, and 100 800 6,400
other buildings or parts of buildings of similar
categories for light-weight loads; paces of
assembly without fixed seating; public rooms;
dance halls; theatre balconies without fixed
seating; gymnasiums. Assembly platforms;
composing and linotype rooms in printing
plants; reviewing stands and bleachers; drill
rooms; fire escapes; hospital X-ray rooms;
laboratories, cinemas public auction rooms not
used for storage of goods.

100A Areas used for general storage and filing 100 800 6,400
purposes
in offices of loading class 50 and 70.

Note: Special consideration shall be given to

the average and the localized floor loadings
class 70 used for heavy filing and storage
equipment (such as card cabinets and rolling
storage units, and for centralized security and
storage.)
150 Floors of warehouses, workshops, factories and 150 - -
other buildings or parts of buildings of similar
categories for light weight loads; floors of
garages
for vehicles not exceeding 4 tons gross
weight; stages; armories.
200 Floors of warehouses, workshops, factories, 200 - -
other buildings or part of buildings of similar
categories for heavy weight loads (unless
actual
loading is greater than 200 lb per sq.ft); floors
of book stores; museums.

(12-10)
 Table 12-1(A)

Minimum Concentrated Loads

Location Load (lb.)

Elevator machine room grating (on area of 4 sq.in) 300
Finish Light floor plate construction (on area of 1 sq.in) 200
Garages (see 1201.5(g)
Office Floors 2,000
Accessible ceilings 200
Sidewalks 8,000
Stair treads (on area of 4 sq.ins at centre of tread ) 300

Note: Table 12-1(A) taken from ANSI A58.1 1982

Table 12-2

Design Loads for Stairs and Landings (other than fire escapes)

Class of Floor Served Live Load (lb/sq.ft.)

30 30
40,50,60,70 60
Other classes 100

Consideration shall be given to increasing the design loading where there is a possibility of heavy
equipment being transported on stairs or landings.

The following minimum concentrated loads shall be considered on stairs and landings at the most
unfavorable positions for bending moment and shear.

Loading Class 30: 400 lb

Class 40, 50&60: 600 lb

Class 70: 600 lb

Class 80, 100, 150&200: 1,000 lb

(12-11)
 Table 12-3

Roof Live Loads. Design Loading lb/sq ft of Plan Area

Slope of Roof With Access No Access

Up to 10 degrees 30 15
Over 10 degrees up to 30 degrees 15 Nil
Over 75 degrees Nil Nil

For slopes between 30 degrees and 75 degrees the imposed load to be allowed for shall be obtained by linear interpolation
between 15 lb. per sq. ft for a 30 degree slope and mil for a 75 degree slope.

NOTE:

“With access” means access in addition to that necessary for cleaning and repair.

“No access” means no access other than that necessary for cleaning and repair.

The design loading in this Table does not include wind or earthquake loads.

Table 12-4

Reductions of Total Live Floor Loads on Columns.

Number of floors carried by member Percent reduction of live load on all floors
under consideration above the member under consideration
Roof 0
Roof and two floors 0
Roof and three floors 10
Roof and four floors 30
Roof and five floors 40

(12-12)
 Table 12-5

Main Differences between Wind and Earthquakes

Item Wind Earthquakes

Source of loading External forces due to wind pressure Applied movements from ground
vibration
Type and duration of loading Wind storm of several hour’s Transient cyclic loads of at most a few
duration; loads fluctuate, but minutes’ duration; loads change
predominantly in one direction direction repeatedly
Predictability of loads Usually good, by extrapolation from Poor; little statistical certainty of
records or by analysis of site and wind magnitude of vibrations or their
patterns effects
Influence of local soil conditions on Unimportant Can be important
response
Main factors affecting building External shape and size of building; Response governed by building
response dynamic properties unimportant dynamic properties: fundamental
except for very slender structures period, damping and mass
Normal design basis for maximum Elastic response required Inelastic response permitted, but
credible event ductility must be provided; design is
for small fraction of the loads
corresponding to elastic response
Design of non-structural elements Loading confined to external cladding Entire building contents shaken and
must be designed appropriately

(12-13)
 SECTION 13

EXCAVATIONS AND FOUNDATIONS

Contents

1301 EXCAVATIONS

1301.1 General
1301.2 Permanent and Construction Excavations
1301.3 Enforcement

1302 BEARING CAPACITY OF SOIL

1302.1 Soil Investigations

Table 13-1 Maximum Safe Bearing Capacity for Horizontal Foundations

1302.2 Wind and Earthquake

1303 SOIL BEARING FOUNDATIONS

1303.1 General
1303.2 Continuous footings
1303.3 Isolated Footings

Table 13-2 Minimum Dimensions for Continuous Footings

1304 CONCRETE SLABS ON FILL

1305 PILED FOUNDATIONS

1305.1 General
1305.2 Allowable Loads
1305.3 Timber Piles

Table 13・3 Minimum Factor of Safety for Piles

1305.4 Precast Concrete Piles

1305.5 Prestressed Concrete Piles
1305.6 Cast-in-placed Concrete Piles
1305.7 Steel Piles
1308.8 Special Piles or Special Conditions

(13-1)
1306 FOUNDATION BEAMS

1307 SEA WALLS AND BULKHEADS

1307.1 General
1307.2 Design Criteria

1308 CAISSONS

1308.1 General
1308.2 Design Criteria

(13-2)
 SECTION 13

EXCAVATIONS AND FOUNDATIONS

1301 EXCAVATIONS

1301.1 General

Until provisions for permanent support have been made all excavations
shall be properly guarded and protected so as to prevent the same from
being dangerous to life and property. Such protection is to be provided by
the person causing the excavation to be made. Excavations, for any purpose,
shall not extend within one foot of the plane of the natural slope of the soil
under any existing footing or foundation, unless such footing or foundation,
unless such footing or foundation is first properly underpinned or protected
against settlement.

1301.2 Permanent and Temporary Construction Excavations

No permanent excavations shall be made nor shall any construction

excavations be left on any lot or lots which will endanger adjoining
property or buildings or be a menace to public health or safety. Any such
excavations made or maintained shall be properly drained and such
drainage provisions shall function properly as long as the excavation exists.

Permanent excavations shall have retaining walls of steel, masonry,

concrete or similar approved material of sufficient strength to retain the
lateral thrust of the surrounding material together with any surcharged
loads.

1301.3 Enforcement

Where, in the opinion of the Director, unsafe condition may result or

damage may occur as the result of an excavation, he may order the work
stopped or may approve the work of excavation subject to such limitations
as he may deem necessary.

1302 BEARING CAPACITY OF SOIL

1302.1 Soil Investigations

Plans for new buildings or additions shall bear a statement as to the

nature and character of the soil under the structure. Where the bearing
capacity of the soil is not known or is in question, the design engineer
shall arrange for an examination of sub-soil conditions such as by
borings and other tests. Plate load tests shall be used only to supplement
other sub-soil investigations. The design capacity of the soil should be
substantiated by recognized tests, analyses and procedures, however,
where this is not done, Table 13-1 may be used as a guide in estimating
the allowable bearing capacities of supporting soils.

(13-3)
 procedures, However, where this is not done, Table 13-1 may be used as
a guide in estimating the allowable bearing capacities of supporting
soils.

Table 13-1

Maximum Safe Bearing Capacities for Horizontal Foundations at Depth 2 ft under Vertical Static
Loading. (Materials not listed in this Table shall be tested for bearing capacity).
Types of Rocks and Soils Maximum Safe bearing Remarks
Capacity-tons per sq.ft.
1. massively-bedded limestones and hard 40
sandstones.
2. clay shales To be determined
3. thinly-bedded limestones and sandstones 10
Dry Submerged
4. compact well-graded sands and ravel
sand mixtures 4 2

5. loose well graded sands mixtures 2 1

6. compact uniform sands 2 1

7. loose uniform sands 1 1/2

8. stiff clays and sandy clays 2 To be determined

9. firm clays and sandy clays 1 1

10. soft clays and silts 1/2 1/2

11. very soft clays and silts - -

12. made ground - To be determined after investigation

1302.2 Wind and Earthquake

a) All allowable soil-bearing values specified in Table 13-1 may be increased by

one-third in calculations for wind or earthquake loading when combined with
vertical loads. No increase shall be allowed for vertical loads acting alone.
Wind and earthquake loads need not be assumed to act simultaneously.

(13-4)
 b) It should be noted that in certain types of soils, for example, silty
water-logged soils, liquefaction might occur under certain
earthquake conditions. The possibility of the occurrence of
liquefaction should be investigated.

1303 SOIL BEARING FOUNDATIONS

1303.1 General

Footings shall be so designed that the soil pressure should be reasonably

uniform to minimize differential settlement. The preferred material for the
construction of footings is concrete.

1303.2 Continuous Footings

(a) Footings under walls shall be continuous or continuity otherwise

provided and shall not be less than required to keep the soil
pressure within that set forth in Table 13-1 nor less than the
minimum sizes set forth Table 13-2.

(b) All concrete footings shall be adequately reinforced, the minimum

allowable amount of steel reinforcement being 0.15 percent of the
gross cross-sectional area of the concrete in both horizontal
directions. Reinforcing bars shall be provided with a minimum of
2" of concrete cover. (See Table 16-3)

(c) Excavations for continuous footings shall be cut true to line and
level and the sides of footings shall be shuttered, except where soil
conditions are such that the sides of the excavation stand firm and
square. Excavations shall be made to firm bearing.

(d) Continuous footings shall be placed level and any changes in the
level of such footings shall be made with a vertical tie of the same
cross-section and design as the footings.

(e) Continuous footings on which the centre of gravity of the loads falls
outside of the middle one-third shall be considered eccentric, and
provision shall be made to limit the soil pressure at the edges to
allowable values by means of counter-balancing or by other
approved methods.

1303.3 Isolated Footings

(a) Isolated footings in soils having low lateral restraint shall be

provided with adequate bracing to resist movement.

(b) An isolated footing on which the centre of gravity of the load falls
outside the middle one-third of any line passing through the centre
of gravity of the footing shall be considered eccentric, and
provision shall be made to limit the soil pressure at the edges by
means of straps or other approved methods.

(13-5)
 (c) Where isolated footings support reinforced concrete columns,
starter bars, equivalent in number and area to the column
reinforcement, and having lengths not less than 30 diameters above
and below the joints, shall be provided in the footing. Where the
footing depth does not allow straight bars, standard bends will be
allowed. Such starter bars, or anchor bolts as are required for steel
columns, shall be held to proper level and location during the
concreting of the footing by templates or by other approved
methods.

Table 13-2

Minimum Dimensions for Continuous Footings

Allowable bearing capacity Number of stories Depth and width

(Tons per sq.ft.)
Up to 1/2 1 12 x 30
2 12 x 36
Over 1/2 but less than 1 1 9x 24
2 12x 24
1 or more 1 9x 16
2 9x 24

Note: The sizes given in the Table are to be used with caution as the characteristics of soils vary
considerably and all soils should be analyzed before designing the foundation.
Based on soil investigations as set .forth in 1302.1 the footing sizes may be changed when
the allowable bearing values and loads are taken into account, but the minimum width of a
footing under the main wall of a building shall not be less than 24” nor less than 8” more
than the width of the foundation wall whichever is greater.

1304 CONCRETE SLABS ON FILL

(a) Where it is proposed to place concrete slabs directly on the

supporting soil, a sub-grade shall have first been prepared by
removing all top soil, organic matter and debris, and the
subgrade and fill shall be thoroughly compacted by approved
mechanical methods. All fill placed under slabs shall be clean,
free of debris and other deleterious materials. The maximum
size of rock in compacted fill shall be 4” in diameter. For cases
of heavy loading special compaction tests may be required.

(b) Concrete floor slabs placed directly on the supporting soil shall be
of an appropriate thickness for the loads intended but in any case
not less than 4”, and shall be reinforced with steel reinforcement
not less than 0.15 percent of the gross cross-sectional area of the
concrete in the slab. The reinforcement shall be placed in the upper
half of the slab.

(13-6)
1305 PILED FOUNDATIONS

1305.1 General

(a) Piled foundations shall be designed and supervised by a

professionally qualified engineer approved by the Authority and
suitably qualified and experienced in such design.

(b) Piles used for the support of any building or structure shall be
driven to a resistance and penetration in accordance with the plans
and/or specifications and as set forth herein.

(c) Piles may be jetted only if permitted by the engineer. Immediately

after completion of jetting, the pile shall be driven below the depth
jetted to the required resistance but not less than 1’ 0”. No jetting
will be permitted that may be detrimental to existing adjacent
structures or to piles that have been driven.

(d) Column action. All piles standing unbraced in air, water, or in

material not capable of providing lateral support, shall be designed
as columns. Such piles driven into firm ground may be considered
fixed and laterally supported at 5' 0" below the ground surface
unless otherwise prescribed by the design engineer after a
foundation investigation by a competent agency approved by the
Authority.

(e) When isolated columns and other loads are supported on piles a
minimum of three piles shall be used for such support unless
lateral bracing is provided at the pile cap to ensure stability.
Should a pile be loaded eccentrically so as to produce an overload
on any pile more than 10 percent of the allowable load footing
straps or other approved methods shall be required to counteract
the effect of eccentric loading.

(f) The minimum centre-to-centre spacing of friction piles shall be not

less than 3'6" or the perimeter of the piles whichever is greater. For
piles deriving their resistance from end bearing the minimum
centre spacing of the piles shall be not less than 2’6" or twice the
least width, whichever is greater. The spacing of piles shall be
such that in no case the average load on the supporting stratum
may exceed the safe bearing value of the stratum.

(g) It is advisable that poles shall not be driven closer than 4’0” to an
existing building or structure, unless special consideration is given
to the properties of the soil and to the structure of the existing
building.

(13-7)
 (h) Group action. Consideration shall be given to the reduction of allowable
pile load when piles are placed in groups. Where soil considerations make
such load reductions advisable or necessary, the allowable axial load
determined for a single pile shall be reduced by any rational method or
formula.

(i) Piles in subsiding areas. Where piles are driven through subsiding fills or
other subsiding strata and derive support from underlying firmer materials,
consideration shall be given to the downward frictional forces which may
be imposed on the piles by the subsiding upper strata.

(j) The engineer or other competent person approved by the Director

supervising the pile-driving operations shall be required to keep an accurate
record of the material and the principal dimensions of each pile; the weight
and fall of the hammer, - if a single-acting or drop hammer; the size and
make, operating pressure, length of hose, number of blows per minute and
energy per blow - if a double-acting hammer; together with the average
penetration of each pile far at least the last five blows, and the levels at tip
and cutoff. A copy of these records shall be filed and kept with the plans.

(k) All piles shall be designed so that lifting and handling stresses shall not
exceed allowable working stresses, as specified. Stresses during driving
may exceed these stresses by not more than 100 percent.

1305.2 Allowable Loads

(a) The allowable axial and lateral loads on piles shall be determined by an
approved formula, by load tests, or by a foundation investigation by a
competent agency.

(b) Where a dynamic pile formula is used the ultimate resistance shall be
calculated in accordance with the method given in BS 8004 or such other
formula as the engineer shall consider Suitable.

(c) When the allowable axial load of a single pile is determined by a load test
one of the following methods shall be used to determine the ultimate
resistance.

(d) The ultimate resistance shall be defined as:

(1) The load at which an increase in load produces a dramatic increase in

settlement; or

(13-8)
 (2) The maximum load which during a 48-hour period of
continuous load application causes settlements at a rate not
exceeding 0.01 in/hr.

In any event, the maximum settlement should not exceed 0.01 in/ton
gross settlement or 0.025 in net settlement (where net settlement is
the difference between gross and recovery).

(e) Where the ultimate resistance of a friction pile is determined by soil

tests, the soil investigation and laboratory tests shall be carried out
by a competent agency.

(f) Table 13-3 shall be used to determine the minimum factor of

safety to be used in calculating the allowable axial load on a pile.

Table 13-3

Minimum Factor of Safety for Piles

Type of Ground Test Load Dynamic Dynamic Soil Investigation

Formula Formula and Soil tests
Resistance not Resistance
Reduced on Reduced on
Driving Redriving
Rock 2.0 1.5 - 2.0
Non-cohesive soil 2.0 2.0 2.5 2.0
Hard cohesive soil 2.0 2.0 2.0 or more 2.0
Soft cohesive soil 2.0 N/A N/A 2.0

■ Test load should be used in the circumstances

1305.3 Timber Piles

(a) Timber piles shall be of one piece of approved timber containing

no evidence of decay, free from short kinks or reverse bends and
having uniform taper from butt to tip. A straight line drawn from
the centre of the butt to the centre of the tip shall lie wholly
within the body of the pile. The diameter of round piles shall be
not less than 6 inches at the tip and not less than 10 inches three
feet from the butt, for piles which are 25’0” or less in length. For
piles which exceed 25 feet in length the diameter at the tip shall
be not less than 8 inches; and at 3 feet from the butt, the diameter
shall not be less than 12 inches.

(13-9)
 (b) No piles which have a spiral grain exceeding one complete turn in 40’0"
shall be used. Squared timber piles less than 8" square shall not be used.

(c) Untreated wood piles shall not be used, except piles made of timber which
has been shown to be resistant to termites and wood borers. The approval of
the Director shall be sought for the use of all timbers for piling.

(d) All other piles shall be pressure-treated in accordance with the requirements
of section 14 of this Code.

(e) The allowable stress in compression parallel to the grain under maximum
working load shall not exceed 60 percent of the basic stress as determined by
the US National Forest Products Association or any other Agency approved
by the Authority, and in no case shall stress exceed 700 lb. per sq.in.

1305.4 Precast Concrete Piles

(a) The manufacture of precast concrete piles shall conform in all respects to
Section 16 of this Code; concrete shall conform to not less than the
requirements of standard mix ST4* for normal or easy driving and of mix
ST5 for hard driving, and for all piles used in marine work.

*Note: Concrete grades are defined in Section 16.

(b) All piles shall be reinforced with not less than 4 longitudinal steel bars
having an area of not less than 1.25 percent and not more than 4.0 percent
of the gross cross-sectional area of the pile. All the main longitudinal bars
shall be of uniform size and length. Joints in longitudinal bars, if
unavoidable, shall be made by full-strength butt-welding.

(c) Lateral reinforcement in the form of hoops or links shall be not less than
3/16” diameter. In the body of the pile the lateral reinforcement shall be not
less than 2percent of the gross volume spaced at not more than half the least
width of the pile. For length of 3 times the least width of the pile at each
end of the pile the volume of lateral reinforcement shall be not less than 6
percent of the gross volume. The transition between the close-spacing at the
ends and the maximum spacing shall be made gradually over a length of 3
times the least width.

(d) All reinforcement, including binding wire, shall be protected by at least

1-1/2” of concrete cover except that for piles subjected to the action of open
water, waves or other severe exposure 2-1/2” cover shall be provided.

(13-10)
 (e) The compressive stress imposed on driven piles shall not exceed 750 lb.
per sq.in. on the nominal minimum cross-sectional area of the pile.

(f) Precast concrete piles shall be not less than 10” x 10” in section.

(g) All precast concrete piles shall have their date of manufacture and the
lifting points clearly marked on the pile. Concrete piles shall not be driven
until they have attained their specified 28-day strength as verified by tests,
nor shall the piles be removed from the forms until 50 percent of the
specified 28-day strength has been attained. Piles shall not be transported
nor driven until they have been cured not less than seven days.

1305.5 Prestressed Concrete Piles

(a) Prestressed concrete piles shall conform to 1608 of this Code except as
specifically detailed in 1305.5.

(b) Longitudinal pre-stressing tendons shall have not less than 2" of cover
except that for piles subject to open water or wave action, or other severe
exposure the cover shall be 3".

(c) Lateral reinforcement shall be as specified in 1305.4(c) for the precast

concrete piles.

(d) Piles slab have a minimum pre-stress of 600 lb. per sq.in. at time of
driving.

(e) No tension shall be allowed in the concrete under working load conditions.

(f) The compressive stress in the pile under working load combined with the
prestress in the pile at the time of loading shall not exceed one-third of the
compressive strength of the pile.

1305.6 Cast-in-place Concrete Piles

(a) Concrete piles cast in place against earth in drilled or bored holes shall be
made in such a manner as to ensure the exclusion of any foreign matter
and to secure a full-sized shaft.

(b) Allowable stresses. The allowable compressive stress in the concrete shall
not exceed 0.225 times the specified 28-day cube strength. The reinforcing
steel shall conform to ASTM A706-82a – “Standard Specification for Low
Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" or to the
Equivalent British standard.

(13-11)
 (c) Cased cast-in-place concrete piles may consist of a steel or concrete shell
driven in intimate contact with the surrounding soil and left in place and
filled with concrete. Steel shells may be uniformly tapered, step-tapered,
cylindrical or a combination of such shapes and may be laterally
corrugated, spirally corrugated, longitudinally fluted or plain.

(d) Pile shells and end closures shall be of sufficient strength and rigidity to
permit their driving in keeping with the driving method use, and to
prevent .harmful distortion caused by- soil pressure or the driving of
adjacent piles until filled with concrete. A reduction of cross-sectional
area in excess of 15 percent shall be cause for rejection. The shells shall
also be sufficiently water-tight to exclude water during the placing of
concrete. The minimum diameter shall be 8".

(e) Concrete for cast-in-place piles shall conform to not less than the
requirements of Grade ST4, Table 16 -2.

(f) Reinforcement including binding wire shall have not less than 2" of
concrete cover in uncased piles and 1" where piles are completely
encased.

(g) Where the shell has a thickness of 0.12" or more the shell may be
considered as carrying part of the load.

(h) Adequate allowance for corrosion shall be considered in the design but not
less than the outer 1/16" of a steel shell shall be deducted before
computing the area of the shell considered as carrying load. The load
carried by the shell shall not exceed 9,000 lb. per sq.in. based on the net
steel area deducting the allowance for corrosion.

1305.7 Steel Piles

(a) The quality of the steel in joints, tubes, box Piles and other plain or built up
sections shall comply with the specification for structural steel in
conformance with the relevant ASTM or British standard.

(b) No section shall have a nominal thickness of metal of less than 3/8”.

(c) The allowable stress under working load shall not exceed 25 percent of the
minimum guaranteed yield stress of the steel.

(d) Where adequate corrosion prevention is not provided 1/16” shall be

deducted from each surface in determining the area of the piles section.

(13-12)
 1305.8 Special Piles or Special Conditions

The use of types of piles or conditions not specifically covered herein may
be considered upon examination of acceptable test data, calculations or
other information relating to the properties and load-carrying capacity of
such piles.

1306 FOUNDATION BEAMS

(a) Foundation beams, supporting loads between piles, shall be

reinforced concrete, or structural steel protected by at least 2" of
concrete cover.

(b) The width of foundation beams shall be at least equal to the

thickness of the wall they support but never less than 8".

(c) Foundation beams shall be suitably designed and reinforced around

access openings and vents.

1307 SEA WALLS AND BULKHEADS

1307.1 General

Sea walls, bulkheads, groynes and other retaining walls along an ocean
front, bay, creek, canal, or water-way shall be designed by a
professionally qualified and approved engineer.

1307.2 Design criteria

a) The structure shall retain the adjoining earth from the surface of
the ground to a point sufficiently deep to retain the base against
surcharge pressures, with due design considerations for wave
action and currents.

b) Timber shall not be used, other than where located below mean
low water, except that bore-resistant or appropriately treated
woods may be approved by the Director.

c) Structures shall be classed as gravity types when the resultant of

the acting forces falls within the middle third of the base.
Boulder-type walls shall be considered as gravity type where the
base width equals or exceeds the height of the wall. Structures
which are not of gravity or cantilever type shall be secured to
properly designed anchors.

d) Where structures are constructed of a combination of lime rock

boulders and concrete, the minimum percentage of cross-section
area of the concrete to the total cross-section area of the structure
shall be 40 percent, not including concrete used for copings or
decorative purposes.

(13-13)
1308 CAISSONS

1308.1 General

The footings of any structure may be carried down to a firm foundation by

isolated piers of reinforced concrete or by open or pneumatic caissons either
with or without enlarged base or bell at the bottom.

1308.2 Design Criteria

a) The safe-carrying capacity of such shafts or caissons shall not exceed

the allowable unit bearing capacity of the soil multiplied by the area
of the base or bell at the bottom, provided such bell shall have at least
a 12" thickness of concrete at its edge and the sides shall slope at an
angle of not less than 60 degrees with the horizontal.

b) In no case shall such piers or caissons be-of less than 2’ 0” minimum

horizontal dimension.

(13-14)
 SECTION 14

TIMBER CONSTRUCTION
Contents

1401 GENERAL

1402 STANDARDS

1403 QUALITY OF TIMBER

1403.1 Treated or Durable Species

1403.2 Use of Lumber and Other Timber Products

1404 SIZES

1405 ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES

1405.1 General
1405.2 Plywood Stresses
1405.3 Glued Laminated Members
1405.4 Trussed Rafters

1406 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS

1406.1 Roof Joists

1406.2 Roof Sheeting
1406.3 Floor Joists

Table 14-1(a) Spans of Plywood Sub-floor

Table 14-1(b) Allowable Spans for Plywood Roof Sheathing

Table 14-2 Allowable Spans for Plywood Sub-floor

Table 14-3 Minimum Thickness of Lumber Sub-flooring

1406.4 Sub-floors

Table 14-4 Allowable Spans for Particleboard Sub-floor and

Combined Sub-floor Underlayment

1406.5 Post and Beam Framing

(14-1)
 1406.6 Stair Framing
1406.7 Joists supporting Partitions
1406.8 Exterior Wall Framing

Table 14-5 Maximum Spacing of Studs

1406.9 Bracing of Exterior Stud Walls

Table 14-6 Allowable Spans for Plywood Wall Sheathing

1406.10 Interior Bearing Partitions

1406.11 Exterior Wall Coverings
1406.12 Roof Covering

l407 VENTILATION

(14-2)
 SECTION 14

TIMBER CONSTRUCTION

1401 GENERAL
Timber members used for structural purposes shall be designed by methods
admitting of rational analysis according to established principles of
mechanics.

1402 STANDARDS
(a) Standards of construction shall be at least equal to standards in the
latest edition of CUBiC Part 2 Section 8 – Structural Timber; or the
American Institute of Timber Construction - AITC 100; or BS 5268
- Structural Use of Timber; or other Standard approved by the
Authority for environmental conditions in the OECS.

(b) CUBiC Part 2 Section 8, is hereby adopted as being part of this

Code and supplements, but does not supersede the specific
requirements set forth herein.

1403 QUALITY OF TIMBER PRODUCTS

1403.1 Preservative Treated or Durable Species Timber

(a) Wood used for structural purposes shall be pressure treated or

have natural resistance to termites. The approval of the Director is
required for the use of any timber for structural purposes that has
not been pressure treated.

(b) Approved wood having natural resistance to termites include

greenheart, redwood, or red cedar*.

(c) The standard of the American Wood Pressures Bureau and/or the
American Wood Pressure Association shall be deemed as
approved in respect of pressure treated wood.

(d) The soil should be treated against termites, as a protection against

the termite infestation in the area in which the building is being
constructed. This treatment should be carried out by experienced
contractors using methods and materials approved by the Director.

Note: The developer should confirm the natural resistance of' the timber to be
used by providing test certificates or other relevant information for the
approval of the Director.

(14-3)
1403.2 Use or Lumbers Plywood, Hardboard, and other Timber Products.

a) All lumber, including end-jointed lumber, used for load supporting purposes
shall be identified by Grade Mark of a Lumber Grading or Inspection Bureau
or Agency approved by the Authority.

b) Structural glued laminated timber shall be manufactured in accordance with

AITC 117 “Standard Specification for Structural Glued Laminated Timbers of
Softwood Species, Manufacture and Design or BS 5268 Part 2, "Structural
Use of Timber".

c) All plywood when used structurally (including among others, used for siding,
roof and wall sheathing, sub flooring, diaphragms and built-up members),
shall conform to the performance standards for its type as determined by the
American Plywood Design Specifications for Plywood-Lumber Components
or other Standard approved by the Authority.

d) Plywood components shall be designed and fabricated in accordance with the

applicable standards and identified by the trademarks of a testing and
inspection agency approved by the Authority, and indicating conformance
with the applicable standard. In addition, all plywood when permanently
exposed in outdoor applications shall be of exterior type.

e) Wood Shingles and/or shakes shall be identified by the grade mark of a grading
or inspection bureau or agency recognized by the Authority as being
competent.

f) Fiberboard for its various uses shall conform to "Voluntary Product Standard,
Cellulose Fibre Insulating Authority PS-57". Fiberboard sheathing when used
structurally shall be so identified by an approved agency conforming to the
Product Standard. Fiberboard should not be used for exterior structural
purposes without specific approval of the Director.

g) Hardboard shall conform to the applicable Product Standard, “PS-58 Basic

Hardboard”, “PS-59 Pre-finished Hardboard Paneling” or, “PS-60 Hardboard
Siding”, and shall be identified as to classification. Hardboard siding when
used structurally shall be identified by an agency approved by the Authority
as conforming to the Product Standard.

h) Particle board shall conform to American National Standard for Mat-Formed

Wood Particleboard – ANSI A208.1.1. Particleboard shall be identified by the
grade mark or Certificate of Inspection issued by an agency approved by the
Authority.

(14-4)
 i) Particle board sub floor or combination subfloor-underlayment shall
conform to one of the Grades in Table 14-4.

j) Particle board should be used with caution. Particleboard used for

sub flooring or roof decking or for wall sheathing should be
moisture and termite resistant.

k) All lumber and plywood required to be treated shall bear an

approved AWPB Quality Mark or that of an inspection agency
approved by the Authority, that maintains continuing control,
testing and inspection over the quality of the products.

l) Wood flooring of the various types shall be manufactured and

identified as required in an appropriate standard such as:

- Laminated Hardwood Block Flooring – Interim Industry

Standard HPMA-LF 1971.

- Flooring Grading Rules (Oak, Pecan Beech, Birch, Hard

Maple) - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers
Association.

- Hard Maple Flooring Standard Specification (Hard Maple,

Beech and Birch) - Maple Flooring Manufactures
Association.

m) It is recommended that where rainwater is collected from a

shingled roof a filter be installed at the inlet pipe to the storage
tank.

1404 SIZES
(a) All timber structural members shall be of sufficient size to carry
the dead and required live loads without exceeding the allowable
deflections or working stresses specified. Adequate bracing and
bridging to resist wind and other forces shall be provided.

(b) Sizes of timber members referred to by this code are nominal sizes.
The minimum acceptable net sizes conforming to normal sizes
shall be within 2 percent of the minimum net sizes specified in
AITC 100 at 19 percent moisture content. Computations to
determine the required sizes of members shall be based on the net
sizes contained in the standard.

(14-5)
1405 ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES

1405.1 General

(a) Timber joists and rafters shall be designed using the allowable unit
stresses in AITC 100.

(b) Timber members supporting plastered ceilings shall be so proportioned

that their deflection under fun live load shall not exceed 1/360 of the
span; and timber members, not supporting plastered ceilings, shall be
50 proportioned that their deflection under full live load shall not
exceed 1/240 of the span.

(c) The span of roof rafters shall be measured horizontally from bearing to
bearing.

(d) Where there is an accessible space having a clear vertical height of

30” or more, ceiling joists shall be designed as having usable attic
space.

1405.2 Plywood Stresses

(a) Working stresses of plywood other than those covered by the

American Plywood Association Standard shall be determined
according to the (APA) species.

(b) All plywood permanently exposed in outdoor locations shall be of

exterior type, and where used for roof or exterior wall sheathing shall
meet the performance standards for exterior type plywood in the APA
standard.

(c) Walls or roofs sheathed with plywood may be considered as

diaphragms to distribute horizontal forces, based on structural analysis
and/or tests; and where so used plywood shall be bonded with
approved exterior adhesive.

(d) All plywood used structurally shall bear the identification of an

approved agency as to type and grade, species of veneer used and
conformance with the appropriate standard.

1405.3 Glued Laminated Members

(a) The Authority may require tests to determine the strength, Permanence,
effect of moisture and insect-resistance of Adhesives; and only
approved adhesives may be used.

(b) The Authority may limit or otherwise regulate the use of

glued-laminated members after consideration of the manufacture,
location and service.

(14-6)
 1405.4 TIMBER TRUSSES

(a) Trusses shall be designed by methods admitting of rational analysis.

(b) Where metal is used for connecting wood members such metal shall
be not less than 18 gauge and shall be galvanized.

(c) The allowable deflection under live load, for trusses shall be 1/360 of
the span for plastered ceilings, 1/240 for unplastered finished ceiling,
and 1/180 for trusses without a ceiling.

(d) The design of metal plate connected wood trusses shall comply with
the "Design Specifications for Light Metal Plate Connected Wood
Roof Trusses” - Truss Plate institute, 2400 East Devon, Des Plaines,
Illinois 60018, or other Standard approved by the Authority.

(e) Where trusses are to support mechanical or other equipment, the

trusses shall be designed for such additional load.

1406 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS

1406.1 Roof Joists and Rafters

(a) Maximum spans for roof joists and rafters shall be in accordance
with "Span Tables for Joists and Rafters", as published by the
National Forest Products Association, or other acceptable design
method.

(b) Joists shall be supported laterally at the ends by solid blocks or

diagonal struts. Such bridging may be omitted- where ends of joists
are nailed to a header, band joist or to an adjoining stud.

(c) Notches 6ti the ends of joists shall not exceed one-fourth (1/4) the
depth. Holes bored for pipes or cable shall be on the neutral axis and
at least two (2) inches from the top or bottom of the joist. The
diameter of any such hole shall not exceed one-third (1/3) the depth
of the joist. Holes shall not be less than three diameters apart.
Notches for pipes in the top or bottom of joists shall not exceed
one-sixth (1/6) the depth and shall not be located in the middle
one-third (1/3) of the span.

1406.2 Roof Sheathing

(a) All rafters and roof joists shall be covered with sheathing such as:

(14-7)
 1. Lumber

Solid sheathing - Wood boards of three quarter (3/4) inch (net)

minimum thickness

2. Plywood

Applied in accordance with the provisions of Table 14-1(b).

3. Insulating Roof Deck

Fiberboard insulating roof deck not less than one (1) inch nominal
thickness.

(b) Joints in lumber sheathing shall occur over supports unless end-notched
lumber or approved clips are used, in which case each piece shall bear on
at least two rafters.

1406.3 Floor Joists

a) Maximum spans for floor joists shall be in accordance with the "Span
Tables for joists and Rafters", as provided by the National Forest
Products Association; or may be designed in accordance with other
standard criteria.

b) Spans for field-glued plywood lumber floor systems using adhesives shall
be as set forth in "APA Glued System", as published by the America
Plywood Association. Adhesives for the APA Glued Floor System shall
be those meeting the requirements of AFG-01, "Adhesives for Field
Gluing Plywood to Wood Framing", as published by the American
Plywood Association.

c) Except where supported on a one by four inch (1" x 4") ribbon strip and
nailed to the adjoining stud, the ends of each joist shall have not less than
one and one-half (1-1 /2) inches of bearing on wood or metal nor less than
three (3) inches of masonry.

d) Floor joist having a depth to thickness ratio exceeding six and the design
live load is in excess of forty (40) pounds per square foot, shall be
supported laterally by bridging or blocking installed at intervals not
exceeding eight (8) feet.

e) Joists shall be supported laterally at the ends by solid blocks or diagonal

struts except where the ends of joists are nailed to a beam (wood or steel
with an attached nailer) header, band joists or to an adjoining stud.

f) Notches on the ends of joists shall not exceed one-fourth (1/4) the depth.
Holes bored for pipes or cables shall not be within two (2) inches of the
top or bottom of the joist and the diameter of any such hole shall not
exceed one-third (1/3) the depth of the joist. Notches for pipes in the top
or bottom of joists shall not exceed one-sixth (1/6) the depth and shall not
be located in the middle one-third (1/3) of the span.

(14-8)
 g) Joists framing from opposite sides of a beam, girder or partition shall be
lapped at least four inches and fastened, or the opposing joists shall be tied
together in an approved manner.

h) Joists framing into the side of a wood girder shall be supported by framing
anchors, on ledger strips not less than two (2) by two (2) inches, or by other
approved methods.

Table 14-1 (a)

Spans of Plywood Sub-floor

Continuous over Two or More Supports

Panel Identification Index Maximum Span (in)

32/16,36/16 16
42/20 20
48/24 24

Table 14-1 (b)

Allowable Spans for Plywood Roof Sheathing Continuous

over Two or More Supports (in.)

Maximum span if block or Maximum span without edge

Panel Identification Index other edge support (in.) support (in.)
24/0 (1/2” only) 24 20
30/12 30 26
32/16 30 28
36/16 32 30
42/20 36 32
48/24 42 36

(14-9)
Notes:

(1) These values apply for Structural 1 and 11, C-D Sheathing end C-C grades only. Spans shall be limited to values
shown because of possible effect of concentrated loads.

Edges may be blocked with lumber or other approved type of edge support.

(2) Identification Index appears on all panels in the construction grades listed in footnote (1).

(3) For roof live load of 40 psf, decrease span by 13 percent or use panel with next greater identification index.

(4) Plywood edges shall have approved tongue and groove joints or shall be supported with blocking, unless
one-fourth (1/4) inch minimum thickness underlayment is installed, or finished floor is 25/32” wood strip.
Allowable uniform load based on deflection of 1/360 of span is 165 psf.

(5) For joists spaced 24” on plywood sheathing with Identification Index numbers 42/20 or greater can be used for
subfloors when supporting 1-1 /2” lightweight concrete.

Table 14-2

Allowable Spans for Plywood

Combination Subfloor-Underlayment

Plywood Continuous over Two or More Spans and Face Grain Perpendicular to Supports –
Thickness in inches
Species Groups Maximum Spacing of Joists (inches)
16 20 24
1 1/2 5/8 3/4
2,3 5/8 3/4 7/8
4 3/4 7/8 1

Notes:

(1) Applicable to Underlayment grade, C-C ( Plugged) and all grades of sanded exterior type plywood. Spans
limited to values shown because of possible effect of concentrated loads. Allowable uniform load based on
deflection of 1/360 of span is 125 psf. Plywood edges shall have approved tongue and groove joints or shall be
supported with blocking , unless one-fourth (1/4) inch minimum thickness underlayment is installed, or finish
floor is 25/32” wood strip.

(2) If wood strips are perpendicular to supports, thickness shown for 16” and 20” spans may be used on 24” spans.
Except for 1/2 inch.

(3) Underlayment Grade and C-C (plugged) panels may be of nominal thickness 1/32 inch less than the nominal
thickness shown when marked with the reduced thickness.

(14-10)
 Table 14-3

Minimum Thickness of Lumber Sub-flooring

Joist spacing (in.)* Minimum net thickness for lumber placed (in.)
Perpendicular to joists Diagonally to joists
24 1-1/16 3/4
16 5/8 5/8
12 5/8 5/8

Note: *Joists in sub -flooring shall occur over supports unless end-matched lumber is used, in which case each piece
shall bear on at least two (2) joists.

1406.4 Sub-flooring

a) All floor joists shall be covered with sub-flooring such as lumber,

plywood or particle board. Sub-flooring may be omitted when
tongue and groove boards are used as per 1406.4 (d)

b) The minimum thickness of lumber used as sub-flooring shall be in

accordance with Table 14-3.

(c) Plywood shall be applied in accordance with the provisions of

Table 14-2.

(d) Sub-flooring may be omitted when joist spacing does not exceed
sixteen (16) inches and nominal one (1) inch tongue and grooved
wood strip flooring is applied perpendicular to the joists.

(e) When resilient flooring is applied directly to plywood Sub-floor, it

shall be applied in accordance with the provisions of Table 14-3 and
fastened in accordance with a standard fastening system.

(f) Particleboard should be applied in accordance with the provisions of

an acceptable fastening system in accordance with NPA - 1969
"How to Install Particleboard Underlayment”. When resilient
flooring is applied directly to the particle board sub-floor, it shall be
applied in accordance with the provisions of Table 14-4 and
fastened in accordance with a standard fastening system.

(14-11)
 Table 14-4

Allowable Spans for Particleboard Subfloor

and Combined Subfloor-underlayment (1), (4)

Grade Thickness Maximum spacing of supports (2),(3)

Subfloor (in.) Combined subfloor
underlayment (in.)
2-M-W 5/8 16 16
2-M-W 21/32 16 16
3/4 19 19
2-M-F 3/4 19 19
2-M-F 3/4 19 19

(1) All panels continuous over two (2) or more support and the tongue-end-groove panels
are installed with the long dimension perpendicular to supports.

(2) Uniform deflection limitation: 1/360th of the span under 100 psf minimum load.

(3) Edges shall have tongue-and-groove joints or shall be supported with blocking unless
1/4” minimum thickness underlayment is installed, or finish floor is 25/32 wood strip.

(4) Floor sheathing conforming with this Table shall be deemed to meet the design criteria
of 1406.4

1406.5 Post and Beam Framing

a) Where post and beam framing is used in lieu of stud and joist
Construction, the posts shall be located to support the beams
above and shall be designed in accordance with sound
engineering principles.

b) Intermediate framing shall be attached to the posts and braced so

that the frame is capable of accepting lateral loads in addition to
loads transferred by the sheeting.

1406.6 Stair Framing

a) Stair framing shall be supported adequately on floor

framing or on walls or partitions.

b) Except in public stairs where the number and size of

stringers shall be determined by engineering analysis, two
(2) rough stringers shall be provided for each set of stairs,
cut to receive finish treads and risers of uniform width and
height.

(14-12)
 C) Unless stringers are supported on partitions, and except for open
staircases, the minimum effective depth at each notch shall be not less
than three and one-half (3-1/2) inches.

1406.7 Joists Supporting Partitions

Bearing partitions parallel to joists shall be supported on beams, girders, walls,

or other bearing partitions. Bearing partitions perpendicular to joists shall not
be offset from supporting girders, wall or partitions more than the joist depth,
unless such joists are of sufficient size carry the additional load.

1406.8 Exterior Wall Framing

Stud size and spacing of studs in one-and-two storey buildings shall be not
less than two (2) by four (4) inches with the wide face perpendicular to wall.
In three-storey buildings, studs in the first storey shall be not less than three
(3) by four (4) inches or two (2) by six (6) inches. Studs shall be spaced not
more than as shown in Table 14-5. However, the walls shall be designed to
resist the dead and live loads as per Section 12.

Table 14-5

Maximum Spacing of Studs (inches)

Stud size (in.) Supporting roof Supporting 1 floor, Supporting 2

and ceiling only Roof and ceiling Floors, roof and
ceiling
2x 4 24 16 16
3x 4 24 24 16
4x 4 24 24 16
2x 6 24 24 16

1406.9 Bracing of Exterior Stud Walls

a) Not less than three (3) studs shall be installed at every corer of an
exterior wall, except that a third stud may be omitted through the use
of continuous wood spacer or backup cleat of 3/8 inch thick plywood,
1 inch thick lumber or other approved devices which will serve as an
adequate backing for the attachment of facing materials.

(14-13)
b) Stud walls shall be braced by one of the following methods:

1. Nominal one (1) inch by four (4) inch continuous diagonal strips set into the face of
the-studs and top and bottom plates at each corner of building.

2. Wood boards of five-eighths (5/8) inch (net) minimum thickness, applied diagonally.

3. Wood sheathing panels two (2) by eight (8) feet of five-eighths (5/8) inch minimum
thickness applied horizontally.

4. Plywood sheathing panels not less than forty-eight (48) inches wide and ninety six
(96) inches long applied vertically or horizontally.

c) Sheathing shall be applied on the exterior walls of all Type 5 buildings (Table 3-2), more
than one (1) storey in height except when back plastered stucco construction is used.
However, where sheathing is not being used the method of applying the waterproof wall
finish shall be carried out to the approval of the Director.

d) Sheathing where required for exterior walls, shall be applied solidly over the wall surface
and shall be one or more of the following materials and shall be installed in accordance with
the manufacturers, recommendations:

1. Wood sheathing panels five eighths (5/8) inch minimum thickness.

2. Plywood complying with Table 14-5 shall be not less than five-sixteenths (5/16) inch
thick for sixteen (16) inch stud spacing or not less than three-eighths (3/8) inch for
twenty-four (24) inch stud spacing. Plywood of exterior type complying with 1406.8,
may also serve as siding.

(14-14)
 Table 14-6

Allowable Spans for Plywood

Wall Sheathing

Maximum stud spacing and construction (in)

Panel identification Exterior covering nailed to:
Stud Sheathing
5/16 16 16
3/8 and 1/2 24 16
3 ply 24 24
1/2 (4 and 5 ply) 24 24

Notes: a) When plywood sheathing is used, building paper and diagonal wall bracing can be omitted.
b) When siding such as shingles is nailed only to the plywood sheathing, apply plywood with face grain
across studs.

1406.10 Interior Bearing Partitions

a) Studs in one (1) two (2) storey buildings shall be not less than two
(2) x four (4) inches with the wide face perpendicular to the
partitions. In three (3) storey buildings, studs in the first storey
shall not be less than three (3) by four (4) inch or two (2) by six (6)
inches.

b) Studs shall be spaced not more than shown in Table 14-5.

c) Headers shall be provided over each opening in interior bearing

partitions.

d) Studs shall be capped with double top plates installed to provide

overlapping at corners and at intersections with exterior walls. End
joints in double top plates shall be offset at least twenty four (24)
inches. For platform frame construction, studs shall rest on a single
bottom plate.

Exception: A single top plate may be installed but must be designed so as to

provide continuity of the capping.

1406.11 Exterior Wall Coverings

Exterior wall coverings of other than the following shall be of material

approved for exterior use and shall be applied in accordance with the
manufactures’ recommendations when not otherwise covered in this Code.
Exterior wall coverings shall provide weather protection for the building at
the walls.

(14-15)
(a) Weather-boarding. Wood siding patterns known as rustic
drop siding or shiplap shall have an average thickness in
place of not less than nineteen-thirty seconds (19/32)
inches and shall have a minimum thickness of not less
than three-eighths (3/8) inches. Bevel siding shall have a
minimum thickness measured at the butt section of not
less than seven-sixteenths (7/16) inches and a tip
thickness of not less than three-sixteenths (3/16) inches.
Siding of lesser dimensions may be used provided such
wall covering is placed over sheathing which conforms
to the provisions of 1406.9.

(b) Wood Shingles or Shakes. Wood shingles or shakes

attached to sheathing other than wood or plywood
shall be secured with approved
mechanically-bonding nails or by corrosive
resisting common nails on shingle nailing boards
securely nailed to each stud with two 8d nails.
Wood shingles or shakes may be applied over
fiberboard shingle backer and fiberboard sheathing
with approved non-corrosion annular grooved
nails or may be nailed directly to fiberboard
sheathing with non-corrosion annular grooved
nails. The minimum thickness of wood shingles or
shakes between nailing boards shall be not less
than three-eighths (3/8) inches.

(c) Plywood. Plywood shall be of the exterior type and

shall have a minimum thickness of three-eighths
(3/8) inches. All plywood joints shall be backed
solidly with nailing pieces not less than two (2)
inches in width, unless wood or plywood sheathing
is used, or joints are lapped horizontally, or
otherwise made waterproof.

(d) Stucco. Stucco or exterior plaster shall conform to

requirement of Section 15.

(e) Metal. Exterior wall coverings may be of formed

metal not less in thickness than 18 gauge. For
aluminum siding, the instructions of the
manufacturers are to followed.

(d) Flashing shall be provided as necessary to prevent

the entrance of water at openings in, or projections
through exterior walls; at intersections of exterior
wall coverings of different materials, unless such
materials are provided with self-flashing joints; at
other points subject to the entrance of water.
Caulking shall be provided where such flashing is
determined by the Director to be impractical.

(14-16)
 1406.12 Roof Covering

(a) Any roof covering permitted in this Code may be applied to

Dwellings. Whenever composition roofing is used, solid sheathing
shall be applied.

(b) Flashings shall be placed around openings and extensions of

mechanical appliances or equipment through the roof and
otherwise as necessary to provide adequate drainage.

(c) All roof coverings shall be installed in accordance with standard

approved practices and in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.

(d) The fire resistive rating of the roof covering shall be approved by
the Director for the specific application desired.

1407 VENTILATION

(a) The space between ceiling joists and roof rafters shall be effectively
ventilated. Openings shall be located to provide effective
cross-ventilation, and such openings shall be covered with a
corrosion-resistant mesh.

(b) The space between the bottom of wood-floor joists and the ground
of any building except such space as is occupied by a basement or
cellar, shall have ventilating openings through foundation walls,
and such openings shall be covered with a corrosion-resistant wire
mesh. Where practicable, ventilating openings shall be arranged on
three sides. The minimum total area of ventilating openings shall
be 2 sq.ft. for each 15’0" of exterior wall. Such openings need not
be placed in the front of the building.

(c) Where wood-floor joists are used, there shall be not less than 18"
distance between the bottom of such floor joists and the ground
beneath.

(14-17)
 SECTION 15

CONCRETE BLOCK AND MASONRY CONSTRUCTION

Contents

1501 GENERAL

1502 QUALITY, TESTS AND APPROVALS

1502.1 General
1502.2 Brick
1502.3 Hollow and Concrete Masonry Units
1502.4 Mortar and Grout Materials

1503 WORKING STRESSES

1503.1 General Requirements
1503.2 Working Stresses in Un-reinforced Masonry
1503.3 Higher Working Stresses
1503.4 Allowable Stresses in Composite Walls
1503.5 Allowable Stresses in Plain Concrete
1503.6 Shear
1503.7 Tension
1503.8 Concentrated loads

1504 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS

1504.1 General
1504.2 Walls
1504.3 Stiffener Columns
1504.4 Tie Beams or Belt Courses
1504.5 Parapet walls
1504.6 Piers
1504.7 Brick and Stone Walls
1504.8 Partitions
1504.9 Decorative Masonry Screens

1505 CHANGE IN WALL THICKNESS

1506 CHASES

1507 SUPPORTED STRUCTURAL METERS

1508 SUPPORT ON WOOD

(15-1)
1509 ARCHES AND LINTELS

1510 CONSTRUCTION PRECAUTIONS

1511 GROUTED AND FILLED MASONRY

1512 MORTAR AND GROUT

Table 15-1 Minimum Compressive Strength of Mortar

Table 15-2 Types of Mortar Required

Table 15-3 Mortar Proportions by Volume

Table 15-3 (A) Properties of Concrete In-fill

Table 15-4 Allowable Compressive Stresses for Empirical Design of Masonry

Table 15-5 Specified Compressive Strength of Masonry based on Specifying the Compressive
Strength of Masonry Units

(15-2)
 SECTION 15

CONCRETE BLOCK AND MASONRY CONSTRUCTION

1501 GENERAL

(a) All masonry construction shall conform to the provisions of this

Section and other applicable Sections of this Code. The principal
reference Codes and Standards are CUBiC Part 2 Section 4 -
Structural Requirements - Block Masonry, and ACI 530-92 -
Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.

(b) In all cases masonry shall be of adequate thickness, strength and

proportions to support all superimposed loads within the allowable
working stresses prescribed.

(c) All masonry materials are required to meet the specifications as

outlined in Section 15, Sub-section 1502. If the Director has reason
to doubt that the materials meet the applicable specifications he
may require tests on the materials.

(d) Masonry units may be reused when clean, whole and conforming to
the other requirements of this Section, except that the allowable
working stresses shall be fifty (50) percent of those permitted for
new masonry units.

Masonry units to be reused as structural units in areas subject to the

action of the weather or soil shall not be permitted unless
representative samples are tested for compliance with the applicable
requirements of Section 1502.

(e) The wall thickness and other specified dimensions are nominal
dimensions. The actual masonry or wall dimensions may vary from
the nominal dimensions by not more than one-half (1/2) inch.

(f) Where masonry units are used as veneer, weep holes shall be
provided at four (4) feet on centers by omitting mortar in the
vertical joints at the bottom course of the veneer or at the lintels in
multistory buildings. A shield or insect barrier shall be provided
having openings or louvers one-sixteenth (1/16) inch or less which
drains and dries the inner cavity but will retain poured insulation.

(g) All brick masonry units, except hollow clay and shale brick, Shall
be laid with full head and bed joints and all interior Vertical joints
that are designed to receive mortar shall be filled. The average
thickness of head and bed joints shall not exceed one-half (1/2)
inch.

(15-3)
1502 QUALITY, TESTS AND APPROVALS

1502.1 General

(a) Quality. The quality of materials assembled into masonry and the
method and manner of their assembly shall conform to the
requirements of 1502.

(b) Other material of masonry, other than set forth herein, which is
incombustible and otherwise sufficiently embodies the
characteristics and satisfies the requirements of one of the materials
herein may be specified by the designer of the building, but the use
of such material shall be subject to the approval of the Director.

1502.2 Brick

The structural use of brick shall be avoided except where special provision
can be made for reinforcement and/or for composite behavior with other
members of materials such as steel or reinforced concrete.

(a) General. Bricks shall include masonry units up to 4-1/4" thick, 4-1/4"
wide and 8-3/4" long not less than 75 percent solid.

(b) Tests. Tests shall be made in accordance with BS 1257, or other

standard approved by the Director.

(c) Quality. Bricks shall conform to the relevant British or American

Standard.

1502.3 Hollow and Solid Concrete Masonry Units

(a) Hollow concrete masonry units shall be of a quality at least equal to

that required by “Specifications for Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete
Masonry Units, ASTM C90", or "Specifications for Solid
Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units, ASTM C145", when used for
bearing walls or piers or when in contact with the ground or exposed
to the weather, or equal to the “Specifications for Hollow
Non-Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units” ASTM C129 when
used for non-load bearing purposes and not exposed to the weather.

(b) Structural concrete filler-block or floor tile when included in strength

calculations in ribbed floor construction shall have webs and shells
not less than one inch thick, unless otherwise designed, and shall
develop an average compressive strength on the net area not less
than that of the rib concrete.

(c) Concrete in-fill shall be in accordance with Table 15-3 (A) or with
CUBiC Table 2.405.1.

(15-4)
 1502.4 Mortar and Grout Materials, Proportions and Workability.

(a) Mortar and its ingredients shall be of a quality at least equal to that
required by “Standard Specifications for Mortar for Units Masonry",
ASTM C270, or “Standard Specifications for Mortar and Grout for
Reinforced Masonry", ASTM C476 or the relevant British standard.

(b) Masonry cement shall be of a quality at least equal to that required

by "Masonry Cement, ASTM C91”.

(c) The type of mortar used for any specific job shall be as required in
Table 15-2.

(d) Grout for non-reinforced and reinforced masonry shall conform to

"Standard Specifications for Mortar and Grout for Reinforced
Masonry”, ASTM C476.

(e) Where mortar type is determined in accordance with Table 15-1 the
volume of aggregate in mortar shall be not less than two and
one-fourth (2-1/4) times but not more than three times the volume
of cementitious material. When mortar type is determined by
proportions, the aggregate ratio shall comply with Table 15-3.

1503 WORKING STRESSES

1503.1 General Requirements

(a) In determining the stresses in masonry, the effects of all loads and
conditions of loading and the influence of all forces affecting the
design and strength of the several parts shall be taken into account.

(b) The thickness of masonry walls shall be sufficient at all points to

withstand all vertical and horizontal loads as specified in Section
12.

(c) Stresses shall be calculated on actual rather than nominal

dimensions.

1503.2 Working Stresses in Un-reinforced Masonry

Except as may be permitted by the Director on the basis of a rational

engineering design, the compressive stresses in un-reinforced masonry shall
not exceed the values given in Table 15-4.

(15-5)
1503.3 Higher Working Stresses

Higher stresses than herein specified may be used, but only if it is clearly
established to the satisfaction of the Director, by tests, or other approved
evidence, that material of a higher grade or a superior workmanship than is
generally provided in accepted practice will be employed under approved
inspection. Higher stresses, however, shall not be used unless approval is
given by the Director in writing.

1503.4 Allowable Stresses in Composite Walls

In composite walls or other structural members composed of different kinds

or grade of masonry units or mortars, the maximum stress shall not exceed
the allowable stress for the weakest of the units and mortars of which the
wall or member is composed.

1503.5 Allowable Stresses in Plain Concrete

Unless designed in accordance with the provisions of Section 16, structural

members of plain concrete shall be proportioned for allowable stresses not to
exceed twenty-five (25) percent for compression and three (3) percent for
tension in extreme fiber in flexure of the compressive strength of the
concrete. When the ratio of height to thickness exceeds ten (10), the
percentages for compression stress shall be reduced proportionately to
eighteen percent for a ratio of height to the thickness of 20.

1503.6 Shear

The shear in unit masonry shall not exceed one tenth the allowable
compressive stress.

1503.7 Tension

Un-reinforced unit masonry shall be assumed to have no value in resisting

tension.

1503.8 Concentrated Loads

Walls of hollow masonry units shall not directly support concentrated loads.
Such loads shall be carried by concrete padstones or capping beams.

(15-6)
1504 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS

1504.1 General

(a) Masonry walls of hollow or solid units or plain concrete shall be

constructed as specified in Part 2 Section 2,400 of CUBiC, or in
accordance with alternative rational design and detailing based on the
fundamental principles of structural engineering.

(b) Reinforced concrete shall comply with the requirements of Section 16

of this Code.

(c) Part 2 Section 2.445 of CUBiC is applicable for the construction of

single or two storey buildings to resist seismic and hurricane loads.

1504.2 Walls

(a) Load-hearing walls of unit masonry shall have a minimum thickness

of 6" except as otherwise approved by the Director on the basis of
engineering calculations showing that the wall can resist adequately
the calculated vertical and horizontal forces.

(b) No roof or other members shall be so placed that they will develop
direct horizontal thrust on walls unless such walls are specifically
designed to withstand such thrust.

(c) The maximum area of wall panels of 6" or 8" thick unit masonry, as
measured between the concrete members which frame the panel such
as the beams and its columns, shall not exceed 256 sq.ft. unless
otherwise approved by the Director on the basis of engineering
calculations provided by the design engineer.

(d) For resistance to seismic and lateral forces, walls of hollow concrete
block shall be designed in accordance with CUBiC Part 2, Section 4 -
Structural Design Requirements Block Masonry, or in accordance
with any other Code approved by the Director.

(e) Wall reinforcement shall be as required by Seismic Performance

Category C for buildings in seismic zones with peak accelerations of
0.2g to 0.3g Police stations and buildings housing emergency medical
facilities and other buildings as required by the Director shall be
designed in accordance with Seismic Performance Category D. (See
CUBiC 2.424).

(f) A check shall be made to establish if the minimum reinforcement in

block walls is adequate for walls under wind or earthquake loads.

(15-7)
1504.3 Stiffener columns

(a) Concrete stiffener columns shall be required in walls of unit masonry

as follows:

(i) The maximum area of wall panels of 6” or 8” thick concrete

block as measured between the concrete members which frame
the panels, such as the beams and stiffener columns shall be
256 square feet.

(ii) At intervals not exceeding 20’ 0” between columns.

(iii) At corners and junctions of load bearing walls, unless the walls
are properly bonded into one another and no opening occurs
within 1’ 4” of the nearest wall face at the corner.

(iv) At the end of load bearing walls

(v) Notwithstanding the above, concrete stiffener columns shall

also be required adjacent to any wall opening if the omission
of the columns would result in stresses in the block work
greater than that permitted under 1503.4 at the ends of free
standing walls.

(b) Structurally designed columns may be substituted for the stiffener

columns herein required. When interior cross-walls are properly
bonded into the external wall these may be assumed to act as ties to
the columns, provided no openings occur in either the exterior walls
or the interior cross walls within 1’ 4” of the nearest wall face.

Note: A corner or junction shall be considered to be properly bonded

if all holes in all hollow blocks forming the junction are filled
with concrete as per CUBiC Part 2 Section 4 Table 2.405.1,
and reinforced with No 4 bars. Concreting of the cavities shall
be in accordance with CUBiC 2.409.17.

(c) Stiffener columns shall not be less than 8” in width unless otherwise
approved by the Director. Stiffener columns having an unbraced
height exceeding 15’ 0” shall be not less in thickness than the wall and
not less than 9”. The column shall be designed to resist applicable
lateral loads based on rational analysis. The unbraced height shall be
taken at the point of positive lateral support.

(d) Stiffener columns shall be reinforced in accordance with Part 2

Section 4 of CUBiC (2.413.7) and with not less than 0.010 times the
gross cross-sectional area of the concrete, nor less than four 1/2”
diameter bars, with 1/4” diameter links spaced at 12” centers
generally and in accordance with 2.413.8 of CUBiC. Vertical
reinforcing shall be tied to the footing and splices shall be lapped 30
bar diameters. The cover to the reinforcement (including links) shall
be not less than 1”.

(15-8)
 (e) The concrete stiffener columns set forth herein are a minimum to limit
masonry panel areas and provide an integrated framework for masonry.
The spacing of concrete columns for skeleton frame construction may
exceed the spacing herein set forth provided the masonry panels have
an area of less than 256 sq.ft, and the structural system is designed to
transmit horizontal wind loads to the columns.

(f) Concrete stiffener columns designed to limit masonry panel areas may
be offset at tie beams or other horizontal members to avoid openings,
but the maximum spacing shall not be exceeded.

(g) Concrete stiffener columns in load-bearing walls shall normally be

poured only after the masonry units are in place. Where masonry
walls in skeleton frame construction are laid up after the frame has
been erected they shall be properly tied to the frame with vertical
bars at 16” centers and horizontal bars at 24" centers. Where
structural steel members are fire-protected with masonry units the
panel walls shall be bonded into such units.

(h) For small masonry buildings the requirements set forth in CUBiC Part
2 Section 4 or those set forth in the Building Guidelines apply.

1504.4 Tie Beams or Belt Courses

(a) Tie beams of reinforced concrete shall be placed in all walls of unit
masonry, at each floor or roof level and at such intermediate levels as
may be required to limit the vertical heights of the masonry units to
12’ 0”. For external walls of 6” concrete block the vertical height shall
be no greater than 9’ 0”.

(b) A tie beam shall be not less in dimension than required for the
conditions of loading nor less than be following minimums: the width
of a tie beam shall be not less than the width of the wall supporting it;
the depth of such a beam shall be not less than 8”.

(c) The tie beam shall be continuous. Continuity of the reinforcing in

straight runs shall be provided by lapping splices not less than 30
diameters for deformed bars. Continuity shall be ensured at corners by
providing positive anchorage to the main reinforcement. Continuity at
columns shall be provided by continuing horizontal reinforcing
through columns or by bending horizontal reinforcing in the columns a
distance of 30 diameters.

(15-9)
 (d) Changes in level of tie beams shall be made at columns.

(e) A tie beam may follow the rake of a gable or shed end.

(f) The concrete in tie beams shall be bonded to the masonry units
immediately below and shall not be separated therefrom by wood, felt,
or any other material which may prevent bond.

1504.5 Parapet Walls

Masonry parapet walls shall be reinforced with minimum stiffener columns as

previously specified and shall be coped with a concrete beam not less than 24
sq.in. in cross-section, reinforced with two 3/8" diameter reinforcing bars.

A parapet wall exceeding 5' 0" in height above a tie beam or other point of
lateral support shall be specifically designed to resist horizontal wind and
other loads.

1504.6 Piers

(a) In any section of a load-bearing masonry wall where openings are

arranged to leave a load-bearing section of wall less than 16” wide,
such section shall be of steel or reinforced concrete.

(b) Isolated masonry piers shall be so constructed that the height of any
such pier shall not exceed ten times the least dimension.

1504.7 Brick and Stone Walls

Load bearing walls of brick and stone shall be laterally supported by

stiffener columns and tie beams, or the equivalent thereof, as detailed in
1504 and shall meet these additional requirements:

(1) In all brick walls at least every sixth course on both sides of the wall
shall be a header course or there shall be at least one full header in
every 72 sq.in of each wall surface. In walls more than 12” thick, the
inner joints of header courses shall be covered with another header
course which shall break joints with the course below.

(2) Rubble stone walls shall be 4” thicker than is required for solid brick
or concrete walls of the same respective heights but no part shall be
less than 16” thick.

(15-10)
 1504.8 Partitions

(a) The requirements specified herein shall apply to non load

bearing partitions, ether than fire walls, of unit masonry
construction.

(b) The lateral distance between vertical supports of non load

bearing interior partitions of unit masonry shall not exceed 36
times the actual thickness of the partition, excluding plaster,
and the height shall not exceed the length.

(c) A partition which does not extend to full storey height shall be
capped with a concrete beam at least 4” high and of width at
least equal to the width of the partition. The beam shall be
reinforced with a single 3/8” diameter bar to which all vertical
reinforcing bars shall be anchored.

1504.9 Decorative Masonry Screens

Decorative grills or screens constructed of masonry laid with cells

through the wall shall be non-load-bearing and shall have units so
bonded and reinforced as to resist all over-turning moments.

1505 CHANGE IN WALL THICKNESS

Except for permissible chases and recesses, walls shall not vary in
thickness between their lateral supports. Where cavity walls or walls
of hollow masonry units are decreased in thickness, a course of
solid masonry not less than four (4) inches in thickness shall be
interposed between the wall below and the thinner wall above, or
the hollow units in the top course of the thicker wall shall be filled
solidly with concrete (of 1:3:6 mix) or with Type S mortar or grout
in accordance with ASTM 476C.

1506 CHASES

(a) Chases in Masonry walls shall not be deeper than one-third

(1/3) the wall thickness, nor longer than four (4) feet
horizontally, except that chases below windows may equal
the width of the opening above.

(b) No chase shall be cut or built in an eight (8) inch wall or

within the required area of a pier, except that in buildings
of residential occupancy not more than two (2) stories in
height, chases not more than four (4) inches deep may be
built in eight (8) inch walls.

(c) Chases shall not be cut in cavity walls, hollow walls of

hollow units but, when permitted, may be built in.

(15-11)
1507 SUPPORTED STRUCTURAL MEMBERS

When combustible structural members frame into walls of thickness not

greater than twelve (12) inches, they shall project not more than four (4)
inches into the wall and shall be so spaced that the distance between
embedded ends is not less than four (4) inches. The space above, below and
between such members shall be filled solidly with mortar, grout, concrete, or
equivalent fire-resistive material to a depth of not less than four (4) inches on
all sides of the members.

1508 SUPPORT ON WOOD

a) Masonry shall not be supported on combustible construction, except

that prefabricated partitions weighing not more than thirty (30) pounds
per square foot, properly strapped or reinforced and provided with
proper nailing devices for attachment, may be supported on
combustible construction provided the supporting construction has
been designed to carry such loads.

b) Concrete decks for roofs or floors may be supported on timber

columns provided such decks and their supporting members have bean
designed in accordance with accepted engineering practices and that
special provision is made to provide resistance to wind and earthquake
forces.

c) When exposed to the weather the wood supporting members shall be of

approved wood of natural decay resistance and pressure treated against
termites and shall be separated from the concrete by the use of a
membrane covering.

1509 ARCHES AND LINTELS

The masonry above openings shall be supported by well buttressed arches or

lintels of non combustible materials which shall bear on the wall at each end
for not less than four (4) inches. In addition, the bearing area shall be
sufficient to prevent a concentration of compressive stresses greater than those
allowed in Table 15-4.

1510 CONSTRUCTION PRECAUTIONS

a) Except when carried independently by girders at each floor, a masonry

wall shall not be built up more than twenty-five (25) feet in height in
advance of other walls of the building. Walls shall be adequately
braced during erection.

b) Masonry walls in locations where they may be exposed to high winds

during erection shall not be built higher than ten (10) times their
thickness unless adequately braced or until provision is made for the
prompt installation of permanent bracing at the floor or roof level
immediately above the story under construction.

(15-12)
 c) Back fill shall not be placed against foundations walls until they have
been braced to withstand the horizontal pressure.

1511 GROUTED AND FILLED MASONRY

Grouted and filled masonry blocks is a form of construction made with clay,
or concrete units in which the interior vertical spaces are filled with grout.
The interior vertical spaces shall consist of continuous cavity space between
unobstructed vertical cells of hollow units. Grouted masonry shall conform
to all requirements this Code.

1512 MORTAR AND GROUT

(a) Mortar shall conform to "Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry
ASTM C270". Grout shall conform to the applicable requirements
of "Specifications for Mortar and Grout for Reinforced Masonry -
ASTM C476," or shall be Type M or Type S mortar to which
sufficient water has been added to produce pouring consistency.
Mortar and grout for reinforced masonry shall be in accordance with
ASTM C476.

(b) Where the minimum continuous clear opening of a grout space

exceeds six (6) inches, it may be filled and treated as unreinforced
monolithic concrete. Masonry shall be laid in mortar of the types
specified in Tables 15-2 and 15-3.

Table 15-1

Minimum Compressive Strength of Mortar

Type Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 days (psi)

M 2,500
S 1,800
N 750
O 350

Note: Average of three 2 inch cubes of laboratory prepared mixed mortar, in accordance with ASTM C270. “Standard
Specifications for Mortar for Unit Masonry”.

(15-13)
 Table 15-2

Types of Mortar Required

Type of Masonry Type of mortar permitted

Foundations: (below grade masonry)

Footings M or S
Walls of Solid Units M, S or N
Walls of Hollow Units M or S
Hollow Walls M or S
Masonry: Other Than Foundation Masonry

Piers of Solid Masonry M, S or N

Piers of Hollow Units M or S
Walls of Solid Masonry M, S, N or O
Walls of Hollow Masonry M, S or N
Hollow Walls and Cavity Walls

(a) Design Wind Pressure Exceeds 20 psf. M or S

(b) Design Wind Pressure 20 psf or less M,S or N

Glass Block Masonry M, S or N

Non-Load Bearing Partition M, S, N, O

Fire brick Refractory air setting mortar

Masonry Other Than Above M, S or N

None: type S mortar is to be preferred whenever Type M mortar is not required in order to meet the
structural requirements.

(15-14)
 Table 15-3

Mortar Proportions by Volume

Minimum Compressive Mortar Mix Minimum Compressive

Strength of concrete block on (Cement: lime: sand) Strength of mortar (psi)
Gross Cross Sectional Area.
(psi)
1,500 1:0-1/2:3 2,500
1,000 1:0-1/2:4 1,800
*700 1:0-1/2:4 750

Note:

(a) The compressive strengths used have been converted from SI units. Tables 2.403.1 and 2.404.1 of Part 2 Section 4
of CUBiC should be read for the compressive strengths based on test results.

*(b) This grade of concrete blocks to be used for non-loadbearing walls only.

(c) For the purpose of these specifications, the weight of one (1) cubic foot of the respective materials used shall be
considered to be as follows:

Portland Cement 94 pounds

Hydrated Lime 40 pounds
Sand 80 pounds of dry sand

Table 15-3 (A)

Properties of In-fill Concrete

Minimum Compressive Concrete Mix for Cavity infill Minimum Compressive

Strength on 6” cubes at 28 (cement: sand: coarse Strength of Concrete Block
days aggregate)
2,300 1:3:6 1,000
3,300 1:2:4 1,800

Note: Aggregate size should not be greater than 3/4”. See CUBiC Part 2 Section 4.

(15-15)
 Table 15-4

Allowable Compressive Stresses for Empirical Design of Masonry*

Allowable compressive stresses gross cross section area

Construction: compressive Strength of
(psi)
Unit, gross area, (psi)
Type M or S Mortar Type N Mortar
Solid masonry of brick and other solid units of
clay or shale, sand lime or concrete brick

8,000 or greater 350 300

4,500 225 200
2,500 160 140
1,500 115 100
Grouted solid masonry of clay or shale, sand
lime or concrete

4,500 or greater 225 200

2,500 160 140
1,500 115 100
Masonry of solid concrete masonry units

3,000 or greater 225 200

2,000 160 140
1,200 115 100
Masonry of hollow load bearing units

2,000 or greater 140 120

1,500 115 100
1,000 75 70
700 60 55
Piers of hollow units, cellular spaces filled as in
Section 15. 95 90
Hollow walls (non-composite masonry bonded)

Solid units

2,500 or greater 160 140

1,500 115 100
Hollow units 75 70

*Masonry Structures Building Code (ACI 530-92/ASCE 5-92/TMS 402-92)

Note: Linear interpolation for determining allowable stresses for masonry units having compressive
strengths which are intermediate between those given in the Table.

The allowable shear and tension working stresses are given in Table A102-2 of Part 2 Section
4 Appendix 1 of CUBiC.

(15-16)
 Table 15-5

Specified Compressive Strength of Masonry

Based on Specifying the Compressive Strength of Masonry Units*

Compressive Strength of Specified Compressive Strength of Masonry

Concrete Masonry Units (psi) Type M or S Mortar Type N Mortar
4,800 or more 3,000 2,800
3,750 2,500 2,350
2,800 2,000 1,850
1,900 1,500 1,350
1,250 1,000 950

*see ACI 530-92 Masonry Structures Building Code

(15-17)
 SECTION 16

PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE

Contents

1601 GENERAL

1602 CONCRETE QUALITY

1603 MATERIALS AND TESTS

1603.1 General
1603.2 Cements
1603.3 Aggregates
1603.4 Water
1603.5 Reinforcement
1603.6 Tests on Concrete

1604 ALLOWABLE UNIT STRESSES

1604.1 Working Stresses

1605 MIXING AND PLACING

1605.1 Forms and Equipment

1605.2 Mixing of Concrete
1605.3 Conveying
1605.4 Depositing
1605.5 Curing
1605.6 Bonding
1605.7 Hot weather

1606 FORMS AND DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION

1606.1 Design of Forms

1606.2 Removal of Forms
1606.3 Placing of Reinforcement
1606.4 Splices in Reinforcement
1606.5 Concrete Protection for Reinforcement
1606.6 Construction Joints
1606.7 Concrete Walls

(16-1)
1607 PRECAST CONCRETE FLOOR AND ROOF UNITS

1607.1 General
1607.2 Strength of Concrete
1607.3 Workmanship
1607.4 Identification and Marking
1607.5 Cutting of Holes
1607.6 Anchorage
1607.7 Bridging
1607.8 Connections
1607.9 Transportation Storage and Erection

1608 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

1608.1 General
1608.2 Design and Construction
1608.3 Handling and Installation

1609 FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE

1609.1 General
1609.2 Physical Properties
1609.3 Uses
1609.4 Manufacture

Table 16-1 Maximum Permissible Water-Cement Ratios for Concrete

Table 16-2 Grading of Concrete

Table 16-3 Minimum Cover to be provided for Concrete

Table 16-3(A) Bar Designations

Table 16-4 Requirements for Special Exposure Conditions

(16-2)
 SECTION 16

PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE

1601 GENERAL

(a) Reinforced and plain concrete shall be of materials proportions, strength

and consistency as set forth in this Section and shall be designed by
methods admitting of rational analysis according to established
principles of mechanics.

(b) Standards of design and construction for reinforced concrete shall be in

accordance with the provisions of the "Building Code Requirements for
Reinforced Concrete, ACI 318.1 M-89", .or in accordance with BS
5328 “Concrete", and for plain concrete in accordance with the
"Building Code Requirements for Structural Plain Concrete ACI 322."

(c) All members to be constructed of plain or reinforced concrete shall be

designed to resist effectively the loads imposed in accordance with
Section 12.

1602 CONCRETE QUALITY

(a) Concrete mixes shall conform generally to those set out in Table 16-1.
Where required by this Code, tests of concrete to determine suitable
proportions of fine and coarse aggregates shall be carried out under the
supervision of a qualified engineer. Where laboratory tests show that
the required strengths may be obtained using higher water/cement ratios,
the ratios given in Table 16-1 may be varied accordingly subject to the
approval of the Director.

(b) The Director may accept concrete mixed by volume provided the use of
the concrete so mixed is limited to minor building works.

(c) The Director may request that all plans submitted for Approval or used
for construction of a building or other works show clearly the class of
concrete used in the design of all parts of the structure.

(d) For grading of concrete mixes in accordance with BS5328:

“Concrete”, see Table 16-2.

(16-3)
1603 MATERIALS AND TESTS

1603.1 General

(a) The Director shall have the right to order testing of any materials used in
concrete construction to determine if the materials are of the quality
specified.

(b) Tests of materials and of concrete shall be made in accordance with

Standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials. All tests are
at the expense of the owner.

(c) A complete record of tests of materials and of concrete placed shall be

available for inspection by the Director during progress of work and for 2
years after completion of the project, and shall be preserved by the
inspecting engineer or architect or owner (Where no professionally
qualified architect or engineer has been employed) for that purpose.

1603.2 Cements

(a) Cement shall conform to one of the following specifications for portland
cement:

(1) "Specification for Portland Cement"' ASTM C150.

(2) "Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements" ASTM C595,

excluding Types S and SA which are not intended as principal
cementing constituents of structural concrete,

or to any other equivalent standard approved by the Authority.

(b) Cement used in the work shall correspond to that on which selection of
concrete proportions was based.

1603.3 Aggregates

(a) The use of aggregates for normal structural concrete shall be in accordance
with Appendix F of CUBIC Part 2 Section 6 and with

・ i) ASTM C33" Specification for Concrete Aggregates",

or

ii) BS 882 Part 1 “Coarse and Fine Aggregates from Natural Sources".

(b) Aggregates failing to meet the specifications listed in 1603.3 (a), but which
have been shown by special tests or actual service to produce concrete of
adequate strength and durability may be used where authorized by the
Director.

(16-4)
 (c) Nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be not larger than:

(1) 1/5 the narrowest dimension between sides of forms nor

(2) 1/3 the depth of slabs, nor

(3) 3/4 the minimum clear spacing between individual pre-stressing

tendons or ducts.

These limitations may be waived if, in the judgment of the Director,

workability and methods of consolidation are such that concrete can be
placed without honeycombs or voids.

1603.4 Water

(a) Water used in mixing concrete shall be clean and free from injurious amounts
of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, organic materials, or other substances that may be
deleterious to concrete or reinforcement.

(b) Mixing water for pre-stressed concrete or for concrete that will contain any
aluminum embedments, including that portion of mixing water contributed in
the form of free moisture on aggregates, shall not contain deleterious amount
of chloride ions.

(c) Non-potable water shall not be used in concrete unless the following are
satisfied:

(1) Selection of concrete proportions shall be based on concrete mixes

using water from the same source.

(2) Mortar test cubes made with non-potable mixing water shall have
7-day and 28-day strengths equal to at least 90 percent of strengths
of similar specimens made with portable water. Strength test
comparisons shall be made on mortars, identical except for the
mixing water, prepared and tested in accordance with ASTM C109
- “Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars (Using 2-inch or 50 mm Cube Specimens)”.

1603.5 Reinforcement

(a) Deformed reinforcement shall conform to one of the specifications of the

relevant ASTM standard except as provided in ACI 318. Reinforcement
conforming to other standards may be permitted by the Director provided that
tests carried out by a laboratory approved by the Authority show that the
reinforcement to be used is at least equal in quality to that specified in ACI
318.

(16-5)
 (b) Prestressing tendons shall conform to the relevant ASTM standard.
Wire strands, and bars not specifically listed in ASTM A421, A416, or
A722 may be used provided they conform to minimum requirements
of these specifications and do not have properties that make them less
satisfactory than those listed in ASTM A416, A421, or A722.

(c) Reinforcement consisting of structural steel, steel pipe, or steel tubing

may be used as specified in ACI 318.

(d) All welding of reinforcement shall conform to the “Structural Welding

Code-Reinforcing Steel, AWS D1.4" of the American Welding
Society or equivalent standard approved by the Authority.

Reinforcement to be welded shall be indicated on the drawings and

welding procedures to be used shall be specified. The Director may
require the owner to provide a report (with appropriate tests) on the
welding carried out.

Note: The designation of reinforcing bars is in conformance with US standards

unless otherwise stated.

1603.6 Tests on concrete

(a) The Director may require tests to be made during progress of the work,
or may specify and set forth in writing such rules for requiring tests to
be made by an approved agency as he may consider necessary to ensure
compliance with the Code. Not fewer than three specimens shall be
made for each standard test, nor fewer than one test for each 50 cubic
yards of concrete or for each day’s pour of concrete used at any job site,
where pours may be less than 50 cubic yards. Tests shall be carried out
in accordance with ASTM C172 or other approved standard. All tests
will be carried out at the expense of the owner.

(b) Three test cubes or cylinders should be made for each stage at which
tests arc required. The cube or cylinder strength should be calculated
from the maximum load sustained by the cube or cylinder at failure.
The appropriate strength requirement may be considered to be satisfied
if none of the strengths of the three cubes or cylinders are below the
specified strength or if the average strength of the cubes or cylinders is
not less than the specified strength and the difference between the
greatest and the least strengths is not more than 20 percent of that
average.

(16-6)
 (C) In addition, where there is question as to the quality of the concrete
in the structure, the Director may order load tests for that portion of
the structure where the questionable concrete has been placed.

(d) The maximum allowable slump of concrete shall be 4". This may be
varied by the Director provided the design engineer can demonstrate
that concrete of greater slump will produce an acceptable result.

(e) No water shall be added at the job site to concrete delivered by truck
as ready for use except under the control of a supervising engineer
or other authority acceptable to the Director, and then only when
slump tests are made and the concrete so delivered is found to have
less than the maximum slump required.

1604 ALILOWABLE UNIT STRESS

1604.1 Working Stresses

(a) The allowable working stresses in concrete shall not exceed those set
forth in ACI 318 (or equivalent standard) for the value of
compressive strength of concrete used. The normal minimum
quality of structural concrete recognized by this Code shall be
concrete having a design strength of 3,000 per sq. inch after 28 days
based on 6" x 12" cylinder tests or 3,750 1bs per sq. in at 28 days
based on 6” cubes.

(b) The determination of the proportions of cement, aggregate, and

water to attain strengths shall be made by one of the following
methods:

Method 1 - Without preliminary tests

Where preliminary test data on the materials to be used in the

concrete have not been obtained, the water-cement ratio for a given
strength of concrete shall be based on those shown in Table 16-1.
The designer and builder shall take every care to ensure that the
water- cement ratio is kept at a minimum consistent with the type of
aggregate being used. When tests have been carried out on the local
aggregates, the relevant water-cement ratios shall be specified.

(16-7)
 Method 2 - For combinations of materials previously evaluated or to
be established by trial mixtures

Water-cement ratios greater than those shown in the Table 16-1 may
be used provided that the relationship between strength and
water-cement ratio for the materials to be used been previously
established by reliable test data and the resulting concrete satisfies
the strength requirements.

(d) When the structural design is based on a 28 day compressive

strength in excess of 3,000 psi (by 6" x 12” cylinder test),
proportioning, mixing and placing of concrete shall be under the
supervision of a competent engineer, architect or concrete
technician, approved by the Director.

(e) Concrete that will be exposed to sulfate containing or other

chemically aggressive solutions shall contain cements specially
formulated to resist chemical action and be proportioned in
accordance with the concrete proportions given in the Standards and
Codes listed in Appendices A and B. Care shall be taken in using
water containing hydrogen sulfide.

1605 MIXING AND PLACING

1605.1 Forms and Equipment

(a) Before placing concrete, all equipment for mixing and transporting
the concrete shall be cleaned, all debris removed from the spaces
to be occupied by the concrete, forms shall be thoroughly wetted
or oiled, masonry filler units that will be in contact with concrete
shall be well drenched, and the reinforcement shall be thoroughly
cleaned.

(b) Water shall be removed from place of deposit before concrete is

placed unless otherwise permitted by the Director.

1605.2 Mixing of Concrete

(a) Unless otherwise authorized by the Director, the mixing of concrete

shall be done in a batch mixer of approved type.

(b) All concrete shall be mixed until there is a uniform distribution of

the materials and shall be discharged completely before the mixer
is recharged.

(c) For job mixed concrete, the mixer shall be rotated at a speed
recommended by the manufacturer and mixing shall be continued
for at least 1-1/2 minutes after all materials are in the drum. For
batches larger than one cubic yard mixing time shall be increased
15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or fraction thereof.

(16-8)
 (d) Ready-mixed concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with the
requirements set forth in the Standards adopted in the Appendices to this
code.

(e) Retempering concrete with the addition of water after the concrete has taken
an initial set shall not be permitted.

(f) No concrete shall be deposited in forms or used more than a maximum of

1-1/2 hours after the mixing of that particular batch has been commenced or
after water has been added to the batch. The Director has the right to reject
all such concrete or order any such mobile equipment off the job site, if in
his opinion, mixing has taken place longer than can be allowed to ensure the
appropriate concrete strength. The Director may approve the use of a suitable
concrete retarder to delay the setting action provided that the builder can
prove by tests that the retarder used will not affect the strength of the
concrete.

(g) In cases where there is a delay in the completion of placing of concrete

which is in progress, the builder must make suitable arrangements for
completion of the pour or for the removal of the concrete already placed.

1605.3 Conveying

(a) Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to the place of final deposit by
methods which will prevent separation or loss of the materials.

(b) Equipment for chuting, pumping and pneumatically conveying concrete

shall be of such size and design as to ensure a practically continuous flow of
concrete at the delivery end without separation of the materials.

1605.4 Depositing

(a) Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable in its final position to

avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. The concreting shall be
carried on at such a rate that the concrete is at all times plastic and flows
readily into the spaces between the bars. No concrete that has been
contaminated by foreign materials shall be deposited in the structure.

(b) When concreting is once started, it shall be carried on as a continuous

operation until the placing of the panel or section is completed.

(16-9)
 (e) All concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by suitable means
during placement, and shall be thoroughly worked around the
reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into the corners of the
forms. Where concrete is placed in columns or walls, the placing
shall be so conducted that the concrete will not be placed in lifts
greater than 8 feet. Separate lifts shall be thoroughly compacted.

(d) Vibrators may be used to aid in the placement of the concrete,

provided that the forms are designed to withstand their action and
that the vibrators do not touch the reinforcement. Vibrators
should not, be used to transport concrete within the forms.

(e) Where conditions make consolidation difficult or where

reinforcement is congested, the Direct or upon application of the
builder, may approve alternative methods of placing of the
concrete or redesigning the steel in the member affected.

(f) Special care shall be taken in depositing concrete from heights

greater than 4 feet to avoid segregation or separation.

1605.5 Curing

In all concrete structures, concrete made with normal portland cement shall
be maintained above 10 degrees C. and in a moist condition for at least the
first seven days after placing. High-early strength concrete shall be so
maintained far at least the first three days. Other curing periods or methods
of curing may be used if the specified strengths are obtained. (See CUBiC
Part 2 Section 6 Article 5.5).

1605.6 Bonding

Before new concrete is deposited on or against concrete which has set, the
forms shall be re-tightened, the surface of the set concrete shall be cleaned
of all foreign matter and washed before the new concrete is placed.

1605.7 Hot Weather

During hot Weather (temperature in excess of 85 degrees F.), steps shall be

taken to reduce concrete temperature and water evaporation by proper
attention to ingredient production methods, handling, placing, protection
and curing.

(16-10)
1606 FORMS AND DETAILS OF CONSTRUCNON

1606.1 Design of Forms

(a) Forms shall conform to the shape, lines and dimensions of the
members as called for on the plans, and shall be substantial and
sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar. Forms shall be properly
braced or tied together so as to maintain position and shape.
Temporary openings at the bottom of columns shall be provided to
facilitate cleaning and inspection before depositing concrete.

When the concrete has attained sufficient strength, forms shall be

removed from at least two faces of all reinforced members, other than
where placed in contact with the soil.

(b) Design of formwork shall include consideration of the following

factors:

(1) Rate and method of placing concrete.

(2) Loads, including live, dead, lateral and impact.

(3) Selection of materials and stresses.

(4) Deflection, camber, eccentricity and uplift.

(5) Horizontal and diagonal shear bracing.

(6) Splices.

(7) Cross grain compression.

(8) Loads on ground or on previously placed structure.

1606.2 Removal of Forms

The removal of forms shall be carried out in such a manner as to ensure the
complete safety of the structure. Vertical farms may be removed in 24 hours,
provided that the concrete has hardened sufficiently so that it is not injured.
Bottom forms and shoring for slabs beams and girders shall not be removed in
less than 14 days. Where tests indicate that the concrete has attained sufficient
strength to safely support itself and any imposed loads in less times
adjustment in the above waiting periods may be approved by the Director in
conformance with the results obtained.

1606.3 Placing or Reinforcement

a) Skeletal reinforcement and welded wire fabric shall be accurately placed

and adequately secured in position by concrete or metal chairs or spacers,
or by other acceptable methods. The minimum clear distance between
parallel bars, except in columns, shall be equal to the nominal diameter of
the bars. In no case shall the clear distance between bars be less than one
inch, nor less than one and one-third times the maximum size of the coarse
aggregate.
(16-11)
 b) When reinforcement in beams or girders is placed in two or
more layers, the clear distance between layers shall not be
less than one inch nor less than the diameter of the bars,
and the bars in the upper layers shall be placed directly
above those in the bottom layer.

c) Groups of parallel reinforcing bars bundled in contact to act

as a unit are permitted but shall be limited to four bars in
any one unit. Bars larger than #11 can not be bundled in
beams. Individual bars within a bundle terminated within
the span of flexural members shall terminate at different
points with stagger at least 40 bar diameters. Bundled bars
shall be enclosed within stirrups or ties.

1606.4 Splices in Reinforcement

In slabs, beams, and girders, splices in reinforcement at points of

maximum stress shall be welded, lapped or otherwise fully
developed, but in any case, shall transfer the entire stress from the
bar without exceeding the allowable bond and shear stresses. The
minimum overlap for a lapped splice shall be calculated in
accordance with ACI 318-55, but in no case shall the overlap be
less than 35 bar diameters. The clear distance between bars shall
also apply to clear distance from a contact splice and adjacent
splices or bars.

1606.5 Concrete Protection for Reinforcement (See Table 16-3)

(a) The reinforcement of footings and other principal structural

members in which the concrete is deposited against the
ground shall have not less than 3 inches of concrete
between it and the ground contact surface. If concrete
surfaces after removal of the forms are to be exposed to the
weather or be in contact with the ground, the reinforcement
shall be protected with not less than 2 inches of concrete.

(b) The concrete protective covering for reinforcement at

surfaces not exposed directly to the ground or weather
shall be not less than 1 inch for slabs and walls; and not
less than 1-1/2 inches for beams, girders and columns. In
concrete ribbed or joist floors in winch the clear distance
between ribs or joists is not more than thirty inches, the
protection of reinforcement shall be at least l inch.

(c) Exposed reinforcement bars intended for bonding with

future extensions shall be protected from corrosion by
concrete or other adequate covering.

(16-12)
 (d) The above protective coverings are minimums but protection
shall not be less than elsewhere set forth for required fire
resistive ratings and for insurance against corrosion.

(e) In extremely corrosive atmospheres, such as in locations near

the sea, or other severe exposures, the amount of protection
(concrete cover) shall be suitably increased but not so much
as to allow excessive crack widths at the surface.

1606.6 Construction Joints

(a) Joints not indicated on the plans shall be so made and located
as to least impair the strength of the structure. Where a joint
is to be made, the surface of the concrete shall be thoroughly
cleaned and all laitance removed. Vertical joints shall be
thoroughly wetted before placing of new concrete.

(b) A delay of at least one day must occur in columns or walls

before concreting beams, girders, or slabs supported thereon.
Beams, girders, brackets, column capitals, and haunches
shall be considered as part of the floor system and shall be
placed monolithically therewith.

(c) Construction joints shall be located in areas of minimum

shear. Provision shall be made for transfer of shear and other
forces through the construction joint.

1606.7 Concrete Walls

a) The design of concrete walls subject to axial loads with or

without flexure shall be carried out in accordance with Part 2
Section 6 Subsection 14 of CUBiC.

b) The minimum vertical and horizontal reinforcement required

for walls shall be in accordance with Part 2 Section 6
Subsection 14.3 of CUBiC, unless a greater amount of
reinforcement is required for shear or other loads.

c) The minimum ratio of the area of vertical reinforcement to

the gross concrete the area shall be:

i) 0.0012 for deformed bars not larger than No. 15 with

a specified yield strength of not less than 400 MPa,
or

ii) 0.0015 for other deformed bars, or

iii) 0.0012 for welded wire fabric not larger than

W31 or D31

(16-13)
 d) The minimum ratio of the area of horizontal reinforcement area to
the gross concrete are shall be:

i) 0.0020 for deformed bars no larger than No 15 with a

specified yield strength not less than 400 MPa, or

ii) 0.0025 for other deformed bars or

iii) 0.0020 for welded wire fabric not larger than W31 or D31.

e) Vertical and horizontal reinforcement shall not be spaced further

than three times the wall thickness, nor 500 mm. (20 inches).

f) In addition to the minimum reinforcement required by 1606.7 d) and

e), not less than two No. 4 bars shah be provided around all window
and door openings. Such bars shall be extended to develop the bar
beyond the corners of the openings but not less than 24 inches.

1607 PRECAST CONCRETE FLOOR AND ROOF UNITS

1607.1 General

(a) Precast concrete units shall comply with the minimum requirements
set forth in this Section, and the Standards set forth in the
Appendices.

(b) All precast structural items shall be designed by an engineer

approved by the Authority.

(c) Only the material cast monolithically with the Units at the time of
manufacture shall be used in computing stresses unless adequate
and approved mechanical shear transfer is provided.

(d) The Director may require tests to be made by an approved testing

laboratory as he may consider necessary to ensure compliance with
this code or uniformity of the products produced. The quantity of
tests shall be based on consideration of safety or volume of output.

(e) The Director shall have free access to the plant of any producer at
all hours of normal operation and failure to permit such access
shall be cause for revocation of approval.

(f) Failure of any product to satisfy in every respect the quality

prescribed, or failure to conform with plans and specifications,
shall be cause for rejection of the products.

(16-14)
1607.2 Strength of Concrete

Concrete for precast structural units made of Crushed stone or other

heavy aggregate shall have a compressive strength of not less than
3,000 psi at 28 days based on standard 6" cylinder test.

1607.3 Workmanship

(a) The mix, the gradation of the aggregate and the workability
shall be such as to ensure complete filling of the form and
continuous intimate bond between the concrete and all
steel.

(b) The use of precast structural units not complying with the
relevant Standards and Codes listed in the Appendices. Or
having visible cracks, honeycomb, exposed reinforcing
except at ends or, with a compressive section more than
one-eighth inch less than specified dimension shall not be
permitted.

1607.4 Identification and Marking

All joists, beams and girders, and other units shall show some mark
plainly indicating the top of the unit and its location and orientation
in the structure. Identification marks shall be reproduced from the
placing plans. This mark or symbol shall also indicate the
manufacturer, the date of the manufacture and the lengths, size and
type of reinforcing.

1607.5 Cutting of Holes

No openings not provided for in the structural design shall be made

on the job without the specific approval of the engineer and the
Director and in accordance with the engineer' written detailed
instructions covering such work.

1607.6 Anchorage

Anchorage of all precast concrete units shall be designed based on

rational analysis to transmit loads and other forces to the structural
frame.

1607.7 Bridging

Joists shall be secured against lateral displacement by cast-in-place

bridging, and such bridging shall be spaced not to exceed 32 times
the width of the compression flange of the joist except that for roof
systems, cast-in-place Portland cement concrete slabs embedding
the top flanges not less than 1/2 inch, or steel decks which are
welded, shall be accepted in lieu of bridging.

(16-15)
 1607.8 Connections

(a) All joints and connections shall perform their function at all stages of
loading without over-stress and with proper safety factors against
failure due to overload.

(b) Loading conditions to be considered in the design of joints and

connections are: service loads, including wind and earthquake
forces, volume changes due to shrinkage, creep, and temperature
change, erection loads, and loading encountered in stripping forms,
shoring and removal of shores, storage and transportation of
members.

1607.9 Transportation, Storage and Erection

(a) Units shall be so stored, transported, and placed that they will not be
overstressed or damaged.

(b) Precast concrete units shall be adequately braced and supported

during erection to ensure proper alignment and safety and such
bracing or support shall be maintained until there are adequate
permanent connections.

1608 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

1608.1 General
(a) The term “ prestressed concrete” refers to pretensioned concrete in
which the reinforcing is tensioned before hardening of the concrete;
or to post-tensioned concrete in which the reinforcing is tensioned
after hardening of the concrete or combinations of both
pre-tensioning and post tensioning.

(b) All prestressed structural items shall be designed by an engineer

approved by the Authority. Openings not provided for in the
structural design shall not be made on the job without the specific
approval of the engineer and the Director.

(c) Allowable stresses temporary and at design loads, shall not exceed
the allowable stresses set forth in the relevant Standards and Codes of
Practice listed in Appendices A and B. Stresses and ultimate strength
shall be investigated at service conditions and at all load stages that
may be critical during the life of the structure from the time prestress
is first applied.

(d) The Director may require tests to be made by an approved testing

laboratory as he may consider necessary to ensure compliance with
these Standards or uniformity of the product.

(16-16)
 (e) The Director shall have free access to the plant of any producer at
all hours of normal operation, and failure to permit such access shall
be cause for revocation of approval.

(f) Failure of any product to satisfy the quality prescribed or failure to

conform with plans and specifications shall be cause for rejection
the product.

1608.2 Design and Construction

(a) Deflection under live load shall not exceed L/240 and where plaster
ceilings are to be applied shall not exceed L/360, where L = the
span length of the member.

(b) Calcium chloride shall not be used in concrete for prestressed

members.

1608.3 Handling and Installation

Prestressed members must be maintained in an upright position at all times

and must be picked up from points as shown on the approved plans or as
approved by the engineer and the Director.

(Note: Disregard of this requirement may lead to collapse of the member).

1609 FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE

1609.1 General

The development of reinforced concrete using fiber glass materials has led
to the construction of structural panels and other primary non load-bearing
members. The principal ingredients of glass reinforced cement (GRC) are
ordinary Portland cement, silica sand and water, mixed with alkali resistant
glass fibers to produce the inorganic GRC composite. Glass fibers
constitute 5% by weight.

The advantage of GRC is its ability to produce elements which are much
thinner and lighter than can be made with ordinary concrete reinforced with
steel. GRC elements of 1/2' in thickness are possible while with steel
reinforced concrete, the thickness of any slab must be at least 1-1/2” to
provide cover for the reinforcement. In the OECS, where the cover should
be at least 1" for exposed elements, the minimum thickness of a slab will be
2-1/2”.

1609.2 Physical Properties

Some of the physical properties of typical spray de-watered GRC with a

density of 2.0 tons per sq.m. are:

(16-17)
 At completion of cure
Impact strength 15-20 N/mm2

Compressive strength 60-100 Nmm/mm2

Young’s Modulus 20-25 KN/mm2
Bending-elastic limit 14-17 N/mm2
Bending-ultimate strength 35-40 N/mm2
Tension-elastic limit 9-10 N/mm2
Tension-ultimate strength 14-17 N/mm2

Note: 1N = 0.224809 lbf.

N/mm2=0.00689476 lb/in2 x 10

1609.3 Uses

GRC technology has been used in the production of semi-structural units and
complex shapes such as cladding panels, roofing, fire doors and partitions,
bus shelters, storage tanks and other units such as corrugated sheeting which
can be produced by the spray method.

Other smaller units are constructed by premix GRC such as sewer pipes,
manhole covers, etc.

1609.4 Manufacture

GRC members are manufactured under license. Information on the

manufacture, properties and uses of GRC can be obtained from the Building
Research Establishment, Wallingford, England.

(16-18)
 Table 16-1

Maximum Permissible Water Cement Ratios (1) for Concrete

(Without Preliminary Tests)

Maximum Permissible Water Cement Ratio – Non Air Entrained Concrete (2)
Specified Compressive Specified Compressive U.S. gals per 94 lb bag Absolute ratio by
strength at 28 days, Strength at 28 days, of cement weight
(psi – 6” cube test) (psi 6” x 12” cylinder)
3,125 2,500 7-1/4 0.67
3,750 3,000 6-1/2 0.58
4,375 3,500 5-3/4 0.51
5,000 4,000 5 0.44

Note: 1) The minimum cement content shall be not less than five bags per cubic yard (a bag
weighing not less than 94 pounds) unless the mix is designed specifically for the project.

2) Including free surface moisture on aggregates.

3) Results shown in this table are based on the use of aggregates with equivalent specification
of BS 882 Part 1. For local limestone aggregates tests are required to arrive at the
appropriate water cement ratio.

Table 16-2

Grading of Concrete Mixes in accordance with BS 5328

Grade Approx. minimum compressive strength at 28 days (psi)

ST1 1,090
ST2 1,490
ST3 2,175
ST4 2,900
ST5 3,625

(16-19)
 Table 16-3

Minimum Cover to be Provided to Concrete

A. Cast in Place Concrete (Non-prestressed)

Description Minimum Cover (ins)
Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth 3
Concrete exposed to earth and weather 2
Concrete not exposed to weather or in contract with the ground:
Slabs, Walls, Joists 1-1/2
Beams, Columns 1-1/2
Shells, Folded, plate members 3/4
b. Precast Concrete Manufactured under Plant Control Conditions
Concrete exposed to earth or weather.
Wall Panels:
No 14 and No 18 bars* 1-1/2
No 11 bar and smaller 1
Other members:
No 14 and No 18 bars 2
No 6 through No 35 bars 1-1/2
No 5 bar, W31 or D31 wire and smaller 1-1/2

Concrete not exposed to weather or in contact with the ground:

Slabs, Walls, Joists:
No 14 and No 18 bars 1-1/4
No 11 bar and smaller 3/4
Beams, Columns:
Primary Reinforcement: Bar diameter, but not
less than 3/4 and not
more than 1-3/4
Ties, Stirrups, Spirals 1/2
Shells, Folded Plate members:
No 6 bar and larger 3/4
No 5 bar, W31 or D31 wire and smaller 1/2

Note: See Table 16-3(A) for equivalent SI bar designations.

(16-20)
 Table 16-3 (Cont’d)

Minimum Cover to be Provided to Concrete

C. Pre-stressed Concrete
Description Minimum Cover (ins)
Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth 3

Concrete exposed to earth or weather:

Wall Panels, Slabs, Joists 1-1/4
Other Members 1-1/2

Concrete not exposed to weather or in contact with

ground: 1
Slabs, Walls, Joists
Beams, Columns 1-1/2
Primary, Reinforcement 1
Ties, Stirrups, Spirals

Shells, Folded plate members 1/2

No 5 bar, W31 or D31 wire and smaller
Bar diameter but not less than 1
Other Reinforcement

Note: See Table 16-3(A) for bar designations

(16-21)
 Table 16-3(A)

Bar Designations

SI Units US Standard Units

Bar Designation Diameter (mm) Bar Designation Diameter (mm)
10 11.3 3 0.375
15 16.0 4 0.500
20 19.5 5 0.625
25 25.2 6 0.75
30 29.9 7 0.875
35 35.7 8 1.000
45 43.7 9 1.128
55 56.4 10 1.270
11 1.410
14 1.693
18 2.257

Table 16-4

Requirements for Special Exposure Conditions

Exposure Condition Maximum Water-cement ratio Minimum specified

normal density aggregate compressive strength, low
concrete density aggregate (Mpa)
Concrete intended to be
water-tight: 0.50 25
a) Concrete exposed to fresh
water 0.45 30

b) Concrete exposed to
seawater
For corrosion protection for
reinforced concrete exposed to
brackish water, seawater, or
spray from these sources 0.40 33

If minimum concrete cover required by Table 16-3 is increased by 10 mm, water-cement

ratio may be increased to 0.45 for normal density concrete, or specified compressive
strength reduced to 30 MPa for low density concrete.

Note: 1 Megapascal (MPa) equals 145.038 lbs force per sq.in.

(16-22)
 SECTION 17

STRUCTURAL STEEL

Contents

1701 SCOPE

1702 BASIS OF DESIGN

1703 APPLICATION

1704 MATERIAL STANDARDS

1705 COLD FORMED STAINLESS STEEL CONSTRUCTION

1706 COLD FORMED STRUCTURAL MEMBERS

1707 OPEN WEB STEEL JOIST CONSTRUCTION

1708 WELDING

1709 HIGH STRENGTH BOLTS

1710 TESTS

1711 DESIGN LOADS

Table 17-1 Fire Resistance of Concrete Members

1712 MINIMUM THICKNESS OF MATERIAL

1713 CONNECTIONS

1714 PIPE COLUMNS

1714.1 General
1714.2 Allowable load

1715 COMPOSITE BEAMS

1715.1 Definition
1715.2 Basis of Design
1715.3 Protection of metal

(17-1)
1716 LIGHT GAUGE STEEL CONSTRUCTION

1716.1 Application
1716.2 Duties of the Developer
1716.3 General Standards
1716.4 Structural Members other than Decks

1717 STRUCTURAL SHEETS

(17-2)
 SECTION 17

STRUCTURAL STEEL

1701 SCOPE

a) This Section deals with the design and construction of steel buildings
which must be carried out in accordance with Part 2 Section 7B
“Structural Design Requirements - Structural Steel" of the Caribbean
Uniform Building Code, CUBiC.

b) The construction of small steel framed buildings using standard steel

sections is dealt with in Section 18 Sub-section 1804 of the Code.

c) The general requirements for construction of light gauge steel framed

structures are given in Sub-section 1714, while the requirements for
the construction of small houses using light steel frame construction
are given in Section D of the Building Guidelines.

1702 BASIS OF DESIGN

a) Steel and iron members shall be designed by methods admitting of

rational analysis according to established principles of mechanics.

b) The quality, design, fabrication and erection of steel and iron used
structurally in buildings or structures shall conform to the provisions
of this Code and to Part 2 Section 7 "Structural Design Requirements
- Structural Steel" Caribbean Uniform Building Code (CUBiC) or to
any other relevant standard approved by the Authority.

1703 APPLICATION

The requirements set forth in 1701 to 1713 inclusive, herein, are applicable
to structures and do not apply to members formed of flat rolled sheet or Strip
steel, light gauge steel construction, (except structural frames) or other
miscellaneous light, steel construction.

(17-3)
1704 MATERIAL STANDARDS

Steel for structural applications in buildings shall conform to the "Standard

specification for General Requirements far Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet
Piling, and Bars for Structural Use" by the American Society for Testing and
Materials, ANSI/ASTM A6.

1705 COLD FORMED STAINLESS STEEL CONSTRUCTION

The design, fabrication and erection of cold-formed stainless steel construction

shall conform to the "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Stainless
Structural Members" of American Iron and Steel Institute.

1706 COLD FORMED STEEL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS

a) The design and construction of cold formed steel structural members shall
be in accordance with Part 2 Section 7B Sub-section 14 of CUBiC. This
Sub-section provides information on the working stress design for
structural members formed from the shaping of fiat rolled steel at
ambient temperature to form a structural section.

b) The developer may utilize any other method of design provided the
material used, and the design developed, will lead to a building which is
resistant to hurricane and earthquake forces and to the corrosive
environment of the OECS. The materials used and design adopted must
be approved by the Director.

c) Other references are:

i) ANSI/ASTM A446-76:

Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process,

Structural (Physical) Quality (Grades A, B, C, D and F)

ii) ANSI/ASTM A525-79:

Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process,

General Requirements.

iii) ANSI/ASTM A606-75:

Steel Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, High Strength,

Low Alloy, with Improved Corrosion Resistance.

(17-4)
 (iv) AISI

Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual, 1986

1707 OPEN WEB STEEL JOIST CONSTRUCTION

The design, fabrication and erection of open web steel joist construction
shall comply with the following specifications: "Standard Specifications
for Open Web Steel Joists, H -Series" adopted by American Institute of
Steel Construction and Steel Joist institute or to Part 2 Section 7B Sub-
section 17 of CUBiC.

1708 WELDING

Details of design, workmanship and technique for welding inspection of

welding, and qualification of welding operators shall conform to the
following specifications:

a) "Structural Welding Code" by American Welding Society.

b) "Specifications for Welding Sheet in Buildings" by American

Welding Society.

1709 HIGH TENSION BOLTS

The design and assembly of structural joints and connections using high
strength steel bolts shall conform to the "Specifications for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts" approved by the
Research Council or Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the
Engineering Foundation.

1710 TESTS

The Director shall consider the need for tests and/or mill records to
determine the quality of materials and assemblies.

1711 DESIGN LOADS

Designs shall be based on the dead, live, wind and other loads set forth
in Section 12 and the additional stress considerations set forth in
Section 17.

(17-5)
1712 MINIMUM THICKNESS OF MATERIAL

(a) The minimum thickness of steel and iron used in buildings or other
structures or to resist wind forces, shall be not than as set forth in BS
5950 "Structural Use of Steelwork in Buildings” or equipment
American standard and where water, salt water spray and other
corrosive agents, such members shall have a minimum web thickness of
0.25 inches unless the steel used is an atmospheric corrosion-resistant
grade approved by the Director. It is recommended that in the corrosive
atmosphere of the OECS, all steel members be protected against
corrosion by concrete haunching or other approved forms of protection.

(b) In the main structural framework of buildings primary members shall

be construed to include any steel member used as a column, beam or
to support walls or partitions including trusses, isolated lintels
spanning openings of 8 feet or more and any member required to brace
a column or a truss or to support 200 or more sq. ft of floor or roof
area.

(c) Secondary members shall be construed to include all other steel

members, including filling-in beams of floor systems which
individually support less than 200 sq. ft of floor or roof area.

(d) For primary members of the structural frame all steel used shall be at
least 0.20 inches in thickness for interior work. All steel in exterior
walls of structures except lintels spanning an opening of less than 8
feet shall be at least 0.20 inches in thickness when protected as
required in 1710 and at least 0.25 inches thick when not so protected.

(e) Unless otherwise determined by tests, the thickness of fire-resistive

members shall be assumed to have the resistance ratings detailed in
Table 17-1.

Table 17-1

Fire resistance of Concrete Members

Inches of 1 Hr. 2 Hr. 3 Hr. 4 Hr.

Cement concrete over 2,000 psi. 1 1-1/2 2 2

Cement concrete 1,600-2,000 psi 1-1/2 2 3 4

Cement concrete 1,600-2,000 psi with wire
fabric 1-1/2 2 2 3

Concrete block (nominal dimensions) - - 4 4

(17-6)
 1713 CONNECTIONS

(a) Any suitable mechanical fastener, special device or other

means may be used to join component parts provided that the
type of fastening device is compatible with the service
connections.

(b) High strength steel bolts, may be used in lieu of rivets.

(c) Welded connections shall be in accordance with BS 2642

"General Requirements for the Arc Welding of Steel" and/or
CSA Standard W59, "Welded Steel Construction (Metal-Arc
Welding)".

(d) A competent welding supervisor, who shall be approved by

the Director, shall be present at all times when welding is in
progress.

(e) It shall be permissible to use ribbed or spliced bolts in place

of rivets or ordinary bolts. The diameter of the bolt shall be
identical to that of the rivet.

1714 PIPE COLUMNS

1714.1 General

(a) Steel or wrought-iron pipes may be used as compression

members. The pipes shall be new material, the shell shall be
straight and the wall thickness shall be not less than 3/16".

(b) Where pipe columns support loads in excess of 1,000 lb or

are required to be fire resistive, the pipe shall be filled with
1:3:6 concrete.

1714.2 Allowable load

(a) Only the load-bearing capacity of the shell be considered in

determining the allowable load on a pipe compression
member when filled with concrete.

(b) Load-bearing pipe columns shall be provided with steel

bearing plates so designed that the bearing stresses of the
material on which the column is to be placed shall not be
exceeded and so that the bending stresses in the steel plate
shall not exceed those permitted.

(17-7)
 1715 COMPOSITE BEAMS

1715.1 Definition

a) Composite beams shall be the term used to apply to any rolled or

fabricated steel floor beam entirely encased in a poured concrete
haunch supporting a concrete slab on either side. At its narrowest
point the concrete haunch shall be at least 4 inches wider than the
flange of the beam. The top of the beam shall be at least 2" above
the bottom of the slab and at least 1-1/2" below the top of the slab.
There should be no openings in the slab adjacent to the beam. The
concrete casing slab be adequately provided with mesh or other
reinforcement throughout its depth and across its soffit.

b) Uncased beams may be designed as composite beams provided that

this is based on the requirements of BS 5950 or equivalent standard
approved by the Authority.

1715.2 Basis of Design

The design of composite beams shall be carried out by a professionally

qualified engineer using a method acceptable to the Director. Particular
attention shall be paid to the design of shear connectors, and to the provision
of adequate resistance to and shear forces.

1715.3 Protection of the Metal

All field rivets and bolts and abrasions to the shop coat shall be spot-painted.
Buildings or structures not encased in concrete shall be field painted, in
addition to the shop coats, with not less than 1 coat of lead graphite, asphalt
paint or either approved paint which will not act as a solvent for the shop
coat.

1716 LIGHT GAUGE STEEL CONSTRUCTION

1716.1 Application

a) Light gauge steel construction shall include structural decks or

members formed of sheet or strip steel less than 3/16” thick, and used
for load bearing purposes.

b) The use of light gauge steel construction shall be reserved for single or
two storey buildings in Group E Occupancy or in Group D(b)
Occupancy provided the building is not greater than 2,000 square feet
in floor area.

c) Section 18 provides information on the framing requirements for small

steel structures using standard sections, and Section D of the Building
guidelines provides outline performance specifications for small single
storey buildings.

(17-8)
1716.2 Duties of the Developer

a) For the design, fabrication and erection of prefabricated

steel buildings composed of light gauge steel members,
the developer shall file with the Director duplicate
copies of a certificate from a recognized testing
laboratory to the effect that tests have been made on
this particular type of prefabricated construction. The
test results should show the dead loads, live loads and
wind loads sustained by the construction in pounds per
sq. ft together with a physical description of the
building and a description of the tests.

b) Panels and other elements tested for loads shall sustain

without failure a superimposed load equal to two times
the live load. Recovery within 24 hours after removal
of the full test load shall be net less than 75 percent of
the observed deflection the measured deflection for any
panel or element under full live load shall not be greater
than 1/360 of the span for panels that will be plastered
or 1/240 of the span for other panels and 1/180 of the
span for roof decks without ceilings.

c) All tests must be carried out in accordance with the

applicable standard of the ASTM or the relevant British
Standard.

d) It is the responsibility of the developer to prove by

calculations or test results that the design proposed will
provide a building that is resistant to the wind and
earthquake forces and other loads given in Section 12,
and that the corrosion protection of the steel members
will be adequate over the projected life of the building.
The building must have the fire resistance required for
the class of use.

e) It is expected that the developer will supply the

following information when applying for a building
permit:

i) complete structural drawings of the building. The

drawings and written information must give the
sizes and thickness of all members, the
connections used, and methods of field assembly.

ii) test results required under 1716.2 a).

iii) test data and specifications of the corrosion

method to be used.

iv) other standard information required by the

Authority as per Section 1 of the Code.

(17-9)
1716.3 General Standards

The design and construction of light gauge steel structures shall be

carried out in accordance with the relevant standards set forth by the
American Iron and Steel Institute or the British Standard or other
relevant standard or Code approved by the Authority.
The design requirements given in 1716.3 may be varied by the
developer, provided that tests on the materials and assemblies show
that the structure can accommodate the imposed loads safely and can
resist the wind and earthquake forces in accordance with the
requirements of Section 12.

1716.4 Structural Members other than Decks

Design and fabrication shall be as set forth in 1716.2. Special attention

shall be paid to the following:

(a) All primary and secondary members must be designed in

accordance with the standards given in 1716.1 and 1716.2 or in
accordance with any other standard approved by the Authority.
Except that the minimum thickness of steel of primary members
shall be 16 gauge, and the spacing of studs shall be no greater
than 24 inches on centers and provision shall be made to resist
horizontal wind forces by diagonal members or diaphragm
panels attached to the studs.

(b) Light-gauge steel for the treads, risers, stringers and landings of
stairways shall have a minimum thickness of 12 gauge.

(c) Light-gauge steel studs far non-bearing partitions shall have a

minimum thickness of 18 gauge.

(d) Light gauge steel joists or rafters shall be designed with due
consideration for wind pressure and suction at the relevant
level.

(e) Unless otherwise provided for in the design, the joist or rafter
members shall have not less than 4" of bearing on reinforced
concrete nor less than 2” on steel supports, except that where
opposite joists butt over a steel support and positive, approved
means of attachment the steel is furnished, a shorter bearing
length may be used. Each end of each member shall be
anchored. Resistance to diaphragm action shall be provided by
the deck or by diagonal members. Bridging shall be provided,
spaced not further apart than 32 times the flange width. Such
bridging shall be solid sections of the joist material or be cross
bridging formed from approved open-welding joists.

(f) Light-gauge steel used in sandwich construction for wall

panels for the exterior or enclosing walls of buildings shall
have a minimum thickness of 24 gauge for the sheeting. The
minimum thickness for secondary members supporting
exterior panel construction shall be 18 gauge.

(17-10)
 (g) Light-gauge steel members resisting lateral stresses in
interior partitions of buildings two stories or mere in
height shall be not less than 16 gauge.

(h) Light-gauge steel structural members shall not be

used in locations subject to corrosive agents or
continuous dampness.

1717 STRUCTURAL SHEETS

Structural sheet-metal sections may be used for floor decks, roof

decks and wall cladding to span between supports; provided the
design is based on rational analysis, and design and fabrication
comply with the standard set forth in 1703 or with any other
standard approved by the Authority and as follows:

(a) Sheet-metal sections shall have a minimum thickness of 18

gauge for floors, or 24 gauge for roof and walls and shall
be protected as set forth in this subsection.

(b) The span of sheet-metal sections used for floor systems

shall not exceed 40 times the overall depth of the section.

(c) No structural value shall be allowed for any fill material

used with deck systems except in the case of composite
floor systems which shall be designed to the approval of
the Director.

(d) The shape of the sections as placed in buildings shall be

such as to eliminate any possibility of lateral displacement
for compression area.

(e) Where large openings occur, the perimeter of the openings

shall be framed with adequate supports for the floor
panels. Small openings shall be reinforced so that the
allowable stresses in adjoining materials are not exceeded.

(f) Positive anchorage for sheet-metal roofs or decks shall be

provided by proven mechanical connectors. The
anchorage must be capable of resisting the uplift forces
caused by hurricane winds and other loads described in
Section 12.

(g) Bolts and rivets shall be not less than 3/16” in diameter.
Lead, neoprene, or other approved washers not less than
1/2” in diameter shall be provided under the heads of all
bolts and rivets.

*Note: United States Standard Gauge used throughout.

(17-11)
(h) Roofing sheets and other structural sheet metal sections
spanning between supports shall be designed to
support the live load without deflecting more than
1/180 of the span and without permanent deformation.

(i) All members formed of light-gauge strip or skeet-metal

shall be treated with protective paint coatings or shall
be galvanized. The anti-corrosion treatment must be
approved by the Authority.

(j) Valley fixings for corrugated roof sheets are stronger

than ridge fixings, and are recommended-provided that
measures are taken to avoid leaks, such as the use of
suitable washers and the use of self aligning tools for
the installation of fixing screws in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.

(17-12)
 SECTION 18

SMALL BUILDINGS

1801 SCOPE
a) Small buildings are defined as, buildings of less than 3000
square feet in floor area in Occupancy Group E(a)
Residential Buildings and Occupancy Group D(b) General
Merchandise Stores and of not more than 2 stories. This
Section provides information on the design and construction
of small wood framed and steel framed buildings using
traditional methods of design.

b) The latest edition of the Building Guidelines is hereby

adopted as an addendum to this Code for the design and
construction of buildings falling within the scope of this
Section, The Guidelines contain graphical illustrations of the
construction principles recommended in this Section. It is
intended that the Guidelines be completely prescriptive and
can be used for construction of simple buildings. However,
where it may be necessary to deviate from the prescriptions
given in the Guidelines, reference must be made to this
Section and to the other relevant Sections of this Code.

c) Section 17 provides information on the requirements for the

design and construction of light gauge steel structures while
outline specifications for the design and construction of
small light gauge steel framed buildings (systems) is dealt
with in the Section D of the Building Guidelines.

d) This Section is to be read with the following where

appropriate:

i) OECS Building Code:

Section 14 - Timber Construction

Section 15 - Concrete Block Masonry
Section 16 - Plain and Reinforced Concrete
Section 17 - Structural Steel

ii) Caribbean Uniform Building Code (CUBiC):

Part 2 Section 8 - Structural Timber

Part 5 Section 1 - Small Buildings (Draft only)

1 The planning Authority of the Commonwealth of Dominica restricts the size of buildings for which the
Guidelines can be used to 2,500 sq. fi.

(18-3)
 iii) OECS Building Guidelines:

e) Information on pre-cast concrete construction is given in Part

2 Section 6 sub-section 16 of CUBiC. Information is
provided in that Section on the design of pre-cast wall panels,
details of construction, identification and marking, and
transportation, storage and erection.

f) All materials and systems used shall be based on the

requirement to resist the dead and live loads imposed,
especially wind and earthquake loads as provided for in
Section l2 - Dead and Live Loads. Materials shall also be
chosen for their resistance to corrosion and to rot. It is
therefore necessary that current methods of corrosion
resistance for steel members and wood preservatives for
timber be employed. The developer must provide
information on the standards being used for corrosion
resistance and wood preservation for the approval of the
Authority.

g) Sizes of timber members given in this Section are the

recommended minimum sizes. It is the responsibility of the
designer to determine the appropriate sizes to be used in any
situation based on based on rational calculations. The sizes
of timber members given in this Section are nominal sizes.

h) The Director reserves the right to ensure that the design and
construction of all buildings conform to all of the relevant
Sections of the Building Code, and developers and designers
shall design and construct all buildings accordingly.

1802 WOOD-FRAME CONSTRUCTION

1802.1 Scope

The requirements for wood-frame construction shall conform to the

provisions of Section 14 - Timber Construction and to Part 2
Section 8 of CUBiC and to this Section.

1802.2 Nails

a) Nails specified shall be common steel wire nails or common

Spiral nails. All nails shall be long enough so that they
penetrate the second member a distance equal to the
thickness of the member being nailed thereto. Splitting of
wood members shall be minimized by staggering the nails in
the direction of the grain and by keeping nails well in from
the edges.

b) Nailing of framing and wood members shall conform to Part

2 Section 8 of CUBiC.

(18-4)
 1802.3 Sizes, Spacing and Allowable Spans

The spans for wood joists, rafters and beams shall conform to the
spans shown in Table C-1 of the Building Guidelines, and in Table
2.825.1 in Part 2 Section 8 of CUBiC for the uniform live loads
shown in the Table.

1802.4 Notching and Drilling

a) Holes drilled in roof, floor or ceiling framing members shall

be not larger than 1/4 of the depth of the member and shall
be located not less than 2" from the edges, unless the depth
of the member is increased by the size of the hole.

b) Floor, roof and ceiling framing members may be notched

provided the notch is located on the top of the member
within 1/2 of the joist depth from the edge of bearing and is
not deeper than 1/3 the joist depth, unless the depth of the
member is increased by the size of the notch.

c) Wall studs shall not be notched drilled or otherwise damaged

so that the undamaged portion of the stud is less than 2/3 the
depth of the stud if the stud is load-bearing, or 1-1/2" if the
stud is non-load-bearing, unless the weakened studs are
suitably reinforced.

d) The top plates in load-bearing walls and partitions shall not

be notched, drilled or otherwise weakened to reduce the
undamaged width to less than 2 " unless the weakened plates
are suitably reinforced.

e) Roof truss members shall not be notched, drilled or otherwise

weakened unless such notching or drilling is allowed for in
the design of the truss.

f) Bird mouth connections (rafter to roof plate) are not

recommended as the timber rafters are reduced in section
and the remaining section may not be adequate to prevent
failure by shear.

1802.5 Anchorage

a) Building frames shall be suitably anchored to the foundation

walls to resist wind and earthquake forces, unless a
structural analysis shows that such anchoring is not
necessary.

b) Anchorage shall be provided in conformance with the

provisions of 1802.14 and Part 2 Section 8 of CUBiC.

(18-5)
1802.6 Sill Plates (see also 1802.10)
a) Where sill plates provide bearing for the floor system they
shall be not less than 2" by 4" material.
b) Sill plates shall be levelled by setting them on a full bed of
mortar.

1802.7 Beams to Support Floors

a) Beams shall have even and level bearing and the length of
bearing at end supports shall not be less than 4 inches.

b) Steel beams shall be shop primed.

c) Where a beam is made up of individual pieces of lumber

that are nailed or otherwise permanently fixed together,
the individual members shall be 1 - 1/2 in. or greater in
thickness and installed on edge.

d) Where the individual members of a beam described in

1802.7 c) are butted together to form a joint, each joint
shall occur over a support, except that where the beams
are continuous over more than one span, the joints may be
located at or within 6" of the end quarter points of the
clear span of the beam.

e) Joints in individual members of beams that are located at

or near the end quarter points described in 1802.7 d)
shall not occur in adjacent members at the same quarter
point and shall not reduce the effective beam width by
more than half. Members joined at quarter points shall be
continuous over the adjacent supports.

f) Except as provided in 1802.7 g), where 1-1/2" members

are laid on edge to form a built- up beam, individual
members shall be nailed together with a double row of
nails at least 2-1/2" in length, spaced not more than 18"
apart in each row with the end nails located 4" to 6" from
the end of each piece.

g) Where 1-1/2" members in built-up wood beams are not

nailed together as provided in 1802.7 f), they shall be
bolted together with at least 1/2" diameter bolts equipped
with washers and spaced not more than 4 ft, on centers,
with the end bolts located not more than 2 ft, from the
ends of the members.

1802.8 Floor Joists

a) Except when supported on ribbon boards, or when
supported by appropriate joist hangers as in 1802.8 c),
floor joists shall have not less than 4” length of end
bearing. Ribbon boards shall be not less than 4” length
of end bearing. Ribbon boards shall be not less than 1”
by 4” lumber let into the studs.

(18-6)
 b) Floor joists may be supported on the top of beams or
may be framed into the sides of beams.

c) When framed into the side of a wood beam, the joists shall
preferably be supported on joist hangers or other acceptable
mechanical connectors, or on ledger strips of minimum
dimensions of 1-1/2" by 3" nailed to the side of the
supporting beam.

d) When framed into the side of steel beams, the joists may
be supported on the bottom flange of the beam or on not
less than 1-1/2" by 2" lumber bolted to the web with not
less than 1/4" diameter bolts spaced not more than 2 ft.
apart.

e) Unless ceiling furring or plywood cladding is installed

on the underside of floor joists, floor joists shall be
restrained from twisting at the end supports and at
intervals between the supports not exceeding 7 ft. End
restraint should be provided by a suitably designed steel
connection to the support. Restraint at intermediate
locations shall be obtained by 1 - 1/2" by 2" cross
bridging.

Blocking tightly fitted between joists and securely nailed in

place is also acceptable for restraining joist twisting.

f) Header joists around floor openings shall be doubled

when they exceed 4 ft, in length. The size of header
joists exceeding 10 ft. in length shall be determined by
calculations.

g) Trimmer joists around floor openings shall be doubled

when the length of the header joist exceeds 32". When
the header joist exceeds 6ft. 6in. in length the size of the
trimmer joists shall be determined by calculations.

h) When tail joists and header joists are supported by the

floor framing, they shall be supported by suitable joist
hangers or nailing.

i) Non-loadbearing partitions parallel to floor joists shall be

supported on beams, loadbearing walls or doubled joists
where the partition is over 6 ft. in length and contains
openings that are not full ceiling height. Where such
partitions contain no openings or openings that are full
height, the joists need not be doubled. Non-loadbearing
partitions less than 6 ft. in length need not be supported
on framing but may be supported by the subfloor.

j) Doubled joists may be separated not more than 8 in. by

blocking, if the blocking is not less than 1-1/2” by 4”
lumber spaced not more than 4 ft. apart.

(18-7)
 k) Non-loadbearing partitions at right angles to the floor joists are
not restricted as to location.

1) Loadbearing interior walls parallel to floor joists shall be

supported by beams or walls of sufficient strength to transfer
safely the design loads to the vertical supports.

m) Loadbearing interior walls at right angles to floor joists shall

be located nor more than 3 ft. from the joist support when the
wall does not support a floor, and not more than 2 ft. from the
joist support when the wall supports one or more floors, unless
the joist size is designed to support such loads.

n) Floor joists supporting roof loads shall not be cantilevered

more than 10” beyond their supports where 2" by 8” joists are
used, and not more than 2' 6" beyond their supports where 2”
by 10" or larger joists are used. The cantilevered portions shall
not support floor loads from other stories unless calculations
are provided to show that the allowable design stresses of the
cantilevered joists are not exceeded.

o) Table C-1 in Section C of the Building Guidelines gives the

recommended joist sizes for various spans of domestic loading
using standard pitch pine lumber available in the OECS. Table
2.825.1 of CUBiC should be read for more precise information
on recommended spans for various loadings and spans.

p) While minimum dimensions are given in 1802.8 n), the designer

is responsible for calculating the length of cantilever that can be
accommodated safely with various sizes of joists, taking into
account the wind loads and other loads on the building.

1802.9 Wall Studs

a) Studs shall be not less than 2" by 4" and where supporting more
than one floor and a roof shall be not less than 2" by 6" or 3 by
4".

b) Maximum allowable height of 2” by 4” and 3” by 4” stud

framing shall be 14 ft. , and of 2” by 6” stud framing shall be 20
ft unless the wall is otherwise laterally supported. Solid wood
bridging shall be placed at intervals of not over 8 ft.

c) No studding shall be spaced more than 2 ft on centers unless

vertical supporting members in the walls are designed as
columns.

(18-8)
 d) Studs in exterior and bearing walls shall be placed with the
longer dimension perpendicular to the wall.

e) Wall studs shall preferably be continuous for the full

storey height except at openings.

f) Corners and intersections shall be designed to provide

support for the vertical edges of interior and exterior
cladding materials and in no instance shall exterior corners
be framed with less than the equivalent of two studs,
Where the vertical edges of interior cladding at wall
intersections are supported at vertical intervals by blocking
or other acceptable method, the vertical distance between
such supports shall not exceed the maximum distance
between supports.

g) Studs shall be doubled on each side of openings so that the

inner studs extend from the lintel to the bottom wall plate
and the outer studs extend from the top wall plates to the
bottom wall plate.

h) Single studs may be used on either side of openings in

non-loadbearing partitions not required to be fire
separations with fire-resistance ratings provided the studs
extend from the top wall plate to the bottom wall plate.

i) Recommended sizes of studs are given in Table 18-1.

Table 18-1

Recommended Sizes of Studs

Size (in.) Spacing (in.) Maximum Height (ft-in.)

2x4 16 7-6
3x4 16 8-0
3x6 16 9-0
2x4 24 7-0
3x4 24 7-6
3x6 24 9-0

The recommended sizes and heights given are for standard lumber
normally available in the OECS. It is recommended that designers
ensure that the specifications of the lumber being used are such
that the bending and shear stresses of the lumber can meet the
conditions given in the table above.

1802.10 Base Plates

a) Base plates for wall studs shall conform to the requirements of

Part 2 Section 8 of CUBiC.

(18-9)
 b) The following provisions must be made:

i) In stud bearing walls:

■ double plates must be used around the entire exterior walls

■ the top plate must be doubled or lapped at each intersection

with walls and partitions.

■ joints in the upper or lower members of the top plates must

be lapped not less than 4 inches.

ii) Plates on masonry or concrete walls:

Plates or sills resting on masonry or concrete walls must be treated

with a suitable preservative and must not be less than 3" by 6",
bolted to the masonry or concrete at the corners and at not more
than 4 ft intervals with 18 in. long l/2" bolts.

iii) Base plates on concrete or masonry must have a suitable damp

proof course under the plate.

1802.11 Framing over Openings

a) Openings in non-loadbearing walls shall be framed with not less than 2”

thick material the same width as the studs and securely nailed to adjacent
studs.

b) Openings for doors in non-loadbearing walls required to be fire separations

with a fire-resistance rating shall be framed with the equivalent of at least
two 2" thick members that are the same width as the wall plates.

c) All openings in loadbearing walls shall be provided with headers or lintels

of not less than 2" nominal thickness placed on edge. Such headers or
lintels shall have not less than 2" solid bearing at each end.

1802.12 Roof and Ceiling Framing

a) Figures 14 and 18 in the Building Guidelines show typical roof framing for
small buildings. Such rafters are generally placed at intervals of 2 ft.
depending on the size of purlins and sizes of rafters. Roof framing shall be
doubled on each side of openings greater than 2 rafters or joist spacings.

b) Rafters shall be located directly opposite each other and tied together at the
peal, or may be offset by their own thickness if nailed to a ridge board not
less than 3/4” thick.

(18-10)
 c) Framing members shall be connected by gusset plates or
suitable steel connectors, except that where the roof
framing on opposite sides of the peak is assembled
separately, such as in the case of factory built houses, the
manufacturer shall supply adequate fixings made up of 18
gauge steel plate with bolts or screws to ensure that both
sides of the roof structure are firmly attached to each
other. The design of the fixings and the procedure for
installation of the roof must be approved by the Director.

d) Hip and valley rafters shall be not less than 2" greater in depth
than the common rafters and not less than 2" thick, actual
dimension.

e) Dwarf walls and struts may be used to provide intermediate

support to reduce the span for rafters and joists. When struts
are used they shall be not less than 2'' by 4" material extending
from each rafter to a loadbearing wall at an angle of not less
than 45 degrees to the horizontal.

f) When dwarf walls are used for rafter support, they shall be
framed in the same manner as loadbearing walls and securely
fastened top and bottom to the roof and ceiling framing to
prevent over-all movement, Solid blocking shall be installed
between floor joists beneath dwarf walls that enclose finished
rooms.

g) Except as provided in 1802.12 h), the ridge of the roof shall be

supported by a loadbearing wall extending from the ridge to
suitable bearing or by a ridge beam of not less than 1-1/2" by
6" material, Such ridge beam shall be supported at intervals not
exceeding 4 ft by not less than 1-1/2" by 4" members
extending vertically from the ridge to suitable bearing.

h) When the roof slope is 1 in 3 or more, the ridge support may be

omitted provided the lower ends of the rafters are adequately
tied to prevent outward movement. These may consist of tie
rods or ceiling joists forming a continuous tie for opposing
rafters and nailed in accordance with Part 2 Section 8 of
CUBiC.

i) Roof trusses shall be designed by an experienced engineer or

architect in accordance with the appropriate requirements in
Part 2 Section 8 of CUBiC.

j) Roof joists supporting a finished ceiling other than plywood

shall be restrained from twisting along the bottom edges by
means of furring blocking, cross bridging or strapping
conforming with 1802.8 e).

(18-11)
 k) Ceiling Joists support the loads of the ceiling and should not be
made to support rafter loads. In general practice, joists
supporting a plaster ceiling shall be spaced not more than 16” on
centers. They shall be not less than 2” x 2” lumber spanning not
more than 24 inches for ceilings of 1/2” plaster board. Where
the ceiling joists are used to support fiber board or plywood
ceilings the spacing and size of joist shall be as follows:

Table 18-2

Spans and Sizes of Ceiling Joists

Maximum Span (ft. in.) Maximum Spacing (in.) Width & Depth (in.)
7-0 16 2x4
6-0 24 2x4

11-6 16 2x6
10-0 24 2x8

1802.13 Bearing
Joists and rafters shall bear on wood plates and shall have not less than
4'' of bearing except as provided in Part 2 Section 8 of CUBiC.

1802.14 Anchorage

Anchorage for joists and rafters shall conform with the requirements of
Part 2 Section 8 of CUBiC. Anchorage must be continuous from the
foundations to the roof, to ensure that all parts of the building are
securely fastened to the foundations.

The anchorage systems recommended are shown in Figures C-1, C-2 and
C-3, of the Building Guidelines. The anchorage for the base plates
consist of bolts fixed into the concrete or masonry as in 1802.10. The
anchorage for the roof structure consists of galvanized hurricane straps or
steel plates bolted to the rafters and to the plates. The steel plates or
patented galvanized hurricane anchors must not be less than 18 gauge
thick.

1802.15 Sheathing

a) Floor sheathing requirements shall conform with the provisions of

Sub-Section 1406.4.

b) Roof sheathing requirements shall conform with the provisions of

Sub-Section 1406.2.

(18-12)
 c) Storm sheathing of exterior stud walls shall conform with the
requirements of Sub-Section 1406.9c) and d) and to Part 2 Section 8
of CUBiC.

1803 POST, BEAM AND PLANK CONSTRUCTION

1803.1 General

a) The size and spacing of posts and beams and the span and thickness
of floor and roof decking shall be calculated in conformance with
Part 2 Section 8 of CUBiC except when specific dimensions are
provided in this Sub-Section.

b) Requirements for nails, lumber, notching and drilling, anchorage

and sill plates shall conform to Sub-section 1802.

1803.2 Decking

a) Floor and roof decking shall consist of not less than 1" lumber laid
on the fiat or on edge.

b) Plank floor decking laid on the fiat shall be not more than 8" wide
and shall be tongued-and-grooved or splined, unless a separate
underlay is installed or the flooring consists of wood strips at right
angles to the decking.

1803.3 Beams

a) Loadbearing beams shall be solid, built-up, glued-laminated or

plywood web beams. Where glued assemblies extend to the exterior
waterproof glue shall be used, except that where the exposed
portion is adequately protected against wetting water-resistant glue
may be used.

b) Loadbearing roof beams shall be securely connected to the exterior

wall framing and the centre loadbearing wall or centre beams to
resist adequately the uplift forces due to wind.

c) The length of end bearings for loadbearing beams shall not be less
than 4 ".

d) When loadbearing beams are supported by mechanical connectors,

the connectors shall be capable of supporting the design loads.

e) Joints in loadbeating beams occurring not over solid supports shall

be designed in accordance with the provisions of CUBiC Part 2
Section 8.

f) Opposing loadbearing beams shall be tied together at the joints by

means of splices or suitable mechanical connectors.

(18-13)
 1803.4 Posts (see 1406.5)

a) Posts shall be solid, built-up or laminated.

b) Where wall sheathing does no provide-suitable anchorage, exterior

wall columns shall be anchored to the wall plate by suitably
engineered anchors of not less than 16 gauge thick steel angles.

c) Solid posts and individual members in built-up posts shall extend in

one piece the full height of the wall storey.

d) Intermediate studs or blocking shall be provided between posts in

post and beam walls for the support of exterior and interior
cladding.

1803.5 Plank Frame Wall Construction

a) Thickness of plank framing in plank frame walls shall conform to

Table 18-1. The unsupported height of 1-1/2" vertical plank
non-loadbearing partitions shall not exceed 12 ft.

b) Vertical framing in plank frame walls shall consist of not less than
10" wide planks spaced not more than 8 ft. on centers.

c) Vertical framing in plank frame walls shall not bear on wood

members with the grain at right angles to the vertical framing except
where bearing on sills.

Table 18-3

Nominal Thickness of Plank Framing

Supported load ( Including dead load and Minimum Plank Thickness, (in)
ceiling)
Roof with or without attic storage 1-1/2
Roof with or without attic storage plus 1 floor 1-3/4
Roof with or without attic storage plus 2 floor 2-1/2

d) Corners of plank frame walls shall be formed by butting and

fastening together the face and edge of 2 planks.

e) Vertical framing in plank frame walls shall be provided on each side

of every opening, except that a window opening not more than 2ft.
6in width may be supported on one side only by a vertical member.
In such cases the opposite jamb of the window or short upright to
which it is attached shall bear on the filler wall plank immediately
below, which in turn shall be notched into the vertical structural
members on each side.

(18-14)
 f) Where horizontal planks act as loadbearing lintels or headers they
shall be framed into vertical members by dovetailing so that not
less than a 2" length of bearing is provided.

g) Openings in loadbearing plank frame walls shall be bridged with

lintels designed to carry superimposed loads to adjacent vertical
members.

h) In buildings of residential occupancy where spans of supported

joists do not exceed 16 ft and the spans of trusses do not exceed
32 ft the spans for wood lintels shown in Table 18-2 may be used
for plank frame walls.

i) Planks laid diagonally will reduce the tendency of the building to

be pushed out of shape by lateral forces. Such planking shall be
trimmed at the edges to fit the wall or floor plate or vertical edge
framing members and nails should not be closer to the edge of the
plank than 1 inch.

j) Non-loadbearing horizontal members (fillers) in plank frame walls

shall be securely fastened to the vertical framing.

Table 18-4

Lintel Spans

Lintel Size, (in.) (nominal) Maximum Span, (ft)

2x6 5.0
2x8 6.0
2 x 10 7.0
3x8 7.0
3 x 10 9.0

1804 SHEET STEEL STUD WALL FRAMING

1804.1 Application

This Sub-section applies to sheet steel studs for use in non-loadbearing

exterior walls and interior partitions. Information on the design and
construction of steel framed structures using cold formed steel sections
can also be found in the Cold Formed Steel Design Manual, August 1986
Edition, with December 11, 1989 Addendum, published by the American
Iron and Steel Institute.

(18-15)
1804.2 Design Criteria

a) Where loadbearing steel studs are used they shall be designed

in conformance with Part 2 Section 7 of CUBiC.

b) Steel studs and runners shall conform to ASTM C645-76,

"Non-load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and
Rigid Furring Channels for Screws", or equivalent standard.

c) Screws for the application of cladding materials to steel studs,

runners and furring channels shall conform to ASTM
646-78a, '' Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum
Sheet Material to Light Gauge Steel Studs'', or equivalent
standard.

d) Steel stud framing shall be clad on both sides with lath and
plaster or sheet-type material, fastened with screws or other
acceptable fasteners at the appropriate spacing as required for
interior finishes. Screws used for attaching wall finishes shall
penetrate at least 3/8'' through the metal.

e) Except as required in 1804.2 g), steel studs in non-load

bearing partitions shall have a metal thickness of not less than
24 gauge.

f) Runners for interior and exterior non-loadbearing walls shall

have a thickness of at least 24 gauge exclusive of coatings
and shall have at least 1" flanges. Note that except otherwise
approved by the Director, where the runners and other
members are required to resist lateral loads the minimum
thickness of the material shall be as set forth in Section 17.

g) Where openings for doors in non-loadbearing fire separations

required to have fire-resistance rating do not exceed 4 ft in
width, the width of steel studs shall be at least 2-1/2''. Where
openings exceed 4 ft in width, the stud width shall be at least
3-1/2". The metal thickness of the studs must be adequate for
the size of stud being used.

h) The distance of the first stud beyond the jamb of any door
opening in a fire separation required to have a fire-resistance
rating shall not exceed 16", where the distance between the
framing over the opening at the top runner exceeds 16" in
such walls, intermediate support shall be installed at intervals
of not more than 16” above the opening.

i) The size of spacing of nom-loadbearing steel studs for exterior

walls shall be in conformance with Table 18-6.

(18-16)
Contents

Appendix A: British Standards and Codes Applicable

Appendix B: U.S. Agencies

Appendix B (1): US. Standards and Codes Quoted

Appendix B (2): Other Codes

Appendix C: Sheet Metal Gauges

Appendix D (1): High Hazard Materials

Appendix D (2): Moderate Hazard Materials

Appendix D (3): bow Hazard Materials

Appendix E: Weights of Building Material

Appendix F: Accessibility Guidelines for Handicapped Persons

Appendix G: General Guidelines for Fire Resistive Construction

Appendix H: Requirements of Group Occupancies

Appendix H (1): Group A

Appendix H (2): Group B

Appendix H (3): Group C

Appendix H (4): Group D

Appendix H (5): Group E

Appendix H (6): Group F

Appendix I: Classification by Types of Construction

Appendix I (1): Type 1 Buildings (Fire Resistive)

Appendix I (2): Type 2 Buildings (Semi-Fire Resistive)

Appendix I (3): Type 3 Buildings (Ordinary Masonry)

Appendix I (4): Type 4 Buildings (Non-combustible)

Appendix I (5): Type 5 Buildings (Wood Frame)

 APPENDIX A

BRITISH STANDARDS AND CODES APPLICABLE

Item Code No. Description

or
Standard

A1 BS144 Wood preservation using coal tar creosotes

A2 BS373 Testing small clear specimens of timber
A3 BS405 Expanded metal (steel) for general purposes
A4 BS497 Manhole covers, road gully gratings and frames for
drainage purposes

A5 BS5911 Precast concrete pipes, fittings and ancillary products

A6 BS648 Schedule of weights of building materials
A7 BS690 Asbestos-cement slates and sheets
A8 BS8004:1986 Code of practice for foundations
A9 BS915 High alumina cement
A10 BS6925 Mastic asphalt (limestone aggregate)

A11 BS1187 Wood blocks for floors

A12 BS1191 Gypsum building plasters
A13 BS1200 Sands for mortar for plain and reinforced brickwork,
block walling and masonry

A14 BS1230 Gypsum plaster board

A15 BS1282 Guide to the choice, use and application of wood
preservatives
A16 BS1297 Grading and sizing of softwood flooring
A17 BS1369 Metal lathing (steel) for plastering
A18 BS1370 Low heat Portland cement

A19 BS1521 Waterproof building papers

A20 BS1579 Timber connectors
A21 BS6323 Seamless and welded steel tubes
A22 BS1876 Automatic flushing for urinals

A23 BS1881 Methods of testing concrete

A24 BS5135 Arc welding of steels
A25 BS2994 Cold rolled steel sections

(A-1)
 APPENDIX A (Cont'd)

Item Code No. Description

or
Standard

A26 BS3260 PVC (vinyl) asbestos floor tiles

A27 BS3261 Unbacked flexible PVC flooring'
A28 BS3284 Polythene pipe (type50) for cold water services
A29 BS3921 Clay brick and blocks
A30 BS4360 Specification for weldable structural steels

A31 BS4482 Hard drawn steel wire for the reinforcement of

concrete
A32 BS4483 Steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete
A33 BS8000 Part 3 Code of practice for masonry
A34 BS5268 Structural use of timber

A35 BS5628 Structural recommendations for load bearing walls

A36 BS5655 Lifts and service lifts
A37 BS5950 Structural use of steelwork in building
A38 BS8110 The structural use of concrete in buildings
A39 BS8214:1990 Code of practice for fire door assemblies with
nonmetallic leaves

A40 BS6399 Part 1 Dead and imposed loads

A41 BS8000 Part 3 Code of practice for masonry
A42 BS8000 Part 2 Code of practice for concrete work
A43 BS8005 Part 1:1987 Guide to new sewerage construction

(A-2)
 APPENDIX B

U.S. AGENCIES

Designation Institution

ACI: American Concrete Institute,

818 Connecticut Ave. N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006

AITC: American Institute of Timber Construction Inc.

333 West Hampden Ave, Englewood, Colorado 80110

AISC: American Institute of Steel Construction Inc.

Wrigley Building 44 N. Michigan Ave., Chicago,
Illinois 60611

ANSI: American National Standards Institute

1430 Broadway, New York, New York 10018

AISI: American Iron and Steel Institute

100 16th St. N.W., Washington, D.C. 20036

APA: American Plywood Association

1119 A St., Tacoma, Washington 98401

ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials

1916 Race St. Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19103

AWS: American Welding Society, Inc

2501 N.W. 7th St. Miami, Florida 33125

NBS: National Bureau of Standards

U.S. Dept. of Commerce
Washington D.C. 20402

NFiPA: National Fire Protection Association

470 Atlantic Ave., Boston Massachusetts 02210

NPA: National Particleboard Association

2306 Perkins Place, Silver Springs, Maryland

SJI: Steel Joist Institute

1703 Parham Rd, Richmond Virginia 23229

TPI: Truss Plate Institute

2400 East Devon, Des Plaines, Illinois 60018, USA

AWPB: American Wood Preservers Bureau, PO Box 6085, Arlington,

Virginia 22206, USA

(B-1)
 APPENDIX B (1)

U.S. STANDARDS AND CODES QUOTED

Item Code No Description

B1 ACI 318 Building code requirements for reinforced concrete

B2 ACI 315 Manual of standard practice for detailing reinforced concrete structures
B3 ACI 530-92 Building code requirements for concrete masonry structures
B4 ASZIM C90 Specifications for hollow load-bearing concrete masonry units
B5 ANSI A41.1 Standard requirements for reinforced masonry
B6 AITC 101
to 115 Timber construction standards

B7 NLMA National design specification for stress grade lumber and its fastenings
B8 NBSR 16 American lumber standards for softwood lumber
B9 NBS-CS Douglas fir plywood, commercial standard
B10 AISC-SJI Standard specification for open web long span steel joist construction
B11 AISC Specifications for design, fabrication and erection of structural steel for
buildings

B12 ANSI A59.1 Specifications for reinforced gypsum concrete

B13 SJI AISC Specifications and load tables for J series and H series joists
B14 AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code
B15 AWS D1.3 78 Specifications for Welding Sheet Steel in Buildings
B16 AISC Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490
Bolts
B17 ANSI/ASTM A6 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates,
Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use

B18 AISI Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Stainless Steel Members
B19 AISI A151 Structural Specifications for the Design of Light Gauge Structural
Members
B20 TPI, 1978 Design Specifications for Light Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses

(B-2)
 APPENDIX B (2)

OTHER CODES

C1 Caribbean Uniform Building Code (CUBiC)

Caricom Community Secretariat, Georgetown, Guyana

C2 National Building Code of Jamaica

Ministry of Finance and Planning, Kingston Jamaica

C3 Standard Building Code

Southern Building Code Congress International Birmingham, Alabama, USA.

C4 South Florida Building Code

Board of County Commissioners,
Metropolitan Dade County, Florida, USA.

C5 Bahamas Building Code

Ministry of Works, Nassau, Bahamas

C6 National Building Code of Canada

National Research Council of Canada, Montreal, Ottawa, Ontario, Canada

(B-3)
 APPENDIX C

STEEL SHEET METAL GAUGES

BRITISH Imperial or US Standard Gauge

(Uncoated Steel Sheets)

Wire Gauge British Standard US Standard

Thickness (inches) Thickness (inches)
4 0.2242 0.232
6 0.1943 0.192
8 0.1644 0.160
10 0.1345 0.128
12 0.1046 0.104
14 0.0747 0.080
16 0.0598 0.064
18 0.0478 0.048
20 0.0359 0.036
22 0.0299 0.028
24 0.0239 0.022
26 0.0179 0.018
28 0.0149 0.0148
30 0.0120 0.124

(C-1)
 APENDIX D

APPENDIX D (1)

HIGH HAZARD MATERIALS

1. Acetylene gas and gasses under pressure and in quantities of greater than 70 cubic meters
including hydrogen, natural ammonia, carbon monoxide, chlorine, methyl oxide and all
gasses subject to explosion, fume or toxic hazard.

2. Ammunition, explosives and fireworks manufacture

3. Apparel manufacture
4. Artificial flowers and synthetic leather manufacture
5. Celluloid and celluloid products
6. Cercal, feed, flour and grist mills
7. Cotton batting and cotton waste processes
8. Dry cleaning establishments
9. Fruit ripening processes
10. Grain elevators
11. Industries employing substances which ignite or produce flammable gasses on contact with
water

12. Kerosene, fuel, lubricating or any oil storage with a flash point under &80 degrees C.
13. Match manufacture or storage
14. Metal enameling
15. Nitra-cellulose film exchanges and laboratories
16. Paint and varnish manufacture or spraying or dipping

17. Petroleum manufacture

18. Processing of paper or cardboard in loose form
19. Refrigerating systems using high hazard refrigerants
20. Shoe polish manufacture
21. Smoke houses (industrial)

22. Straw goods manufacture or broom storage

23. Sugar and starch pulverizing mills
24. Tar, pitch or resin processing
25. Tire storage warehouses
26. Waste paper sorting or shredding, storage or baling

(D-1)
 APPENDIX D (2)

MODERATE HAZARD MATERIALS

1. Bags, cloth burlap and paper

2. Bamboo and rattan baskets
3. Belting, canvas and leather
4. Books and paper in rolls or packs
5. Boots and shoes

6. Buttons, including cloth covered, pearl and bone

7. Cardboard and cardboard boxes
8. Clothing
9. Cordage
10. Fiberboard

11. Furniture
12. Glue, mucilage and paste
13. Linoleum
14. Livestock shelters
15. Lumber yards

16. Motor vehicle repair shops

17. Petroleum warehouses for storage of lubricating oils with a flash point of 150 degrees C.
or higher

18. Photo engraving

19. Soap
20. Sugar
21. Tobacco, cigars, cigarettes
22. Upholstering and mattress manufacturing
23. Wax candles

(D-2)
 APPENDIX D (3)

LOW HAZARD MATERIALS

1. Asbestos
2. Chalk and Crayons
3. Food products
4. Glass
5. Metals

6. Motor car spares (excluding upholstery)

7. Plumbing wares
8. Porcelain and pottery
9. Talc and soapstones

Note: See Tables 3.107.2, 3.111.2, and 3.111.3 of Part 3, Caribbean Uniform Building Code

(D-3)
 APPENDIX E

WEIGHTS OF BUILDING MATERIAL

Material Weight, lb/sq.ft

Ceilings

Plasterboard, unplastered 3
Plaster, 3/4 in, and wood lath 8
Plaster on tile or concrete 5
Suspended metal lath and plaster 10

Floors

Hardwood flooring, 7/8 in thick 4

Sheathing, Yellow pine 1 in. thick 4
Spruce 2-1/2
Wood block, creosoted 3 in thick 15
Cement finish per in. thick 12
Terrazzo tile per in. thick including base 12
Gypsum Slab, per in thick 5

Roofs

Corrugated metal, galvanized:

20gauge 1.66
24gauge 1.16
28gauge 0.78

Roofing felt, 3 ply and gravel 5-1/2

Roofing felt, 5 ply and gravel 6-1/2
3 ply ready roofing 1
Shingles, wood 3
Tile or slate 5to 20

Partitions

Channel Studs, metal lath, cement plaster,

Solid 2” thick 17.5
Studs, 2” x 4”, wood or metal lath,
3/4 in. plaster both sides 18

(E-1)
 APPENDIX E (Cont'd)

Studs, 2" x 4", plaster board,

1/2" plaster both sides 18

Plaster, 1/2" on clay tile (one side) 4

Mortar Rubble Masonry

Limestone 150

Dry Rubble Masonry

Limestone 125

Earth etc Excavated

Sand, gravel, dry, loose 90 to 105

Sand, gravel, dry, packed 100 to 120
Clay, dry 63
Clay, damp, plastic 110
Clay, and gravel, dry 100
Earth, dry, loose 76
Earth, dry, packed 95
Earth, moist, packed 96
Earth, mud, packed 115
Riprap, limestone 80 to 115

Excavations in Water

Sand or gravel 60
Sand or gravel and clay 65
Clay 80
River mud 90
Soil 70
Stone riprap 65

Concrete Block

8” x 8” x 16” (from the US) 35 to 40 lbs per

block
8” x 8” x 16” (from the Dominican Republic or
other areas with igneous or extrusive rock) 45 to 50 lbs per
block

(E-2)
 APPENDIX E (Cont’d)

Concrete

With aggregate (basalt or other extrusive rocks)

eg from Haiti, Dominican Republic 155 to 160 lbs/cu.ft

With aggregate (sedimentary rock),

From Jamaica, Bahamas and
other quarries 145 to 150 lbs/cu.ft

With aggregate from limestone (local sources) 140 to 145 lbs/cu.ft

(E-3)
 APPENDIX F

ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES FOR HANDICAPPED PERSONS

1. Scope

1.1 The following guidelines are intended to introduce designers and builders to the
minimum provisions required for safe access for handicapped persons to
building facilities. The guidelines should be used in conjunction with the
Building Code provisions and in conjunction with the specific recommendations
of the bodies and institutions engaged in assisting handicapped persons with the
minimum provisions needed for access to all facilities.

1.2 Designers should also be aware of the United States Americans with Disabilities
Act (ADA) which was signed into law in July 1990, and which determines the
minimum provisions for disabled persons in public institutions.

The Act includes:

a) Title 1: Employment
b) Title 11: State and Local Government services regardless of the receipt
of federal funds
c) Title 111: Public Accommodation - hotels, retail establishments etc
d) Title 1V: Telecommunications
e) Title V: Miscellaneous Provisions - includes attorney’s fees.

1.3 Designers of public buildings in Groups A and B (a) would therefore be expected
to consult the relevant bodies such as the local chapter of the institutes for the
blind for specific information based on the research being carried out by these
bodies. In accordance with 501.2(e), the Director will examine the plans for new
public facilities to ensure that adequate provisions have been made for
physically handicapped persons.

1.4 The following should be considered as minimum provisions for facilities for
handicapped persons in wheel chairs using public buildings.

a) All public buildings - post offices, hospitals, asylums, sanatoria, airport

terminals and sea port terminals - and all other buildings in Group B (a)
shall have provisions for the physically handicapped including those
persons in wheel chairs.

b) It is desirable that other public buildings such as banks, theatres,

assembly halls, hotels and cinemas, have some provisions which would
allow ease of access by persons in wheel chairs.

c) Hotels and other establishments offering accommodation to the public

should have at least one bedroom for every 25 bedrooms, or a fraction
thereof, made accessible for disabled persons.

(F-1)
 d) In new housing developments consideration should be given to constructing at
least one dwelling unit in every 25 units (or a fraction thereof) to be accessible to
disabled persons.

2. Relevant Guidelines

2.1 The following Guidelines and Codes provide detailed information on the design of
barrier free facilities:

- BS 5588 Means of Escape for disabled persons

- Caribbean Uniform Building Code, Sections 3.125 and 3.126

- Barrier Free Design - A National Standard for Canada; Canadian

Standards Association, June 1990

- Access Needs of Blind and Visually Impaired Travelers in Transportation

Terminals: A Study and Design Guidelines, Canadian Institute of the Blind,
December 1987.

- National Building Code of Canada - Section 3.7 - Barrier Free Design; National
Research Council of Canada, Ottawa

2.2 It is suggested that designers also read the following:

- "Building without barriers for the disabled” - Sarah P. Harkness and James N.
Groom Jr.; Whitney Library of Design, 1515 Broadway, New York, New York
10036.

3. Building Approaches and Entrances

a) In every public building at least one primary entrance at ground floor level shall be
accessible from the street entrance or parking lot by means of a walkway or ramp with a
gradient of not more than one in twenty. There shall be no steps or abrupt changes in
grade of the access way.

b) At every entrance there should be a level platform at least 3' 0” by 4' 0” to afford the
opening and closing of doors by persons in wheel chairs. (Figure 26 in TCI Building
Guidelines). Such platforms should also be constructed at every change of grade or
direction of the ramp and at 30 foot intervals on a long ramp.

c) A clear space of 4' 0” x 4' 0” would allow access for both forward and side approaches
to doors. A clear space of 5’ 0” x 5’ 0” is required for a wheelchair to pivot 180 degrees.

d) Kerbs intended to be crossed by handicapped persons in wheel chairs should be cut to

provide a passage of not more than 4 inches high at the kerb and at least 4 feet wide.
The lip of the kerb should not be greater than 1” high. Such ramps should be of
contrasting color and texture.

(F-2)
 e) Access ramps should be provided with handrails on both sides at a height of 2' 8"
measured from the ramp surface to the top of the rail.

f) Gratings across entrances and walkways must be avoided. Where gratings are
absolutely necessary for drainage the apertures of the gratings should not be greater
than 3/4" and the bars at least 1/2" wide set at right angles to the direction of travel.
Gratings and manholes covers should fit securely and be flush with the walk way or
street.

g) Catch basins should be constructed outside of pedestrian crossings.

4. Walkways and Sidewalks

a) The surfaces of walkways should be constructed of non-slip covering.

b) Walkways in passages and courtyards should be 4' 6" to 6' 6" wide with shoulders
about 4' 0" wide.

c) Slopes should be no greater than 5%

d) Cross slopes no greater than 2%

e) Walkway widths for persons using crutches or service dogs should d be a minimum
of 3’ wide

f) Sidewalks should be 5' 0" wide

g) Slopes for sidewalks should be 2-1/2% to 5% maximum

5. Doors and Corridors

a) Doors should be openable in a single motion with one hang and with a force of no
greater than 5 pounds, and should have a clear swing of at least 90 degrees. For
sliding doors the force required to operate the door should not be greater than 8.5
pounds.

b) Doorways should be a minimum of 32 inches clear.

c) Door latches, handles and pull bars should be easy to grasp and between 2' 0" and 4'
0" high. Knobsets should not be used.

d) Corridors should be at least 4’ 0” wide and should be equipped with an easy to grasp
hand rail along one side. The handrail should be at a height of 2’ 8” to 2’ 11” and be
1-1/2” clear of the wall.

e) Expert in confined spaces and except for doors to toilets and washrooms, all doors in
corridors should open into rooms.

(F-3)
 f) The minimum clear floor space or ground area for wheel chairs is 3’ 6” x 4’ 0”. An
area 4’ 0” x 4’ 0” allows access to doors for both forward and side approaches.

g) The space required for maneuvering wheel chairs at doorways is given in the
Table F-1.

Table F-1

Applicable Dimensions for Wheel Chair Space at Doorways

Description Floor depth Space width Required space beside

(ft.-in) (ft. –in.) latch (ft.-in.)
Front Approach Side
hinged Pull Push 5-0 4-0 2-0
4-0 4-0 1-0
Latch Side Approach
Pull Side 4-0 5-0 2-0
Push Side 3-6 5-0 2-0
Hinged Side Approach
Pull Side 5-0 5-0 2-0
Push Side 3-6 4-6 1-5
Sliding Door
Front approach 4-0 3-0 1-9
Side approach 3-6 4-6 1-10

6. Elevators

Where elevators are required to access upper floors at least one elevators should be
constructed to meet the requirements given below:

a) Elevators should be accessible from the ground floor entrance

b) The elevator cab shall have a clear area of not less than 20 square feet, with a
minimum dimension of 4.5 feet.

c) The elevator door should be at least 32 inches in clear width

d) Elevators should be self leveling with a maximum tolerance of 1 inch.

e) Control buttons should be located not more than 4.5 feet above the floor.

f) Handrails should be provided at a height of between 2’ 8” and 2’ 11”.

(F-4)
7. Theatres, Cinemas and Auditoria

a) There should be accommodation for persons in wheel chairs attending functions at

the public buildings as follows:

Table F-2

Spaces Required For Wheel Chairs

Number of Fixed Seating Number of Spaces Required for Wheel Chairs

Up to 200 2
201 to 300 3
301 to 400 4
401 to 500 5
501 to 600 6
6 plus 1 for each additional increment of 500
Over 600 seats to a maximum of 12.

b) Wheel chair spaces should be not less than 4' 4" deep by 2' 6" wide and should
preferably be integrated into the regular seating.

c) Each space should be on an aisle and should be on the same level and near to an exit.

d) Where a public address communication system is installed, headphones outlets

should be provided for persons in wheel chairs at a ratio of 1 such outlet for every
100 seats with a minimum of two.

8. Ground and Floor Surfaces

a) The surfaces of the ground and floor on which disabled persons must walk should be
firm, slip resistant and free of glare, Any change in level should be treated as per
Table F-3.

b) The floor surface of detectable warning surfaces should be about 3' 0" long and be of
contrasting color.

c) Floor surfaces should be slip resistant as far as possible. The slip resistance of
common surfaces is given in Table F-4.

(F-5)
 Table F-3

Changes in Level

Vertical Rise (in.) Edge Treatment

0-1/4 May be vertical
1/4-1/2 Should be beveled. Max slope 1:2.
Over 1/2 Treat as ramp

Table F-4

Slip Resistance of Floor Finishes

Surface Dry and Unpolished Wet

Clay tiles Very good Very good
Carpet* Very good Good
Clay tiles (textured) Very good Good (External)
Cork tiles Very good
PVC with non-slip granules Very good Good
Mastic asphalt Good Good
Concrete** Good Poor to fair
Terrazzo Good Poor to fair

Notes: *The soft weave of the carpet may make travel in a straight line difficult

**textured finish to concrete improves its resistance when wet.

9. Protruding Objects

It is recommended that designers consult Section 3 of the National building Code of Canada
for the proper placing of protruding objects. Objects protruding from walls with their leading
edges between 2’ 6” and 6’ 6”, shall protrude not more than 4” into pedestrian areas such as
sidewalks, halls, corridors, etc.

10. Walls

a) Walls surfaces should not be rough or uneven and should have contrasting colors.

b) Mirrored walls should not be used as they may be confusing to the visually impaired.

(F-6)
 c) Glass panels may be confused as egress routes.

11. Detectable Objects

The following guide should be considered in the placing of objects on walls or in rooms to
be traversed or used by the physically handicapped.

a) Objects with their leading edges 2' 4" from the floor may protrude any amount.

b) Objects between 2' 4" and 6' 8" from the floor shall not overhang more than 12
inches.

c) The maximum height of the bottom edge of an object with a space of more than 12
inches between supports shall be 2' 3" from the floor.

d) Freestanding objects shall not overhang more than 1 foot between 2' 3" and 6' 5".

12. Headroom

The minimum headroom - clear height from the floor to ceiling (or airy supporting beam or
member) - is 7 feet.

13. Bathroom and Toilet Facilities

a) All public buildings shall have at least one toilet specially constructed for use by
handicapped persons. Such toilet compartments shall carry on the door to the
compartment the international sign indicating that such a compartment has been
specially constructed for use by handicapped persons. The sketches (Figure 26 in
TCI Building Guidelines) show planning arrangements for the toilet compartments
and the international signs used far handicapped facilities.

b) Toilet fixtures should be so placed as to facilitate the turning of a wheelchair.

c) Handrails of not less than 1 inch and not more than 1-1/2 inches O.D. shall be
provided on both sides of the water closet, and mounted 34 inches above and
parallel to the floor. The handrail should be placed with the front end about 2 feet in
front of the water closet.

d) Toilet seats should be 18 inches to 24 inches off the floor. They should be equipped
with:

i) hand operated flushing controls that can be reached by persons in a wheel

chair and

ii) a back support.

(F-7)
 e) Wash basins should be placed a maximum of 2' 10” high with a clear space of at
least 2' 3" high by 3' 0” under the basin. The wash basin should be equipped with
faucet handles of the lever type without spring loading. The soap and towel
dispensers should be located not more than 4 feet above the floor and be accessible
to persons on a wheel chair.

f) The bottom edge of e mirror should not be more than 3' 0" above the floor.

g) Where showers are provided in public assembly buildings at least one shower for
each sex should be constructed for use by handicapped persons. Such showers
should not be less than 5' 0" by 3' 0” with a threshold no higher than 1/2" and a
curtain hung 3' 0" from the back wall.

h) Doors to toilet facilities should always open outwards and be equipped with self
closing hinges or door closers.

i) Vertical and horizontal grip rails should be installed and readily accessible from
the toilet and shower.

14. Parking Lots

a) Any parking lot servicing an entrance described in 506.1 shall have a number of
level parking spaces identified by the appropriate international signs as reserved
for handicapped persons. Each reserved parking space shall not be less than 12' 0"
wide.

b) Table F-5 gives the suggested number of reserved parking spaces for handicapped
persons, Such parking spaces shall be within easy reach of an exit, and shall be so
placed that the person using the space would not be compelled to pass behind other
parked vehicles to access the building entrance, ramp or walkway.

Table F-5

Accessible Parking Spaces for the Physically Handicapped

Total Number of Parking Spaces in Lot Required Number of Spaces Reserved for
Handicapped Persons

1-50 1
51-75 2
76-100 3
101-200 4
201-500 5
above 500 1 percent of the total number of spaces

(F-8)
15. Illumination

All spaces to be used by visually impaired persons should be prodded with at least the
lighting level of 100 lx.

16. Signs

For adequate recognition of signs by the visually impaired the signs should be constructed
and placed in accordance with the following Table F-6.

Table F-6

Placing of Signs

Minimum Character Height (in.) Maximum Viewing Distance (ft.-in.)

8 20-0
5 15-0
4 8-0
3 7-10
2 5-0
1 2-6

17. Provision s for access to service in Supermarkets, Banks and other Public Places

a) Aisles.

The minimum width of aisles for persons to allow safe maneuvering by

persons in wheel chairs should be 3' 4" for travel in a straight line and 5' 0"
to provide for a 180 degree turn. In supermarkets and other public places
such as assembly halls, banks and theatres it is recommended that provision
be made for 2 persons in wheel chairs to pass, and for persons -in wheel
chairs to make a 180 degree turn. The recommended minimum width for
aisles is therefore 5' 0".

b) Counters
.
It is recommended that special seating arrangements be made at banks,
work places and lunch counters for person in wheel chairs.
Adequate room must be provided for safe maneuvering to approach the
counter.

Seating spaces at counters should have a clear floor space of not less than 2’
6” by 4’ 0”. Where a forward approach is possible there should be a clear
knee space of at least 2’ 6” wide by 1’ 8” deep by 2’ 4” high.

(F-9)
At lunch counters and at places where it is necessary to stand or sit to be served there should be at
least one such special seat available for every 30 places. There should be at least one
special counter available in banks for persons in wheel chairs.

c) Shopping Malls

The design of shopping malls should be in accordance with BS 5588 Part 10:
1991 Code of practice for shopping complexes.

18. Public Telephones

a) Wherever public telephones are installed provision shall be made for at least one
telephone to be accessible by persons in wheel chairs.

b) The maximum height of the telephone controls should be 4' 6" and a clear floor
space of not less than 3' 0" by 4' 0" shall be provided in front of the telephone. If a
clear height of 2' 6" is available for knee space, then the allowable floor space can
extend into the knee area a maximum of 4' 0”.

c) The minimum cord length should be 3' 4".

d) The telephone assembly including the enclosures shall not reduce the minimum
width required for safe passage in corridors aisles or walkways.

(F-10)
 SECTION G.

ELECTRICAL GUIDELINES FOR RESIDENTIAL AND LIGHT COMMERCIAL

CONSTRUCTION

1. General

All electrical installations and wiring shall conform to the requirements of rule 11 of the
Hydro-Electricity Rules Chapter 258 of the laws of the Commonwealth of Dominica. Work
done in accordance with the latest edition of the regulations issued by the institute of
Electrical and Electronic Engineers of Great Britain satisfies the requirement of rule 11. All
installations must be certified by the Electrical Inspector before electricity connections can
be installed.

2. Installation of electricity wiring for small buildings.

The following are basic rules to be observed in installing wiring in residential buildings:

a) Units in Bathrooms

- Sockets and switches must not be placed in bathrooms. The regulations

prescribes that a switch and or socket be placed a distance of 2.5 meters from
a shower. All switches should therefore be placed outside of the bathroom.

- Depending on the size of the bathroom, pull switches may be allowed inside
the bathroom providing they are non-conducting.

- Shaver outlets are allowed as such outlets are specifically designed for this
area.

b) Units in Kitchen

- The regulation does not give the distance between any electrical socket and
the water piping, but as a general rule, the distance of 2.5 m is applied.

- Socket(s) must be out of reach.

- Socket(s) must be located 6'-0” to 8'-0" from water piping.

c) Location of Main Switch

i) Residential Buildings

- Not in bedrooms
- Not in room likely to be locked
- Should be in an area accessible to all
- In duplex units separate main switches are required

ii) Shops and Stores

-Not in a position where general public could have easy access to the
switch.

(G-1)
iii) Public Buildings

- There is no hard and fast rule but the main switch must be located
away from the entrance.

3. Occupancy Certificates

The Planning Authority will not issue an occupancy Certificate until the electricity wiring
has been inspected and approved by the Electrical Inspector.

Dominica Electricity Services will not supply power to any building until the Electrical
Inspector has inspected the building and approved the electricity wiring.

(G-2)
 APPENDIX H (1)

REQUIREMENTS OF GROUP A OCCUPANCIES

1. DEFINMON

2. CONSTRUCTION, HEIGHT AND AREA ALLOWABLE

3. LOCATION ON PROPERTY

4. EXIT FACILITIES

5. OCCUPANCY CONTENT

6. WIDTH OF EXITS

7. MAIN FLOOR EXITS

8. BALCONY EXITS

9. EXIT DOORS

10. AISLES AND SEATING

11. LIGHT AND VENTILATION

12. HAZARDS

13. ENCLOSURE OF VERTICAL OPENINGS

14. STAGES

a) Stage construction
b) Gridirons
c) Accessory rooms
d) Proscenium walls
e) Proscenium curtains
d) Stage ventilators
g) Flame retarding requirements
h) Stage exits
i) Other requirements

15. PLATFORMS

a) Platform construction
b) Size of Platform
c) Accessory rooms
d) Screen

16. MOTION PICTURE MACHINE BOOTHS

(H-1)
17. FIRE PROTECTION AND HAZARDS

18. PLUMBING AND TOILET FACILITIES

19. EXCEPTIONS AND DEVIATIONS

20. SCHOOLS AND CHURCHES

a) Special provisions
b) Occupancy content
c) Widths of exits
d) Arrangement of exits
e) Corridors
f) Balconies
g) Floors
h) Doors

21. MIXED OCCUPANCIES

(H-2)
 APPENDIX H (1)

REQUIREMENTS OF GROUP A OCCUPANCIES

1. DEFINITION

Group A occupancy is defined in 301.2 and includes assembly uses such as theatres,
auditoria, motion-picture houses, exhibition halls, skating rinks, gymnasiums, bowling alleys,
pool rooms, restaurant, churches, dance halls, night clubs, meeting rooms, passenger rooms,
recreation facilities, and similar uses having an occupant content of 50 or more persons.

2. CONSTRUCTION, HEIGHT AND AREA ALLOWABLE

Buildings or parts of buildings, classed in Group A because of use or Occupancy shall be

Type 1 construction. Exterior walls shall have fire-resistance and opening protection,
determined by location on property, as set forth for the Type of Construction in Tables 3-4 to
3-7.

Buildings in this Group shall not be limited as to occupant content, height or area except as
may be required by the Director of Planning and as provided in the Development Manual
issued by the Department of Planning.

3. LOCATION ON PROPERTY

See Development Manual for location

The main floor shall be located at or near grade.

4. EXIT FACILITIES

Exit facilities for Group A Occupancy shall be as set forth in Section 5 and in Table 5-2.

5. OCCUPANCY CONTENT (See Section 3 Table 3-1)

For places of public assembly with fixed seats, a space of seven square feet shall be allowed
per person. For places of assembly with moveable seat& a space often square feet shall be
allowed per person. For night clubs and restaurants with tables, a space of twelve square feet
shall be allowed per person. Aisles or gangways shall not be included in these areas.

Notwithstanding the above areas required, the occupant content shall be taken as not more
than one person per fifteen square feet of aggregate gross area of all floors or parts of the
building used for assembly purposes including lobbies, corridors, dressing rooms, toilets, and
other commonly used connecting rooms and service areas used in conjunction with the
assembly occupancy.

(H-3)
 Such areas as swimming pools, bowling alleys, may be excluded or other uses separately
considered.

6. WIDTHS OF EXITS

Every place of assembly and every individual room used as a place of assembly shall have
exits of a number and width sufficient to provide for the total occupancy as given in Tables
5-2 and 5-4. The widths can be calculated by the following:

a) Areas served by doors or horizontal exits leading to the outside of the building or 22
inch unit of exit width for each one hundred persons or fraction thereof.

b) Areas served by stairs or other type of exit not as set forth in (a) above, one 2 inch
unit of exit width for each 75 persons or the fraction thereof. The minimum exit
width shall be 36 inches in all cases.

However, the number and widths of exit shall not be less than those set out in Tables 5-2
and 5-4.

7. MAIN FLOOR EXITS

a) Not less than half of the required main floor exit widths shall be to a main entrance
and exit, and the remainder shall be proportioned to the side exits. All required exits
of Group A Occupancy shall serve no other Occupancy.

b) Exits no less in width than the full width of the aisles or gangway leading thereof
shall be provided at the rear of the main-floor assembly and such exits hall lead into
a foyer or into a passage-way to the outside of the building. Any change in elevation
from a public footpath to the back of the main floor assembly or foyer shall be made
by ramps having a slope of not more than one in ten. The most obvious and direct
exit to the public street shall be and remain unobstructed.

c) The width of the foyer at any point shall not be less than the combined width of the
aisles, gangways, stairways and passageways leading thereto. The foyer shall be
separated from the assembly spaces with partitions having a fire rating of not less
than two hours. There shall be not less than two remote exits from any Groups A
Occupancy.

d) Half of the required main floor exit widths shall be proportioned to the side exits and
when more than one side exit is required, shall be equally divided in full units of
unit width to each side. The number of side exits shall be as in 502.4 g).

e) Exits shall be so arranged that the maximum distance as measured along the line of
travel to the nearest floor exit from any point shall not exceed 150 feet. (See Table
5-3)

(H-4)
8. BALCONY EXITS

Exits from a balcony shall be as specified for main-floor exits except as follows:-

Balconies having an occupancy content of less than thirty persons may be served by one 44
inch stair, and for thirty persons or more at least two exits shall be provided.

9. EXIT DOORS

All doors in the paths of egress, normally closed and latched shall be equipped with full sets
of panic hardware. No single door shall be more than 3'8" in width and no double door
ways shall be less than 3’9" in width.

10. MARKING OF EXIT DOORS

Above every exit door there shall be a lighted sign marked EXIT in letters at least 4" high
lit normally by an electric bulb and in addition fitted with an emergency battery or power
source to give light in the event of power failure. The letters shall be green and the
background white. Doors which may be confused as leading to exits, shall clearly be
marked "PRIVATE."

11. AISLES AND SEATING

a) Section 503.9 provides information on fixed seating in places of public assembly.

b) Fixed seats shall be securely fastened to the floor; moveable or folding seats for
the assembly of five hundred (500) persons or more shall be fastened together in
banks of six or more.

c) Where seating is at tables as in restaurants and night clubs aisles or gangways

shall be located so that there is not more that twenty-eight (28) feet between aisle
or gangways nor more than fourteen (14) feet between an aisle or gangway and a
wall. At each side exit there shall be a cross aisle or gangway leading to the centre
of the width of the building. Aisle or gangway widths shall be rigorously
maintained.

12. LIGHT AND VENTILATION

a) General

All portions of Groups A Occupancies customarily used by human beings and all
dressing rooms shall be provided with light and ventilation by means of windows
or skylights with an area of not less than one-eighth of the total floor area,
one-half of which shall be openable, or shall be provided with electric light and
mechanically operated ventilating system as set forth in Section 11.

(H-5)
 Ducts for the mechanical ventilation system shall serve no other Group of
Occupancy.

b) Artificial lighting

Auditorium light shall be as set forth in accordance with the requirements of the
Section 11, and emergency lighting shall be provided in all paths of egress to the
approval of the Director.

13. HAZARDS

Registers or vents supplying air back stage, supplying a projection booth or passing through
a fire wall shall be equipped with automatic closing devices activated by smoke detectors
located in the registers or vents, and supplying air fans shall be controlled with a smoke
sensing device.

14. ENCLOSURE OF VERTICAL OPENINGS

a) Vertical openings shall be enclosed as set forth in Part 3 Section 3.612 of CUBiC.

b) Elevators which serve dressing rooms, gridiron and fly galleries need not be enclosed
above the sage level.

15. STAGES

Stages, platforms and accessory features thereof shall be designed and constructed as set
forth herein.

a) Stage construction

All parts of the stage shall be designed to support not less than 125 pounds per
square foot and shall be of Type 1 construction or fire retardant timber. The room
directly under the stage shall not be used for any purpose other than the working of
traps and mechanical apparatus necessary for a performance on the stage.

Openings through stage floors shall be equipped with tight-fitting trap doors or
non-combustible materials or of wood not less than two inches thick.

b) Gridirons

Gridirons, fly galleries and pin rails shall be constructed of non-combustible

materials, but fireproofing of metal shall not be required.

c) Accessory rooms

Dressing rooms, workshops, and store rooms shall be located on the stage side of the
proscenium wall and shall be separated from each other and from the stage by
two-hour fire-resistive construction.

(H-6)
d) Proscenium walls

The proscenium wall separating the stage portion from the auditorium shall
be not less than four hours fire-resistive construction and shall extend not
lees than four feet above the roof. The proscenium wall shall not be finished
or covered with combustible materials.

Proscenium walls may have in addition to the main proscenium opening, one
opening at the orchestra-pit level and not more than two openings at the
stage-room level, each of which shall be not more than as square feet in area.
Such openings shall be quipped with self-closing fire-resistive doors.

e) Proscenium curtains

The main proscenium opening shall be provided with a self-closing, tight-

fitting dirt-resistive curtain composed largely of heat-resistive material with
no more than ten percent of weight of cotton or other combustible materials.

Such curtain shall be of one-ply thickness and shall weight not less than
three pounds per square yard and shall be painted with a mineral pain so
brushed into the cloth that no light or smoke can come through. Proscenium
curtains of non-combustible materials other than fabric may be used, with
the approval of the Director.

Proscenium curtains, 35 feet or less in width, shall have a rigid metal

member, not less than the equivalent of a two-inch standard steel pipe, at the
top and bottom edges, protected by the fabric on both the stage and
auditorium sides. Curtains over 35 feet in width shah have a rigid metal
frame, protected on both sides against fire and such frame shall be designed
for a wind pressure of not less than 15 pounds per square foot.

The proscenium curtain shall extend into non-combustible and smoke-proof

guides at the sides, a distance of not less than 12 inches. The curtain shall
overlap at the top of the proscenium opening not less than 24 inches, and the
bottom edge shall have a yielding pad of non-combustible materials not less
than four inches deep to form a seal against the floor.

The proscenium curtain shall be rigged and counter-balanced with not less
than six three-eights-inch flexible steel cables and six safety stop chains of
one-quarter-inch straight link-welded chain and shall be so arranged that it
can be quickly released to descend by gravity and completely close the
opening.

The releasing device and its location shall be approved by the Director.

f) Stage ventilators

There shall be one or more ventilators constructed of metal or other

noncombustible materials near the centre and above the highest point of any
permanent stage, raised above the roof and having a total ventilating area
equal to at least five percent of the floor area within the stage walls, doors or
covers for ventilators shall open by gravity and shall be held closed and
manually operated by means of cords extending to each side of the stage.

(H-7)
 These cords shall be equipped with three fusible links, one of which shall be placed
in the ventilator above the mains roof level and the other two at approved points, no
affected by sprinkler heads. Such links shall fuse and separate at 160 degrees
Fahrenheit. Glass, if used in such ventilators, shall be wire glass.

g) Flame-retarding requirements

No combustible scenery, drops, decorations, or other combustible effects shall be

placed on any stage or enclosed platform unless it treated with an effective
fire-retardant solution and maintained in a non-flammable condition as approved by
Department of Government responsible for fire protection and control,

h) Stage exits

At least one exit two feet six inches wide shall be provided from each side of the
stage opening, directly or by means of a passageway not less than three feet in width,
to a street or exit court. An exit stair not less than two feet six inches wide shall be
provided for egress from each by gallery.

Each tier of dressing rooms shall be provided with two remote paths of egress, each
not less than two feet six inches wide, and where dressing rooms are provided more
than one tier above the stage floor, stairways to all tiers shall be enclosed.

Stage exits shall be as set forth in Section except as otherwise required in this
Sub-section.

i) Other requirements

There shall be no enclosed structure for human occupancy located above a stage.

16. PLATFORMS

a) Platform construction

The platform shall be constructed entirely of non-combustible materials except that

where the auditorium floor extends under the full area of such platform, construction
may be of Type 2, omitting the fire-proofing on the beams and girders.

b) Size of platform

The platform shall not extend from the rear wall a distance greater than 18 feet,
measured to the greatest projection of the platform, nor shall the ceiling over any
platform be more than five feet above the screen except that platforms for schools
and churches may extend from the rear wall a distance not greater than 25 feet.

(H-8)
 c) Accessory rooms

No dressing or other rooms for human occupancy shall be located on, under or
above such platform unless such rooms shall be completely separated
therefrom by not less than two-hour fire-resistive construction.

d) Screen

The screen shall be rigidly attached to the platform and to the rear wall, and a
clear passageway, not less than 20 inches wide, shall be provided between the
screen or sound equipment and the rear wall.

17. MOTION PICTURE MACHINE BOOTHS

All booths constructed for the projection or showing of motion picture films shall be as
set forth herein:

a) Every motion-picture machine using nitro-cellulose or other inflammable films

together with all electrical devices, rheostats and sewing machines used in
connection therewith, and all such films, shall be enclosed in a booth large
enough to permit the operator to walk freely on either side or back of the
machine; and such room shall be not less than seven feet high and shall have a
floor area of not less than 50 square feet for each motion picture machine in
such booth.

b) The floors, walls and ceiling of such book shall be of non-combustible

materials of not less than two-hour fire-resistive construction as specified in
Section 4.

c) The entrance to the booth shall be equipped with tight-fitting, self-closing doors
of fire-resistive construction. Such door shall open outward and shall not be
equipped with any latch. Booths exceeding 200 square feet in area shall have
two means of exit therefrom, and doors shall be remotely located Any required
exit door from the motion picture booth shall be not less than two feet six
inches in width.

d) Machine and observation ports in machine booth walls shall be of three kinds:
projection ports, observation ports and combined observation and spotlights
ports. These ports shall be limited in size and number as follows: there shall be
not more than one projection port for each machine head having an area of not
more than 120 square inches.

e) There abal1 be not more than three combination observation and spotlight ports
and they shall not exceed so inches by 24 inches.

f) There shall be not less than one foot of wall apace between openings. Each port
in the projection booth wall shall be completely covered with a single pane of
plate glass; and each such opening, together with all fresh air inlets, shall be
provided with automatic shutters of not less than ten U.S. gauge sheet metal
and enough to overlap at least one inch on all sides and arranged to slide shut
by gravity without binding.

(H-9)
 g) These shutters shall be held normally open by means of chains equipped with
approved 160 degree-Fahrenheit fusible links, an so arranged that the shutters may
be easily released by hand or automatically by the fusible links and close smoothly
without noise.

h) Every booth shall be equipped with a ventilating inlet not less than 30 inches square
in area placed near the floor and protected by two layers of copper gauze, one of 18
meshed per inch and the other of ten meshed per inch, in addition to the shutter
specified above.

i) At the top of every booth, there shall be at least a ten-inch diameter vent for each
motion-picture machine. Such vent shall be constructed of not less than #4 U.S.
gauge sheet metal and shall connect into a masonry flue or go directly through the
roof and n inches above, and shall be provided with an exhaust fan which will
produce a complete change of air in the booth every two minutes.

j) No wood or other combustible materials shall be allowed closer than four inches to
such vent, and there shall be not more than one elbow or change of direction of
this metal vent in any attic space. No such vent shall pass through any occupied
room unless encased in not less than four inches of solid masonry.

k) All shelves, furniture and fixtures within the booth shall be constructed of metal or
other non- combustible materials.

1) Every motion-picture machine shall be securely fastened to the floor to prevent

overturning.

m) The rewinding machine shall be located in a fire-proof compartment within the

booth, and all films not in actual use shall be kept in individual metal boxes with
tight-fitting covers and must be stores, each in its individual box in a the-proof
cabinet, which cabinet shall be divided into compartments having a capacity of not
more than ten such films boxes in each compartment.

n) Each compartment shall have a separate tight-fitting, self-closing cover of not less
than ten U.S. gauge sheet metal, arranged to close automatically.

No solder shall be used in the construction of such metal boxes, compartments or

cabinets.

18. FIRE PROTECTION AND HAZARDS

The installation of fire alarm and fire suppression systems shall be in accordance with
Sub-section 505.

(H-10)
19. PLUMBING AND TOILET FACILITIES

The installation of plumbing and toilet facilities shall be in accordance with Sections 3 and 9.

20. EXCEPTIONS AND DEVIATIONS

Existing buildings not fully complying with the requirements of the Appendix may be used
for Group A Occupancies, if they meet the requirements of:

a) The construction Type, height and area as per Tables 3-1, 3-2 and 3-3.

b) Exit facilities as per Sub-section 503

c) Fire and Safety requirements as per Section 5 and

d) Plumbing and sanitation as per Section 9,

and providing that there is not less than a two-hour fire, separation between such buildings
and any other occupancies.

21. SCHOOLS AND CHURCHES

a) Special provisions

i) A fire-resistive ceiling shall not be required in the assembly space of churches

and gymnasiums in one-storey buildings, every part of the roof structure of
which is 18 feet or more above any floor or above any balcony or gallery
seating 50 or more persons.

ii) Rooms having an occupancy content of more than 100 persons and rooms
used for kindergarten, first, and second grade pupils, shall not be located
above the first storey above grade except in buildings of Type 1 construction.

iii) Where there is useable space under the first floor of two stories Type 3
buildings, basements, including the first floor shall be of Type 1 construction.

b) Occupancy content

For determining exit requirements of Group A, schools and churches the occupant
content shall be the area within the perimeter of the building or fire division at any
floor level, with no deduction for corridors, divided by the area per person as
specified below:

(H-11)
 Occupancy Area Sq.ft Per Person

Auditoriums 7
Dining Rooms 10
Gymnasium seating areas 6
Classrooms 16
School libraries 40
Other Uses 40

c) Widths of exits

Exits shall be provided as per Section 5

d) Arrangement of exits:

i) Classrooms and similar small room occupied by less than 40 persons may have one
door thereof, provided such door is not less than 36 inches in width and located at
the teacher end of the room.

ii) Classroom, shops and similar rooms occupied by 41 or more persons shall have not
less than two exit doors not less than 36 inches in width, the combined width of
which shall be not less than one 20 inch unit of exit width for each 100 persons or
fraction thereof, which doors shall be remote from each other.

iii) Rooms with occupant content exceeding 300 persons shall have exits as specified
for Group A Occupancies and as shown in Section 5.

iv) Classroom exits may be to corridors.

v) Rooms in basements shall have not less than 50 percent of the required paths of
egress therefrom opening directly to the exterior.

e) Corridors

i) Classrooms, assemblies to less than 300 persons, and other subdivisions shall open
directly to floor exits or shall connect thereto by means of corridors.

ii) Corridors shall have a width of not less than six feet nor less than four inches for
every 300 square feet, or major fraction thereof, of floor area served.

iii) Room doors or locker doors swinging into corridors shall not at any point in their
swing reduce the clear effective width of the corridor to less than six feet, nor shall
drinking fountains or other equipment fixed or moveable, be placed to obstruct the
required minimum six feet width.

(H-12)
 f) Balconies

Used as exits shall not be less than five feet in width at any point.

g) Floors

i) There shall be not less than two remote paths of egress from each floor.

ii) Floor exits shall be by means of stairways, ramps, horizontal exits,

passageways or by doors at or near grade, directly to be exterior.

iii) The upper floors of two storey buildings may have enclosed interior stairways
or open exterior stairways.

iv) The upper floors of three storey buildings shall have enclosed interior
stairways for not less than one-half of the required floor exits. Other upper
floor exits may be open exterior stairways or enclosed interior stairways.

v) The upper floor of building exceeding three stories shall have smokeproof
towers for not less than one half the required floor exits. Other upper floor
exits shall be enclosed interior stairways.

h) Doors

i) Doors in paths of egress, normally closed and latched shall be equipped with
panic hardware except that doors leading from classrooms directly to the
outside of the building may be equipped with the same knob-operated
schoolhouse type lock as is used on classroom doors leading to corridor with
not provision whatsoever for locking against egress from the classroom.

ii) The minimum width of any required door in a path of egress shall be 36
inches.

iii) Doors of classrooms serving as required exits may swing against the direction
of exit travel when serving an occupant load of less than 40 persons.

iv) Travel distance

The exits shall be so arranged that the maximum travel distance from any
point or from the door of the separated spaces loss than 800 square feet, to
the nearest floor exit shall not exceed 100 feet except that eh not distance in
any room where one exit door is permitted shall not exceed 40 feet.

(H-13)
 i) Fire protection and hazards

Automatic sprinkler systems, fire extinguishers, fire alarm systems and standpipes
shall be as set forth in Section 5.

j) Plumbing and toilet facilities.

i) Plumbing shall be installed as set forth in Section 9.

ii) The number of toilet units shall be provided as in Section 3.

k) Exceptions and deviations

Except in buildings of Type 1 Construction, school classrooms used for kindergarten,

first and second-grade pupils shall be located on the ground floor.

22. MIXED OCCUPANCIES

Separation of Group A Occupancies or division thereof from all other Occupancies or

Divisions of Occupancies shall be as set forth in Table 3.208 of Part 3 Section 3 of CUBiC.

(H-14)
 APPENDIX H (2)

REQUIREMENTS OF GROUP B OCCUPANCIES

1. DEFINITION

2. TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION

3. LOCATION

4. EXIT FACILITIES

a) Exit capacity
b) Travel distance

5. FIRE PROTECTION AND HAZARDS

6. PLUMBING AND TOILET FACILITIES

7. ELECTRICITY AND AIRCONDITIONING SERVICES

(H-15)
 APPENDIX H (2)

REQUIREMENTS OF GROUP B OCCUPANCIES

1. DEFINITION

Group B occupancy is defined as Institutional Buildings in which persons are incapacitated

or their movements are physically restrained. The buildings under this classification are
listed in 301.3.

2. TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION

Buildings in this Group can be of Types 1, 2, 3 or 4 construction. Construction in frames

(Type 5) is not permitted.

The permissible heights and are as under each classification are given in Table 3-3.

3. LOCATION

The limiting location of such buildings is given in Tables 3-4 to 3-7. The location with
respect to the boundaries or to adjacent buildings depend on the fire resistance rating of the
structure.

4. EXIT FACILITIES

a) Exit capacity

The number of persons per unit (22 inches of exit width) from a sprinklered or
non-sprinklered building shall be as per Table 5-3(b)

b) Travel Distance

The maximum permitted travel distance shall be as per Table 5-3(a), except that for a
sprinklered building the maximum travel distance may be increased to 150 ft.

5. FIRE PROTECTION AND HAZARDS

a) Buildings in this Group may be either sprinklered on non-sprinklered. To qualify for

the sprinkler option, buildings must be protected in accordance with NFiPA 13 and
the system must be supervised in accordance with NFiPA 71.

b) Buildings such as hospitals and nursing homes must be:

i) divided into areas not exceeding 750 sq.m. by 1 hour fire rated construction
and

ii) further subdivided into areas not exceeding 375 sq.m by construction which
is smoke proof.

(H-16)
 ii) further subdivided into areas not exceeding 375 sq.m by construction
which is smoke proof.

c) For prison institutional buildings, each cell must be bounded with separating
construction of block masonry or concrete with a fire rating of at least 1 hour
and doorways to cells and other openings in construction bounding cells must
be protected with 1 hour fire doors.

d) Institutional buildings not equipped throughout with complete automatic

sprinkler system shall have an approved automatic smoke detection system
installed in all corridors in accordance with NFiPA 72E. All automatic smoke
detection systems shall be connected electronically to the fire alarm system.

6. PLUMBING AND TOILET FACILITIES

The installation of plumbing and toilet facilities shall be in accordance with Section 3
and Section 9.

7. ELECTRICITY AND AIRCONDITIONING SERVICES

Section 11 provides guideline on the installation of electricity and air-conditioning

services. Designers are advised to consult the specialist handbooks for the provision of
these services to institutional buildings.

(H-17)
 APPENDIX H (3)

REQUIREMENTS FOR GROUP C OCCUPANCY

1. DEFINITION

2. CONSTRUCTION, HEIGHT AND AREA AVAILABLE

3. LOCATION ON PROPERTY

4. EXIT FACILITIES

a) General
b) Content
c) Width of exits
d) Arrangement of exits
e) Doors
f) Travel distance
g) Parking garages

5. LIGHT AND VENTILATION

6. FIRE PROTECTION HAZARDS

7. PLUMBING AND TOILET FIXTURES

(H-18)
 APPENDIX H (3)

REQUIREMENTS OF GROUP C OCCUPANCY

1. DEFINITION

Group C Occupancy shall include storage and industrial uses as listed in Section 301.4.

2. CONSTRUCTION, HEIGHT AND AREA ALLOWABLE

General

a) Buildings, or parts of buildings classed in Group C because of use or

occupancy shall be limited in height and area as shown in Table 3-3.

b) Motor vehicle service stations shall be Types 1, 2 or 3 (Protected) or 4

Construction. The canopies over the pumps may, at the discretion of the
Director, be of exposed steel columns and fire treated timber roofing Motor
vehicle service stations shall not be of Type 5 Construction.

c) Aircraft hangars shall be of Type Construction as approved by the Director

and shall comply with the requirements of the Ministry responsible for
Civil Aviation.

d) Parking garages used exclusively for parking and storing of passenger

motor vehicles shall be of Type 1 construction except that garages not
exceeding four stories may have framework and floors unprotected and
exterior walls of not less than two-hour fire resistive construction.

e) Floors in motor service stations, garages and aircraft hangars shall be

noncombustible materials protected against saturation.

f) Where ramps are used for the transfer of vehicles, or materials from one
floor to another, such ramps shah meet the ground floor level at a point not
less than 25 feet from the exit of such building.

3. LOCATIONON PROPERTY

a) Buildings with Group C Occupancy shall comply with the requirements of

the Department of Planning as given in the Development Manual or as
determined by the Director.

b) Exterior walls of Group C Occupancy buildings shall have fire-resistance

and opening protection, determined by location on property, as set forth for
Type of Construction in Table 3-4 to 3-7.

(H-19)
4. EXIT FACILITIES

a) General

Exit facilities for Group C Occupancies shall be as set forth Section 5, except that exit
facilities for parking garages where no persons other than parking attendants are
permitted on upper floors there shall not be less than one stairway for each 10,000
eq.ft. or fraction thereof. (see 4 g) below).

b) Occupant content

For determining exit requirements of Group C Occupancy, the occupant content shall
be the area within the perimeter of the building, or fire division at any floor level with
not deduction for corridors, divided by an area of 100 square feet per person.

c) Width of exits:

Exits shall be provided as follows:

Street floor exits shall be provided based on one 22 inch of exit width for each 100
persons or fraction thereof on the street floor plus one and one-half units for each two
units of stairway or ramp from upper or lower floor where such floors discharge
through eh street floor.

d) Arrangement of exits:

i) Interior spaces: Rooms or spaces shall have not less than two remote exits
except that where having an occupant content of less than 5 persons having
direct exit to public space and with travel distance not exceeding 50 feet a
single exit may be provided.
.
ii) Floors: There shall be not less than two remote paths of egress from each floor
except that floors or mezzanines of buildings not exceeding two stories and
having an occupant content of not more than 25 persons, may have a single door,
or an enclosed stairway, exiting directly to the exterior.

iii) Floor exits shall be by means of stairways, ramps horizonta1 exits passageways,
as specified in Section 5, or by doors, at or near grade, directly to the exterior.

iv) Dead ends in exit corridors beyond a floor exit or other corridor giving two
remote exits, shall not exceed 20 feet.

v) The upper floor of two-storey buildings may have interior stairways, enclosed
where required under Types of Construction, or open exterior stairways.

vi) The upper floors of three-storey buildings shall have enclosed interior
stairways for not less than one-half of the required floors exits. Other upper
exits may be open exterior stairways or enclosed interior stairways.

(H-20)
 vii) The upper floors of buildings which exceed three stories shall have enclosed
interior stairways, except that buildings which exceed five stories shall have
not less than one-half of the required floors exits by smokeproof towers.

viii) Where floors are divided in fire divisions, one exit from each such division
may be a horizontal exit.

e) Doors

Doors in paths of egress, normally closed and latched, and serving more than 50
persons, shall be equipped with panic hardware.

f) Travel distance

The exits shall be so arranged that the maximum travel distance from any point or
from the door of separated spaces having and occupant content of less than 50
persons, to the nearest floor exit shall not exceed 150 feet.

g) Parking garages

i) Where persons other than parking attendants are permitted, stairs and exits
shall be as otherwise set forth herein.

ii) Where no persons other than parking attendants are permitted, and a ramp for
transporting vehicles is constructed, or where cars are mechanically lifted
and parked without attendants or passengers there shall be not less than one
stairway for each 10,000 square feet or fraction thereof.

iii) Where cars are mechanically lifted and parked by attendants, one additional
exit shall be provided where such ramp is omitted. Such ramps shall be
considered an exit, and exits shall be remotely located so that the maximum
travel distance from any point to a floor exit shall not exceed 100 feet.

iv) Stairs shall be not less than three feet wide and shall be enclosed if more
than 50 percent of the periphery of the building is enclosed or if the
structure exceed three stories in height.

5. LIGHT AND VENTILATION

All portions of Group C Occupancies customarily used by human beings shall have light
and ventilation as set forth in Section 11. All portions of buildings where flammable liquids
are used or stored or where automobiles are stores or handled shall be provided with
mechanical ventilation as set forth in Chapter 40, except that the Buildings Control Officer
may waive this requirement when the building is provided with unobstructed openings
and/or cross ventilation.

(H-21)
6. FIRE PROTECTION AND HAZARDS

a) Automatic-sprinkler systems fire extinguishers and standpipes shall be as set forth in

Section 5.

b) The storage of flammable material shall be as set out in Part 3 section 3.303 of CUBiC.

c) The service of hazardous utilities shall be as set forth in Section 5 and in Part 3 Section
3.300 of CUBiC.

7. PLUMBING AND TOILET FIXTURES

a) Plumbing shall be installed as set forth in Section 9.

b) Toilet accommodation shall be as set forth in Section 3.

(H-22)
 APPENDIX H (4)

REQUIREMENTS FOR GROUP D OCCUPANCIES

1. DEFINITION

2. CONSTRUCTION, HEIGHT AND AREA ALLOWABLE

3. LOCATION ON PROPERTY

4. EXIT FACILITIES

a) Occupant content
b) Widths of exits
c) Arrangement of exits
d) Travel distance
e) Special restriction

5. LIGHT AND VENTILATION

6. FIRE PROTECTION AND HAZARDS

7. PLUMBMG AND TOILET FACILITIES

(H-23)
 APPENDIX H (4)

REQUIREMENIS OF GROUP D OCCUPANCIES

1. GROUND DEFINITION

Group D Occupancy is defined in Section 301.5 as being buildings used for business or
professional transactions or for the display of materials or finished products. This Group is
divided into two divisions in which markets and shops are separated from the other office
buildings and small restaurants.

2. CONSTRUCTION, HEIGHT AND AREA ALLOWABLE

General
Buildings, or parts of buildings classed in Group D because of use or occupancy, shall be
limited in height and area as given in Table 3-3.

Special provisions

a) Basements shall be of Type 1 construction

b) Buildings on open lots, if used far the dispensing of gasoline, shall be as set forth in
Appendix H (2) paragraph 2 (b).

3. LOCATION ON PROPERTY

Buildings with Group D Occupancy shall comply with the requirements of the Director of
Planning as given in the Development Manual and with Tables 3-4 to 3-7.

4. EXIT FACILITIES

Exit facilities for Group D Occupancies shall be as set forth in this Appendix and in Section
5.

a) Occupancy content

For determining exit requirements of Group F Occupancy, the occupant content shall be
the area within the perimeter of the building or fire division, any floor level with no
deduction for corridors, divided by the specified area per person as given in Table 3-1.

The occupancy content of floors or spaces used for assembly purposes shall be
computed as set forth in Table 3-1. The occupant content shall be the reasonable
maximum capacity based on the intended use as determined by the Director.

(H-24)
b) Widths of exits

Street floor exits shall be provided based on 22 inch of exit width for each 100
persons or fraction thereof on the street floor plus one and one-half units for
each two units of stairway or ramp from upper or lower floors where such
floors discharge through the street floors.

c) Arrangement of exits

i) Interior spaces

Rooms or spaces shall have not less than two remote exits except where
having an occupant content of less than 25 persons, having direct exit to
public space and with travel distance not exceeding 50 feet a single exit
may be provided.

In self-service stores, no check out stand or association railing turnstile

or barrier shall obstruct exits, aisles or approaches thereto.

Not less than one half of the required exits from the first or ground floor
of a mercantile occupancy shall be to the main entrance and exit.

In self-service stores where wheeled carts or buggies are used by

customers, adequate provision shall be made for the transit and parking
of such carts to minimize the possibility that they may obstruct exits.

ii) Floors

There shall be not less than two remote paths of egress from each floor
except that floors of buildings not exceeding two stories and having an
occupant content of not more than 25 persons may have a single door,
or an enclosed stairway, exiting directly to the exterior.

Floor exits shall be by means of stairways, ramps, horizontal exits,

passageways as specified in Section 5 or by doors at or near grade,
directly to the exterior. Dead ends in exit corridors beyond a floor exit
or other corridor having two remote exits shall not exceed 20 feet.

The upper floor of two-storey buildings shall have enclosed interior

stairways for not less than one-half of the required exits by smokeproof
towers.

Where floors are divided in fire divisions, one exit from each such
division may be a horizontal exit.

(H-25)
 iii) Doors

Doors in paths of egress, normally closed and latched, and serving more than
50 persons, shall be equipped with panic hardware.

d) Travel distance

The exits shall be so arranged that the maximum travel distance from any point or
from the door of separated spaces having an occupant content of less than 50
persons, to the nearest floor exit shall not exceed 150 feet except that if high hazard
commodities are displayed or handled without protective wrappings or containers
the travel distance shall not exceed 75 feet.

e) Special restriction

Smokeproof towers and enclosed interior stairways shall not be taken down to
basement level. Basement exits shall be separate.

5. LIGHT AND VENTILATION

All portions of Group D Occupancies customarily used by human beings shall have light
and ventilation as provided in Section 11.

6. FIRE PROTECTION AND HAZARDS

a) Automatic sprinkler systems, fire extinguishers and standpipes shall be as set forth in
Section 5.

b) The service of hazardous utilities shall be as set forth in Section 3 Part 3 of CUBiC.

c) Electrical installations hall be as required herein and as specified in Section 11.

d) The storage of flammable materials shall be as set forth in Part 3 Section 3 of

CUBiC.

7. PLUMBING AND TOILET FACILITIES

a) Plumbing shall be installed as set forth in Section 9

b) Toilet accommodation shall be as set out in Section 3

(H-26)
 APPENDIX H (5)

REQUI REMENTS OF GROUP E OCCUPANCIES

1. DEFINITION

2. CONSTRUCTION ON HEIGHT AND AREA ALLOWABLE

3. LOCATION ON PROPEREY

4. EXIT FACILITIES

a) General
b) Occupant content
c) Widths of exits
d) Arrangement of exits
e) Travel distance
f) Special restriction

5. LIGHT AND VENTILATION

a) General
b) Rooms

6. FIRE PROTECTION AND HAZARDS

7. PLUMBING AND TOILET FACILITIES

(H-27)
 APPENDIX H (5)

REQUIREMENTS OF GROUP E OCCUPANCIES

1. DEFINITION

Group E Occupancy shall include multiple-residential uses such as private residences, hotels,
motels and other buildings as listed in 301.5,

2. CONSTRUCNON, HEIGHT AND AREA ALLOWABLE

a) Buildings, or parts of buildings classed in Group E because of use or occupancy shall be

limited in height and area as given in Table 3-1.

b) EXCEPITION: Type 3 (Protected) buildings may be three stories in height if the floor
level of the third flood is not more than 20 feet above the grade adjacent thereto, but
where this exception is use, load bearing walls shall be of non-combustible materials.

c) Basement shall be of Type 1 construction.

3. LOCATION PROPERTY

a) Buildings with Group E Occupancy shall comply with the requirements of the Director
of Planning as given in the Development Manual and the requirements herein stated,
whichever are the more restrictive.

b) Exterior walls of buildings of Group E Occupancy shall have fire resistance and opening
protecting determined by location on property as set forth for the Type of Construction
given in Table 3-3.

4. EXIT FACILITIES

a) General

Exit .facilities for Group E Occupancies shall be as set forth in this Appendix and in
Section 5.

b) Occupant content

For determining exit requirements of Group E Occupancy, the occupant content shall be
the area within the perimeter of the building, or fire division any floor level, including
all floors of residential apartments, with no deduction for corridors, divided by an area
of 125 square feet per person except that dormitory room shall be computed at 30
square feet per person.

(H-28)
c) Widths of exits

i) Exits from street or ground floors shall be provided on the basis of one unit
(22-inches) of exit width for each 50 persons or fraction thereof on the
ground floor plus one unit for each unit of exit width exiting through the
ground floor from other floors.

ii) Exits from upper or lower floors other than the ground floor shall be
provided on the basis of one 22-inch unit of exit width for each 30 persons or
fraction thereof.

iii) All required paths of egress from floors shall be not less than 44 inches in
width, except that where serving floors having not more than four apartment
units or eight hotel rooms, one such required path of egress may be no less
than 36 inches in width.

iv) The minimum width of exit doors from dwelling units or hotel rooms shall
be not less than as given in Table 5-2.

v) Residential apartment units in multiples apartment buildings, having a

second floor or balcony contained wholly within the unit not exceeding
1,000 square feet and an additional exit not less than 30 inches in width fro
upper areas exceeding 1,000 square feet. Width of exit from main floors of
residential apartment units shall be as otherwise set forth in this Appendix.

iv) Exit courts on lot lines shall have a clear width, not less than required by
Town Planning but not less than 44 inches, and inner courts shall have a
clear width of not less than ten feet.

d) Arrangement of exits:

i) Unit exits:

Dwelling units and hotel rooms, 800 square feet or more in area, shall have
not less than two remote exits, except as otherwise provided for the upper
floors of residential-type apartment.

The landing on the upper floor of residential apartment units shall be directly
accessible from all rooms on such upper floors, and the stairway shall
discharge on the main floor of the unit in close proximity to a path of egress
from the unit. Where the upper floor of such unit has a gross floor area in
excess of 1,000 square feet, not less than two exits shall be provided, one of
which shall be enclosed and shall discharge directly to a path of egress from
the floor.

ii) Floor

There shall be not less than two remote paths of egress from each floor
except for two floor building containing only three apartments.

(H-29)
 Floor exits shall be by means of stairways, ramps, horizontal exits and
passageways as specified in section 5 or by doors at or near grade,
directly to the exterior.

Dead ends in exit corridors beyond a floor exit or other corridor

having two remote exits shall not exceed 20 feet.

The upper floor of two-storey buildings may have enclosed interior

stairways for not less than one-half of the required floor exits. Other
upper floor exits may be open exterior stairways or enclosed interior
stairways.

The upper floors of three-storey buildings shall have enclosed interior

stairways for not less than one-half the required floor exits. Other
upper floor exits may be open exterior stairways or enclosed interior
stairways.

EXCEPTION

Where the floor level of the third floor does not exceed 220 feet above
grade, all floor exits may be open exterior stairways.

The upper floors of buildings which exceed three stories shall have
enclosed interior stairways, except that buildings which exceed five
stories shall have not less than one-half of the required exits by smoke
proof towers.

Where floors are divided in fire divisions, one exit from each such
division may be a horizontal exit.

iii) Doors

Doors in paths of egress, normally closed and latched, and serving

more than 50 persons, shall be equipped with panic hardware.

e) Travel distance

i) General

The exits shall be so arranged that the maximum travel distance from
any point or from the door of separated sp aces less than 1,000 .square
feet to the nearest floor exit shall not exceed 100 feet except that the
travel distance in any room where one exit is permitted shall not
exceed 50feet.

ii) Apartments

Exits and means of access thereto shall be so located that it will not be
necessary to travel more than 50 feet nor traverse more than one flight
of stairs, within any individual living unit to reach the nearest exit, or
to reach an entrance of the apartment.

(H-30)
 iii) Doors and windows

(aa) Every sleeping room below the eighth floor in Group E

Occupancies shall have at least one openable windows or
exterior door to permit emergency exit or rescue.

(bb) Where such windows are provided, such windows shall have a
sill height of not less more than 48 inches above the floor and
shall provide not less than five square feet of openable area
with no dimension less than 22 inches.

iv) Transoms and ventilating openings

Buildings more than one storey in height shall have no transoms or

ventilating openings from guest rooms to enclosed public corridors.

f) Special provisions

Where Group D Occupancy buildings exceed three stories in height and

where the distance between floor exits exceeds 100 feet, smoke doors shall be
provided in the corridors. Those smoke doors shall be centrally located
between the exits and shall take the form of doors hung in recesses in the
corridor walls. The doors, when in the open position, shall be flush with the
wall of the corridor.

Smoke doors shall be kept in an open position at all times, when not in use, by
means of magnetic catches. These catches shall be connected to the fire alarm
system in such a manner that the doors will be released when the alarm is
activated. When the doors are in a closed position they shall not. be secured by
any means that impeded easy passage through the doorway. The doors shall be
of such size or framed in such a manner that when closed they effectively
control the spread of smoke in the corridor.

The doors shall be a minimum of 6 feet 8 inches in height and shall be of a

width deemed necessary to meet the exit requirements and shall be of 1 3/8
inches solid construction with a 10 inches by 10 inches wired glass panel.
These doors shall be tested in the presence of the Director at six month
intervals.

g) Special restriction:

Smoke proof towers and enclosed interior stairways shall not be taken down to
basement level. Basement exits shall be separate.

(H-31)
5. LIGHT AND VENTILATION

a) General

i) Rooms used for sleeping or living purposes shall be provided with light and
ventilation by means of widows in exterior walls with an area not less than
one eighth of the floor area of such rooms and not less than one-half of the
required windows area shall be openable.

ii) Other spaces for human occupancy such as lobbies, locker rooms dining
rooms, kitchens, and toilet rooms shall be provided with light by means of
windows as herein set forth or shall be provided with electric light and a
mechanically operated ventilating system as set forth in Chapter 40.

iii) Rooms used for sleeping and living purposes where located as the first
occupied space below a roof, shall be protected from extreme temperatures.
The overall coefficient of heat transmission or "U" factor of such roof
construction shall not be greater than 0.22.

iv) The floor area for an apartment shall be not less than required by applicable
Physical Planning and Ministry of Health Regulations.

b) Rooms

i) Sleeping rooms

Rooms used for sleeping shall have a minimum width of eight feet and a
minimum floor area with the immediate enclosing walls, exclusive of closets
and toilets, as required by the Minister of Health.

Rooms, the floor of which is more than three feet below grade and which
depend of natural ventilation shall not be used for sleeping purposes. The
minimum average height of each sleeping room shall be 7 feet 6 inches and
least height of the WC and bath shall be seven feet.

ii) Living and dining rooms

Living and Dining rooms shall have a minimum average height of eight feet.
Where fans are being used the minimum height should be nine feet.

iii) Kitchen and corridors

Kitchen and corridors shall have a minimum height of seven feet six inches.

(H-32)
 iv) Toilet rooms

Toilet rooms shall have a minimum height of seven feet, a minimum

width as given in Table 5-1.

6. FIRE PROTECTION AND HAZARDS

a) Automatic sprinkler systems, fire extinguishers and standpipes shall be as set

forth in Section 5.

b) The service of hazardous utilities shall be as set forth in Section 5 and in Part 3
Section 3.300 of CUBiC.

c) The storage of flammable materials shall be as set forth in Part 3 Section 3.303 of
CUBiC.

7. PLUMBING AND TOILET FACILFTIES

a) Plumbing and toilet facilities shall be as provided in Section 9 and Section 3.

b) Toilet rooms serving one-family unit shall have outside openings screened with
18-mesh wire screening. The minimum openable area shall be 2 square feet.

c) For occupancies with an occupant content of ten or more persons, separate

facilities shall be provided for employees.

d) Separate facilities consisting of water closet, a lavatory, and a bath or shower

shall be contiguous thereto and directly accessible from each hotel room.

e) Lavatories may be located in rooms provided there is no conflict with minimum

requirements otherwise set forth in Section 3.

(H-33)
 APPENDIX H (6)

REQUIREMENTS OF GROUP F OCCUPANCIES

1. DEFINITION

2. CONSTRUCTION, HEIGHT AND AREA ALLOWABLE

3. LOCATION ON PROPERTY

4. EXIT FACILITIES

a) Occupant content
b) Widths of exits
c) Arrangement of exits
d) Travel distance

5. LIGHT AND VENTILATION

6. ENCLOSURE OF VERTTCAL OPENINGS

7. FIRE PROTECTION AND HAZARDS

8. PLUMBING AND TOILET FACILITIES

(H-34)
 APPENDIX H (6)

REQUIREMENTS OF GROUP F OCCUPANCIES

1. DEFINITION

Group F Occupancy is defined in 301.7 and shall include such hazardous uses as storage
and use of highly combustible materials or explosives and is listed in Appendices D (1),
D (2) and D (3) of this Code.

2. CONSTRUTION, HEIGHT AND AREA ALLOWANCE

a) General

Buildings, or parts of buildings classed in Group F because of use or occupancy

shall be limited in height and area as given in Tables 3-1 and 3-3.

b) Other Laws

Developers must examine the Development Manual and the laws of the Turks and
Caicos Islands which affect the manufacture and/or storage of flammable or
hazardous material.

c) Special provisions

Floors shall be of non-combustible materials protected against saturation and

basements shall be Type 1 construction.

3. LOCATION ON PROPERTY

Buildings with Group F Occupancy shall comply with the requirements of Development
Manual and be in accordance with Tables 3-4 to 3-7.

4. EXIT FACILITIES

Exit facilities for Group F Occupancies shall be as set forth section 5 and the following:

a) Occupant content

For determining exit requirements of Group F Occupancies, the occupant

content shall be calculated in accordance with Table 3-1 the area within the
perimeter of the building, or fire division at any floor level, with no deductions
for corridors shall be used as the basis for the calculation.

(H-35)
b) Width of exits

Exits shall be provided as follows: (a) street floor exits shall be provided
based on one 22 inch of exit width for each 100 persons or fraction
thereof on the street floor plus one and one half units for each two units
of stairway or ramp from upper or lower floors where such floors
discharge through the street floor.

Upper or lower floors other than street shall have one n inch of exit width
for each 60 persons or fraction thereof except that horizontal exits and
smoke towers may serve 100 persons for each 22 units of exit width.

c) Arrangement of exits

i) Interior spaces

Occupied rooms, including mezzanines, shall have paths of egress so

located that travel from such rooms to a floor exit is not subjected to
hazardous exposure.

Rooms including mezzanines, 400 square feel or more in area, shall

have not less than two remote exits.

ii) Floors

There shall be not less than two remote paths of egress from each
floor.

Floor exits shall be by means of stairways, ramps, horizontal exits,

passageways as specified in Section 6, or by door & at or near grade,
directly to the exterior.

The upper floors of two storey buildings may have enclosed interior
stairways or exterior open stairways.

The upper floors of three storey buildings shall have enclosed interior
stairways for not less than one half the required floor exits.

Other upper floor exits may be open exterior stairways or enclosed

interior stairways.

The upper floors of buildings which exceed three stories shall have
smoke proof towers for not less than one half the required floor exits.
Other upper floor exits shall be enclosed interior stairways.

Where floors are divided in fire divisions, one exit from each such
division may be a horizontal exit.

(H-36)
 iii) Doors

Doors in paths of egress, normally closed and latched, and serving

more than 50 persons, shall be equipped with panic hardware.

d) Travel distance

Exits shall be so arranged that the maximum travel distance from any point to
the nearest floor exit shall be not more than 75 feet.

EXCEPTION: The travel distance in any room, including mezzanines, where

one exit door is permitted, shall not exceed 25 feet.

5. LIGHT AND VENTILATION

a) All portions of Group F Occupancies customarily used by human beings shall

have light and ventilation as set forth in Section 11. All portions of buildings
where flammable liquids are used or stored shall be provided with mechanical
ventilation.

b) In all buildings where flammable liquids are used or stored, mechanical

exhaust ventilation shall be provided, sufficient to produce one complete
change of ah every 10 minutes. Such exhaust ventilation shall be taken from a
point at or near floor level and shall be in operation when the building is
occupied by human beings.

6. ENCLOSURE OF VERTICAL OPENINGS

Vertical openings shall be enclosed and shall be of non-combustible materials of not

less than one hour fire resistive materials. Walls adjacent to open interior stairways
and the soffit thereof shall be constructed of not less than one hour fire resistive
materials as specified in Section 4.

7. FIRE PROTECTION AND HAZARDS

a) Automatic sprinkler systems, fire extinguishers, and standpipes shall be as set

forth in Section 5.

b) Electrical installations shall be as required herein and as specified in Section

11.

c) The storage or use of flammable materials shall be as set forth in Part 3

Section 3 of CUBiC or any other Code approved by the Board.

d) No combustion heater shall be installed in Group F Occupancies.

(H-37)
 e) Each machine in dry-cleaning plants which use a flammable liquid shall have
an adequate steam line connected to it, so arranged as to automatically fill
the machine with steam in case of fire.

f) Paint spraying and dipping shall comply with the requirements set forth in
CUBiC Part 3 Section 3.312.

8. PLUMBING AND TOILET FACILITIES

a) Plumbing shall be installed as set forth in Section 9.

b) Toilet accommodation shall be as set forth in Section 3.

(H-38)
 APPENDIX I (1)

TYPE 1 BUILDINGS - FIRE RESISTIVE

Contents

1. DEFINITION

2. GENERAL

3. STRUCTURAL FRAMEWORK

4. WALLS AND PARTITIONS

5. FLOORS

a) Material
b) Fireproofing

6. ROOFS

a) Materials
b) Fireproofing
c) Roof Coverings
d) Roof Drainage
e) Furred Spaces above a Ceiling

7. ENCLOSURE OF VERTICAL OPENINGS

8. STAIRWAYS

9. DOORS AND WINDOWS

10. PROJECTIONS FROM THE BUILDING

11. ROOF STRUCTURES

12. COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS

(I-1)
 APPENDIX I (1)

CLASSIFICATION BY TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION

TYPE 1 BUILDINGS (FIRE RESISTIVE)

1. DEFINITION

The structural frame of Type 1 buildings or structures shall be of steel or reinforced

concrete or masonry as noted below. Walls, permanent partitions, roofs and floors shall be
of noncombustible fire-resistive construction except as otherwise set forth herein.

2. GENERAL

a) Allowable height and area shall be as specified in Section 3 Table 3-3.

b) Loads and material stresses shall be as specified in Section 12.

3. STRUCTURAL FRAMEWORK

a) The primary structural framework shall be of not less than the following fire-resistive
construction: exterior frame four hours; interior frame three hours as per Table 3-4,
Section 3.

b) Unless specifically designed as a structural frame, the walls shall be considered as

load-bearing and shall be constructed of masonry or reinforced concrete except that 8
inch masonry block walls shall be limited to 20 feet in height and 12 inch masonry
block walls shall be limited to 30 feet in height. Bearing walls shal1 be of
fire-resistive construction as set forth in Tables 3-4 to 3-7.

4. WALLS AND PARTTTIONS

a) Distance separations shall be measured at right angles from the wall or opening to the
building line of continuous lot or any building on the same lot. The building line of a
continuous lot should be taken as that for the use of the contiguous lot which requires
the least set back from the property line, and in no case shall this setback be taken as
more than five feet from and parallel to the common lot line.

b) Main exterior walls shall be of noncombustible four hour fire resistive construction as
per Tables 3-4 to 3-7.

c) Openings in main exterior walls should be as follows:

i) Walls having a distance separate on of less than five feet, or walls, except on
street fronts, which are less than five feet from the building line of continuous
lot, shall have no openings.

(I-2)
 ii) Openings in walls of buildings having a distance separation or from
five to ten shall be protected by fire-resistive doors or windows. The
total area of openings in any storey shall be limited to 30 percent
with no single opening more than ten percent of such wall area.
Walls having a distance separation of more than ten feet but less
than 30 feet shall be protected by ordinary doors or windows not
exceeding 50 percent of the wall area in any storey.

d) Buildings having exterior walls without openings shall be provided with

access panels along street fronts or walls otherwise accessible for
fire-fighting entrance to the building as follows:

i) The access openings in each accessible side of a building not over

65 feet in height shall be not less than one suitably marked access
opening not less than 32 inches wide and 48 inches high with still
not over 32 inches above the floor spaced not more than 50 apart
on each floor each side.

ii) The access openings in each accessible side of a building over 65

feet in height shall be not less than

(aa) windows spaced not more than 50 feet apart and

equivalent to 10 % or more of the wall area, on each floor
of each such side, or

(bb) Smokeproof towers spaced not over 100 feet apart on each
such accessible side. The smokeproof towers may serve
as a required exit way.

e) Fire walls shall be of the fire-resistive rating as required in Section 4.

f) Interior bearing walls shall be of three-hour fire-resistive construction as per

Table 3-4 to 3-7, except that:

i) Corridor partitions shall also comply with Sub-section 503 Means

of Escape.

ii) Partitions subdividing offices, stores, apartments and similar uses

within the area occupied by a single tenant may be constructed
without a fire-resistive rating provided the materials of
construction are:

(aa) Noncombustible or

(bb) Fire-retarded treated wood or

(cc) Of other wood provided a space of not less than 18 inches,

as measured down from the ceiling, shall be open or of
transparent non-combustible material.

(I-3)
 g) i) Underground structures exceeding 2500 square feet in area shall be provided
with at least two means of access so located and of such size as to permit their
use by firemen at the time of fire.

ii) Where 10 or more occupants use the underground structure and the required
exits involve upward travel, a smoke proof tower shall be provided.

5. FLOORS

a) Material

i) Floor systems shall be of noncombustible materials. Poured-in-place concrete

slabs shall be not less than 2-1/2 inches thick where removable forms are
used nor less than 2 inches thick where tile, metal decking or similar
structural form element is to remain as a permanent component of the
structure.

ii) Where wood floors are laid over concrete slabs, the space between the floor
slab and the underside of the finish floor shall be filled with noncombustible
materials.

b) Fireproofing

Floors for buildings more that eight stories or more than 100 feet in height shall be
of not less than three hour fire-resistive construction; floors for buildings eight
stories or less or 100 feet or less in height shall be of not less than two-hour
fire-resistive construction. The use of bar joists shall be limited to buildings for
four stories.

6. ROOFS

a) Materials

Roof systems shall be of noncombustible materials Poured-in-place concrete slabs

shall be not less than 2-1/2 thick where removable forms are used nor less than 2
inches thick where tile, metal decking or similar structural-form element is to
remain as a permanent component of the structure.

ii) Where wood floors are laid over concrete slabs, the space between the floor
slab and the underside of the finish floor shall be filled with noncombustible
materials.

(I-4)
 b) Fireproofing

Roofs for buildings more than eight stories or more than 100 feet in height shall
be of not less than three-hour fire-resistive construction roofs for buildings
eight stories or less or 100 feet or less in height shall be of not less than
two-hour fire-resistive construction.

c) Roof Coverings

Roof coverings shall be fire-retardant in accordance with the test procedure of

the BSI or ASTM. (See Part 3 Section 3.605.4 of CUBiC)

d) Roof Drainage

Roof drainage and the disposal of rainwater shall be as specified in Section 9 -

Plumbing. In general, roof systems not designed to support accumulated water
shall be sloped for drainage. Rain water drains or leaders where required shall
be used and sized in conformance with the Section 9. (Chapter
36).

e) Furred Spaces above a Ceiling

Access trap doors, not less than 16 inches by 30 inches, shall be provided to all
spaces above a furred ceiling having a minimum vertical distance of 36 inches.
Such access trap doors shall be from common spaces such as corridors and no
part of such furred space shall be more than 100 feet from an access trap door.
Walkways shall be provided in such furred spaces above the ceiling.

7. ENCLOSURE OF VERTICAL OPENINGS

Enclosure of vertical openings shall be of noncombustible materials and not less than
one hour fire-resistive construction, and where such openings exceed eight square feet
in area shall be of not less than two-hour fire-resistive construction, with fire-resistive
doors and/or windows.

8. STAIRWAYS

a) Stairways shall be as required in Section 5.

b) Stairs, stair platforms, treads and riser shall be constructed of non-combustible

materials. Unprotected steel or iron stairways may be used only when enclosed.

(I-5)
9. DOORS AND WINDOWS

a) Doors, windows and similar openings in exterior walls, fire walls and enclosure
walls shall be protected or entirely prohibited. Section 4 sub-section 404 provides
information tm the requirements for fire doors and fire windows assemblies.

b) Doors and windows shall not project over public property or restricted areas.

10. PROJECTIONS FROM THE BUILDING

a) Cantilevering projections outside of the main exterior walls of the building shall be
of non-combustible materials and of not less than one-hour fire- resistive
construction.

b) Canopies, awnings and marquees forming part of the construction but outside of the
main exterior walls of the building but not cantilevered from the building shall be
constructed of non-combustible materials but need not have fire-resistive protection.

11. ROOF STRUCTURES AND SKYLIGHTS

a) Towers, pylons, masts, signs and similar structures above a roof, when not enclosed,
shall be of noncombustible materials.

b) Roof structures, including bulkhead area shall be limited in total combined area to 30
percent of the area of the roof, shall extend not more than 50 feet above the roof and
any enclosure having a floor area of more than 15 square feet shall be constructed as
required for the main portion of the building.

c) Minor roof structures having an area of 15 square feet or less, housing ventilating
shafts or similar openings shall be constructed of non-combustible materials.

d) Storage tanks, having a capacity of over 500 gallons, shall not be located over
stairways or elevators.

e) Skylights shall be constructed of non-combustible materials and transparent or

translucent materials shall be fire-resistive.

f) Where required to control rain water runoff, a curb not less than eight inches in
height shall be provided.

g) Where the public has access to roof areas, a guard rail not less than 36 inches above
the roof shall be provided around all open wells or shafts and at all exterior walls.

h) Skylights placed over shafts, vent shafts, stair enclosures, and exit ways, shall be
glazed with glass or other approved non-combustible material which may be easily
pierced by fire-fighting personnel.

(I-6)
12. COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS

Combustible materials shall be permitted for the following uses unless otherwise
specifically prohibited:

a) Show-window bulkheads shall be of non-combustible materials, but show

cases and other moveable appurtenances of stores or other buildings may be
of wood.

b) Trim, picture moldings, furniture, and permanent seats, chair rails,

wainscoting, baseboards, furring strips and blocking handrails, show window
backing temporary partitions conforming to Sub-section 4 of this Appendix
floor finishes and sleeper may be of combustible materials. Wood doors or
windows or frames may be used except where fire-resistive protection is
required.

c) Loading platforms, and roofs over loading platforms, for warehouse, freight
depots and buildings of similar use may be of heavy timber construction
provided such heavy timber construction does not penetrate the exterior walls.

d) All materials used for interior finishes shall be in accordance with Part 3
Section 6 Paragraph 3.606.2 of CUBiC.

e) In places of public assembly, all draperies, hanging and other decorative

materials suspended from walls or ceilings shall be non-combustible or
flame-resistant meeting the requirements of the code as herein specified:

Non-combustible: The permissible amount of non-combustible decorative

hangings shall not be limited.

Flame-resistant: The permissible amount of flame-resistant decorative

hangings shall not exceed ten (10) percent of the total
wall and ceiling area.

(I-7)
 APPENDIX I (2)

TYPE 2 BUILDINGS - SEMI-FIRE RESISTANT

Contents

1. DEFINITION

2. GENERAL

3. STRUCTURAL FRAMEWORK

4. WALLS AND PARTITIONS

5. FLOORS

a) Material
b) Fire proofing

6. ROOFS

a) Materials
b) Fireproofing
c) Roof Coverings
d) Roof Drainage
e) Attic Spaces

7. ENCLOSURE OF VERTTCAL OPENINGS

8. STAIRWAYS

9. DOORS AND WINDOWS

10. PROJECTIONS FROM THE BUILDING

11. ROOF STRUCTURES AND SKYLIGHTS

12. COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS

(I-8)
 APPENDIX I (2)

TYPE 2 BUILDINGS (Semi-Fire-Resistive)

1. DEFINITION

a) The structural frame of Type 2 buildings or structures shall be of steel or reinforced

concrete or masonry as noted below.

b) Walls, permanent partitions, roofs and floors shall be of non-combustible

fire-resistive construction except that permanent non-load-bearing partitions of
one-hour fire resistive construction may use the-retardant treated wood within the
assembly.

2. GENERAL

a) Allowable height and area shall be as specified in Section 3.

b) Loads and material stresses shall be as specified in Section 12.

c) Required fireproofing shall be as set forth in Section 4.

3. STRUCTURAL FRAMEWORK

a) The primary structural framework shall be of not less than three-hour fire-resistive
construction for members in exterior walls and of not less than one hour
fire-resistive construction for members in the interior frame as per Tables 3-4 to 3-7.

b) Unless specifically designed as a structural frame, the walls shall be considered as

load-bearing and shall be constructed of masonry or reinforced concrete except that
8 inch masonry block walls shall be limited to 20 feet in height and 12 inch masonry
block walls shall be limited to 30 feet in height. Bearing walls shall be of
fire-resistive construction as set forth in Table 3-2.

4. WALLS AND PARTITIONS

a) Exterior walls shall be as set forth in Tables 3-4 to 3-7.

b) Fire walls shall be of the fire-resistive rating as required in Tables 3-2 and 3-4 to 3-7.

c) Interior bearing walls shall be of noncombustible one-hour fire-resistive construction

as per Tables 3-4 to 3-7.

d) Partitions shall be of not less than one-hour fire resistive construction except as
provided in Tables 3-4 to 3-7.

(I-9)
5. FLOORS

a) Material

i) Floor systems shall be of noncombustible material or fire-retardant treated

wood.

Exception: Fire retardant treated wood may not be used in buildings

exceeding two stories in height.

ii) Wood joists shall not be used to support concrete and cement-base tile or
terrazzo floor surfaces other than for bathrooms or less than 100 square feet
in area.

iii) Spaces under a ground floor shall have the clearance and ventilation as set
forth in the Section 14. Openings shall be provided to all space under the
building.

b) Fireproofing

Moors and all parts thereof shall be of not less than two-hour fire-resistive
construction as per Tables 3-4 to 3-7, except that where the space under a ground
floor has clearance of less than three feet, such fire protection for the ground floor
may be omitted.

6. ROOFS

a) Materials

Roof systems shall be of noncombustible materials or of fire-retardant treated wood.

b) Fireproofing

Roofs and all parts thereof shall be of net less than one-hour fire-resistive
construction as per Tables 3-4 to 3-7, except as follows:

i) Roofs, where every pan of the structural framework is 20 feet or more above
any part of the floor, balcony or gallery, may be on unprotected
non-combustible materials or fire-retardant treated wood.

ii) Roofs of one-storey open sheds not more than 75 percent enclosed by walls,
in which the travel distance to the neatest exit does not exceed 40 feet, may
be of unprotected noncombustible materials.

(I-10)
 c) Roof Coverings

Roof coverings shall be fire-retardant and as specified in Part 3 Section 6 of

CUBiC.

d) Roof Drainage

Roof drainage and the disposal of rainwater shall be as specified in the

Section 9. In general, roof systems not designed to support accumulated
water shall be sloped for drainage.

e) Attic Spaces

Attic spaces shall not be required, but where attic spaces are provided such
spaces shall have a minimum vertical dimension of 18 inches clear distance
and where unprotected combustible material is exposed, shall be divided, by
fire-stops, into areas not exceeding 2500 square feet, or less depending on
individual occupancy. Access trap doors, not less than 16 inches by 30
inches, shall be provided to all attic spaces. Such access trap doors shall be
from common spaces such as corridors, and no part of an attic space shall be
more than 100 feet from an access trap door.

7. ENCLOSURE OF VERTICAL OPENINGS

a) Enclosure of vertical openings shall be of noncombustible materials and

where such openings exceed eight square feet in area shall be not less than
one hour fire-resistive construction, with fire-resistive doors and/or
windows.

b) Where the enclosure of vertical openings is required to be of not less than

one-hour fire-resistive construction the materials of construction shall be
noncombustible or fire-retardant treated wood.

8. STAIRWAYS

a) Stairways shall be as required in the Section 5.

b) Stairs, stair platforms, treads and riser shall be constructed of non-combustible

materials. Unprotected steel or iron stairways may be used only when
enclosed.

9. DOORS AND WINDOWS

a) Doors, windows and similar openings in exterior walls, fire walls and
enclosure walls shall be protected or entirely prohibited as set forth in
Section 5.

b) Doors and windows shall not project over public property or restricted areas.

(I-11)
10. PROJECTIONS FROM THE BUILDING

a) Cantilevering projections outside of the main exterior walls of the building shall
be of non-combustible construction or fire-retardant treated wood, and shall be of
not less than one-hour fire-resistive construction.

b) Canopies, awnings and marquees forming part of the construction but outside of
the main exterior walls of the building but not cantilevered from the building shall
be constructed of non-combustible materials but need not have fire-resistive
protection.

11. ROOF STRUCTURES AND SKYLIGHTS

a) Towers, pylons, masts, signs and similar structures above a roof, when not
enclosed, shall be of noncombustible materials. Roof structure extending more
than 25 feet above the roof or signs more than 100 square feet in area shall be
supported to the ground by a non-combustive frame, unless already incorporated
into the building frame design.

b) Roof structures, including bulkheaded areas, shall be limited in total combined

area to 30 percent of the area of the roof shall extend not more than 20 feet above
the allowable height and any enclosure having a floor area of more than 15 square
feet shall be constructed as required for the main portion of the building.

c) Minor roof structures having an area of 15 square feet or less, housing ventilating
shafts or similar openings shall be constructed of non-combustible materials.

d) Storage tanks, having a capacity of over 500 gallons, shall not be located over
stairways or elevators.

e) Skylights shall be constructed of non-combustible materials and transparent or

translucent materials shall be fire-resistive.

f) i) Parapets shall be required on exterior walls except where the roof is of

noncombustible, fire-resistive construction.

ii) Parapets shall be not less than 20 inches above the roof immediately
adjacent thereto where located 20 feet or less to/from the building line of a
contiguous lot or any building on the same lot, and shall be constructed as
set forth in Section 15.

iii) Where required to control rain water runoff, a curb not less than eight
inches in height shall be provided.

g) Where the public has access to roof areas, a guard rail not less than 36 inches
above the roof shall be provided around all open wells or shafts and at all exterior
walls.

(I-12)
12. COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS

a) Combustible materials shall be permitted except where specifically prohibited in this

Appendix.

b) Loading platforms for warehouses, freight depots and buildings may be of heavy
timber construction with wood floors not less than one and five-eighths inches thick.
Such wood construction shall not be carried through the exterior walls.

c) Interior finishes shall be as set forth in Part 3 Section 6 of CUBiC.

(I-13)
 APPENDIX I (3)

TYPE 3 BUILDINGS - ORDINARY MASONRY

Contents

1. DEFINITION

2. GENERAL

3. STRUCTURAL FRAMEWORK

a) Materials
b) Fireproofing
c) Heavy Timber Construction

4. WALLS AND PARTITIONS

5. FLOORS

a) Material
b) Fireproofing

6. ROOFS

a) Materials
b) Fireproofing
c) Roof Coverings
d) Roof Drainage
e) Attic Spaces

7. ENCLOSURE OF VERTICAL OPENINGS

8. STAIRWAYS

9. DOORS AND WINDOWS

10. PROJECTIONS FROM THE BUILDING

11. ROOF STRUCTURES AND SKYLIGHTS

12. COMBUSTIBLE MTERIALS

(I-14)
 APPENDIX I (3)

TYPE 3 BUILDINGS - ORDINARY MASONRY

1. DEFINITION

a) i) Type 3 buildings or structures shall have an exterior structural frame of

steel or reinforced concrete or of fire-retardant treated wood, or shall
have exterior load-bearing walls of non-combustible, fire-resistive
construction.

ii) Type 3 buildings or structures shall have an interior structural frame of

steel reinforced concrete, wood, or interior load bearing walls of
non-combustible materials or wood.

iii) Partitions, floors and roof framing may be of wood.

b) Walls, permanent partitions, roofs and floors shall be of non-combustible fire-

resistive construction, except that permanent non-load-bearing partitions of
one-hour fire resistive construction may use fire-retardant treated wood within
the assembly.

2. GENERAL

a) Allowable height and area shall be as specified in Section 3.

b) Loads and material stresses shall be as specified in Section 12.

c) Required fireproofing shall be as set forth in Section 4.

3. STRUCTURAL FRAMEWORK

a) Materials

i) Unless specifically designed as a structural frame with panel walls, the

exterior walls shall be considered as load-bearing and shall be
constructed of masonry or reinforced concrete except that 8 inch
masonry walls shall be limited to 20 feet in height and 12 inch masonry
block walls shall be limited to 30 feet in height. Where designed as a
structural frame, the materials shall be as specified in sections 14, 15,
16and 17.

ii) The interior structural support shall be of steel, reinforced concrete, or

interior bearing walls of noncombustible materials or wood studs.
(Tables 3-4 to 3-7)

(I-15)
 b) Fireproofing

i) Fireproofing shall be as required in sections 3 or 4. Where required or where

otherwise referred to in this code as being protected, the structural framework
or supports shall be of not less than one-hour fire-resistive construction except
that members in the exterior walls shall have the fire protection as set forth in
Tables 3-4 to 3-7.

ii) All steel members supporting masonry in buildings over one Storey in height
shall be fire-proofed with not less than one-hour fire resistive construction.

iii) Heavy timber structures, designed and constructed in accordance with Section
14, shall be considered the equivalent of one-hour fire-resistive protection.

c) Heavy Timber Construction

i) General

Heavy timber construction is that type in which fire resistance is attained by

placing limitations on minimum sizes of wood structural members including
the thicknesses and compositions of wood floors and roofs and by the use of
approved fastenings and construction details.

ii) Heavy Timber Framing

Heavy timber columns, floors sizes and framing, roof sizes and framing, and
construction details shall be as specified in Section 14.

iii) Heavy Timber Floors

Heavy timber floors shall be constructed as specified in Section 14.

iv) Heavy Timber Roof Decks

Heavy timber roof decks shall be constructed as specified in Section

14.

4. WALLS AND PARTITIONS

a) Exterior walls shall be as set forth in Tables 3-4 to 3-7.

b) Fire walls shall be of the fire-resistive rating as required in Tables 3-4 to 3-7.

c) Interior bearing walls shall be of noncombustible materials or of wood studs, and for
Type 3 (protected) buildings, or for Type 3 (unprotected) buildings where supporting
upper floors or where adjacent to common corridors shall be of one-hour fire-resistive
construction.

(I-16)
5. FLOORS

a) Material

i) Floors shall be of non combustible material or woods.

ii) Wood joists shall not be used to support concrete and cement-base tile or terrazzo
floor surfaces other than for bathrooms or less than 100 square feet in area.

iii) Wood post and girder construction shall not be permitted for a ground floor of
buildings used by the public and spaces under ground floors shall have the
clearance and ventilation as set forth in Section 14.

b) Fire proofing

Floors and all parts thereof of Type 3 buildings shall not be constructed of materials and
assemblies of less fire resistance than shown in Tables 3-4 to 3-7, except that where a
ground floor has clearance of less than three feet, such fire protection may be omitted.

6. ROOFS

a) Materials

Roof systems shall be of non-combustible materials or wood.

b) Fireproofing

Roofs and all parts thereof of unprotected Type 3 buildings and protected Type 3 buildings
shall be of not less than one-hour fire-resistive construction, except as follows:

i) Roofs, where every part of the structural framework is 18 feet or more above any
part of any floor, may be of unprotected non-combustible materials or protected
combustible materials.

ii) Roofs of one-storey open sheds not more than 75 percent enclosed by walls, in
which the travel distance to he nearest exit does not exceed 40 feet, may be of
unprotected noncombustible materials or protected combustible materials.

c) Roof Coverings

Roof coverings shall be fire-retardant and as specified in CUBiC Part 3 Section 6.

(I-17)
 d) Roof Drainage

Roof drainage and the disposal of rainwater shall be as specified in Section 9. In

general, roof systems not designed to support accumulated water shall be sloped for
drainage.

e) Attic Spaces

Attic spaces shall not be required, but where attic spaces are provided such spaces
shall have a minimum vertical dimension of 18 inches clear distance and where
unprotected combustible material is exposed, shall be divided, by fire-stops, into
areas not exceeding 2,500 square feet, or less depending on individual occupancy.
Access trap doors shall be from common spaces such as corridors, and no part of an
attic space shall be more than 100 feet from an access trap door.

7. ENCLOSURE OF VERTICAL OPENINGS

Enclosure of vertical openings shall be of noncombustible materials and where such

openings exceed eight square feet in area shall be not less than one hour fire-resistive
construction. Walls adjacent to open interior stairways and the soffits thereof shall be
of not less than one hour fire-resistive construction.

8. STAIRWAYS

Stairways shall be as required in Section 5.

9. DOORS AND WINDOWS

a) Doors, windows and similar openings in exterior walls, fire walls and enclosure walls
shall be protected as per Section 4 Sub-section 405.

b) Doors and windows shall not project over public property or restricted areas.

10. PROJECTIONS FROM THE BUILDING

Cantilevering projections outside of the main exterior walls of the building shall be of
non-combustible construction and be fire-resistive as specified in this Appendix,
except that the projection of wood roof rafters of residential occupancies over private
property shall be permitted.

(I-18)
11. ROOF STRUCTURES AND SKYLINES

a) Towers, pylons, masts, signs and similar structures above a roof, when not
enclosed, shall be of noncombustible materials. Roof structures extending
more than 25 feet above the roof or signs more than 100 square feet in area
shall be supported to the ground by a incombustible frame, unless already
incorporated into the building frame design.

b) Roof structures including bulkheaded areas, shall be limited in total

combined area to 30 percent of the area of the roof, shall extend not more
than 20 feet above the allowable height and any enclosure having a floor
area of more than 15 square feet shall be constructed as required for the main
portion of the building.

c) Minor roof structures having an area of 15 square feet or less, housing

ventilating shafts or similar openings shall be constructed of
non-combustible materials.

d) Storage tanks, having a capacity of over 500 gallons, shall not be located
over stairways or elevators.

e) Skylights shall be constructed of non-combustible materials and transparent

or translucent materials shall be fire-resistive.

f) Parapets shall be required on exterior walls except:

i) Where the roof is of non-combustible, fire-resistive construction.

ii) Where the walls of buildings for other than residential occupancy are
20 feet from the building of a continuous lot or any building on the
same lot.

iii) Where the building is of residential occupancy.

g) Parapets shall be not less than 20 inches above the roof immediately adjacent
thereto and shall be constructed as set forth in Sections 15 or 16.

h) Where required to control rain water runoff a curb net less then eight inches
in height shall be provided.

12. COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS

a) Combustible materials shall be permitted except where specifically

prohibited in Section 3 and/or Section 4.

b) Loading platforms for warehouses, freight depots and buildings may be of

heavy timber construction with wood floors not less than 1-3/4 inches thick.
Such wood construction shall not be carried through the exterior walls.

c) Interior finishes shall be as set forth in CUBiC Part 3 Section 6.

(I-19)
 APPENDIX I (4)

TYPE 4 BUILDINGS – NON-COMBUSTIBLE

Contents

1. DEFINITION

2. GENERAL

3. STRUCTURAL FRAMEWORK

4. WALLS AND PARTITIONS

5. FLOORS

6. ROOFS

7. DOORS AND WINDOWS

8. PROJECTIONS FROM THE BUILDING

9. ROOFST STRUCTURES AND SKYLIGHTS

10. COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS

(I-20)
 APPENDIX I (4)

TYPE 4 BUILDINGS - NON-COMBUSTIBLE

1. DEFINITON

All structural and other elements of type 4 buildings shall be of non-combustible

materials.

2. GENERAL

a) Allowable heights and areas shall be as specified Section 3.

b) Loads and material stresses shall be as specified in Section 12

c) Required fireproofing shall be as set forth in Sections 3 and 4.

3. STRUCTURAL FRAMEWORK

The structural framework shall be of steel, aluminum, or reinforced concrete, and

fireproofing of structural members shall be required only when such members are a
part of an exterior wall as set forth Tables 3-4 to 3-7.

4. WALLS AND PARTITIONS

a) Distance separation shall be measured at night angles from the wall or opening
to the building line or a continuous let or any building on the same lot. The
building line of a continuous lot shall be taken as that for the use of the
continuous lot which requires the least set back from the property line and in no
case shall this set back be taken as more than five feet from and parallel to the
common lot line.

b) The main exterior walls shall be of non-combustible materials and such walls
shall be of fire-resistive construction with opening protection where located as
follows:

i) Main exterior walls having a distance separation of from five to ten feet
shall be of not less than one-hour fire resistive construction and
openings therein shall be protected by fire-resistive doors and
windows and shall be limited in area to 30 percent of the wall area
with no single openings or more than ten percent of such wall area.

c) Fire walls shall be of non-combustible materials and shall be of the

fire-resistive rating as required in the Section 3.

d) Interior bearing walls shall be of non-combustible materials.

(I-21)
 5. FLOORS

Floors shall be of non-combustible material, provided, however that a wood surface or

finish may be applied over such non-combustible materials.

6. ROOFS

a) Roof systems shall be of non-combustible materials and fire-proofing shall not be

required.

b) Roof coverings shall be as specified in the CUBiC Part 3 Section 6.

c) Roof Drainage

Roof drainage and the disposal of rainwater shall be as specified in Section 9. In

general, roof systems not designed to support accumulated water shall be sloped for
drainage.

7. DOORS AND WINDOWS

a) Doors, windows and similar openings in exterior walls, fire walls and enclosure walls
shall be protected or entirely prohibited as set forth in Sections 3 and 4.

b) Doors and windows shall not project over public property or restricted areas.

8. PROJECTIONS FROM THE BUILDING

Projections from the building shall be of non-combustible materials.

9. ROOF STRUCTURES AND SKYLIGHTS

a) Roof structures may extend above the allowable height not to exceed 20 feet and shall
be of non-combustible materials.

b) Skylights shall be constructed of non-combustible materials and transparent or

translucent materials shall be fire-resistive.

c) Where the public has access to roof areas, a guard rail not less than 36 inches above the
roof shall be provided around all open wells or shafts and at all exterior walls.

(I-22)
10. COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS

A loading platform may be constructed of heavy timber with wood floors not less than 1-3/4
inches thick. A Type 4 building or structure erected over such platform shall be supported by
non-combustible materials to the foundation.

(I-23)
 APPENDIX I (5)

TYPE 5 BUILDINGS - WOOD FRAME

Contents

1. DENFINITION

2. GENERAL

3. WALLS AND PARTITIONS

4. FLOORS

5. ROOFS

6. FIREROOFING

7. STAIRWAYS

8. DOORS AND WINDOWS

9. PROJECTIONS FROM THE BUILDING

10. COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS

(I-24)
 APPENDIX I (5)

TYPE 5 BUILDINGS - WOOD FRAME

1. DEFINITION

All structural and other elements of Type 5 buildings shall be of non-combustible

materials or wood or any materials allowed by this code.

2. GENERAL

a) Allowable height and area shall be as specified in Section 3.

b) Loads and material stresses shall be as specified in Section 12.

c) Required fireproofing shall be as set forth in Sections 3 and 4.

3. WALLS AND PARTITIONS

a) Distance separation shall be measured at right angles from the wall or opening to
the building line or a continuous lot or any building on the same lot. The building
line of a continuous lot shall be taken as that for the use of the continuous lot
which requires the least set back from the property line, and in no case shall this set
back be taken as more than five feet from and parallel to the common lot line.

b) The main exterior walls shall be of non-combustible materials and such walls shall
be of fire-resistive construction with opening protection where located as follows:

i) Main exterior walls having a distance separation of less than five feet or
walls except of street fronts which are less than five feet from the building
of a contiguous lot, shall be of not less than two hour fire resistive
construction and have no openings therein.

ii) Main exterior walls having a distance separation of from five to tea feet
shall be of not less than one-hour fire resistive construction and openings
therein shall be protected by fire-resistive doors and windows and shall be
limited in area to 30 percent of the wall area with no single openings or
more than ten percent of such wall area.

c) Fire walls shall be of non-combustible materials and shall be of the fire-resistive

rating as required in Section 3.

d) Interior bearing walls shall be of non-combustible materials or wood.

(I-25)
 4. FLOORS

a) Floors shall be of steel concrete or wood.

b) Wood posts shall not be permitted under a girder supporting a ground floor
and spaces under ground floors shall have the clearance for ventilation.

c) Access openings shall be provided to all space under the building.

5. ROOFS

a) Roof systems shall be of noncombustible materials or wood.

b) Roof coverings shall be as specified in CUBiC Part 3 Section 6.

c) Roof drainage and the disposal of rainwater shall be as specified in Section.

In general, roof systems not designed to support accumulated water shall be
sloped for drainage.

d) Attic spaces shall not be required but where attic spaces are provided, such
spaces shall have a minimum vertical dimension of 18 inches clear distance
and, where unprotected combustible material is exposes, shall be divided by
fire stops into areas not exceeding 5500 square feet or less depending on
occupancy. Access trap doors shall be from common spaces such as
corridors, and no part of an attic space shall be more than 100 feet from an
access trap door. Minimum vertical dimension shall not be required for hip
or gable roof construction.

6. FIREPROOFING

Bearing walls supporting floors shall not be less than one- hour fire-resistive
protection except that where a ground floor has clearance of less than three feet,
such protection may be omitted.

7. STAIRWAYS

a) Stairways shall be as required in Section 3 and in Section 4.

b) Stairways may be of non-combustible or combustible materials.

8. a) Doors, windows and similar openings in exterior walls, fire walls and enclosure
walls shall be protected or entirely prohibited as set forth in Sections 3 or 4.

b) Doors and windows shall not project over public property or restricted areas.

(I-26)
9. PROJECTIONS FROM THE BUILDING

Projections from the building may be of wood.

10. COMBUSTIBLE MARERIALS

No materials more combustible than wood shall be permitted in the construction of

permanent portions Type 5 buildings.

(I-27)